EST3

Installation and Service

Manual
P/N 270380 Rev 7.0 10SEP07

DEVELOPED BY

GE Security, Inc.
8985 Town Center Parkway
Bradenton, FL 34202
(941) 739-4300

COPYRIGHT NOTICE

Copyright 2007 GE Security, Inc.

This manual is copyrighted by GE Security, Inc. (GE Security).
You may not reproduce, translate, transcribe, or transmit any
part of this manual without express, written permission from GE
Security.
This manual contains proprietary information intended for
distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole
purpose of conducting business with GE Security. Unauthorized
distrib ution of the information contained in this manual may
violate the terms of the distribution agreement.

TRADEMARKS

Microsoft, Microsoft Mouse, Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Word,

and Microsoft Access are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Content
Document history iv
Important information v
About this manual ix
The EST3 library xi
Related documentation xii
Chapter 1

System overview 1.1

System description 1.2
Audio subsystem description 1.6
Digital network subsystem 1.16
Foreign language support 1.22
Signature series devices 1.26
Network applications 1.29
Audio applications 1.33
Firefighter phone system 1.42

Chapter 2

Security applications 2.1

Security equipment 2.2
Certificate installations 2.8
Multiple 3-MODCOM modules 2.12
Multiple site security and access 2.13
Multiple tenant security 2.16
Secure access 2.20

Chapter 3

Access control applications 3.1

Access control equipment 3.2
Anti-passback 3.11
Central monitoring station 3.14
Common door access 3.16
Delayed egress 3.18
Elevator control 3.21
Emergency exit door 3.24
Handicap access door 3.26
Maglock peripherals 3.28
Multiple card readers 3.30
Muster 3.32
Power for continuous locks 3.35
Power for intermittent locks 3.37
Power from an AC source 3.39
Power from a remote source 3.42
Remote controls 3.45
Two-person rule 3.47

Chapter 4

Centralized audio applications 4.1

Equipment required 4.2
ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4.3
ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.6
Audio amplifiers 4.8
URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content
ATP external battery charger 4.20
Amplifier backup 4.22
Branch speaker wiring 4.25
Troubleshooting 4.27
Chapter 5

Installation 5.1
Installation overview 5.3
UL 864 NAC signal synchronization 5.6
Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5.16
System installation sequence 5.18
Preliminary field wiring testing 5.19
Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks 5.22
ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5.23
Local rail module installation 5.24
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5.26
3-SAC Security Access Control module 5.40
3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC-3 5.41
AC power and DC battery wiring 5.42
Connecting auxiliary/booster power supplies 5.44
Connecting the PT-1S impact printer 5.46
Adjusting amplifier output levels 5.49
Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5.50
Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote
Diagnostics Utility 5.53
Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5.55

Chapter 6

Power-up and testing 6.1

Cabinet power-up procedure 6.3
Runtime and system errors 6.4
Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6.6
Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6.7
Detector, input module, and output module testing 6.18
Initiating device testing 6.21
Notification appliance testing 6.23
Record of completion 6.24

Chapter 7

Preventive maintenance 7.1

General 7.2
Preventive maintenance schedule 7.3
Signature device routine maintenance tips 7.5
Signature detector cleaning procedure 7.6
System trouble and maintenance log 7.7

Chapter 8

Service and troubleshooting 8.1

Overview 8.3
Hardware problems 8.5
Modules 8.7
Audio components 8.20
Pseudo point descriptions 8.24
Signature data circuit (SDC) operation 8.35
Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8.37
Signature controller modules 8.47
Device troubleshooting 8.49
Signature diagnostic tools 8.51

ii

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content
DSDC status 8.65
Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8.70
3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8.74
Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8.75
Wiring problems 8.77
Appendix A

System addresses A.1

Address format A.2
LRM addresses A.4
Control / display module addresses A.9
Device addresses A.10

Appendix B

System calculations B.1

Network data riser limits B.2
Signature data circuit wire length B.5
Notification appliance circuit calculations B.11
25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length B.17
Addressable analog circuit wire length B.19
Cabinet battery B.20
SAC bus power B.21
CPU memory B.26
Fiber optic cable worksheet B.28

Appendix C

Listing requirements C.1

NFPA standards C.2
Minimum requirements for UL security applications C.3
UL and ULC requirements C.10

Glossary Y.1

Index Z.1

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

iii

Content

Document history
Date

Revision

Reason for change

17JUL96

1.0

Initial release

31MAR97

1.5

Revised: detector cleaning procedure; CAB & RCC Cabinets;

download wiring; Compatibility info; Power supply specifications;
3-CPU wiring; System addressing; 3-IDC8/4 jumpers & wiring.
Added: power supply location information; 3-SSDC(1) Filter
Board; Humidity limits, Isolator limits.

14DEC98

2.0

Revised: 3-ASU & 3-RS485 specifications; Battery shelf data;

Module current draw; 3-CPU1 network wiring.
Added: 3-AADC module; CDR-3 Zone Coder; Centralized audio
components; Buffered RS-232 Communications Cable; PT-1S
switch settings; 3-FIB information; 3-TAMP(5); RACCR
Enclosure; SIGA-APS Power Supply; SIGA-AAxx Audio
Amplifiers.

21OCT99

3.0

Incorporated changes concurrent with software release version

1.5. Revised structure to reduce duplicate information.

30AUG01

4.0

Revised to incorporate security and access control integration.

29OCT01

5.0

Added Canadian security standards to Related Documents and

removed "Appendix D: System Compatibility".

17AUG04

6.0

Revised per 3-SDU release 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5.

21JUN07

7.0

Revised to conform to UL 864 9th edition requirements

iv

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

Important information
Limitation of liability
This product has been designed to meet the requirements of
NFPA Standard 72; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard
864; and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, Inc., Standard
ULC S527. Installation in accordance with this manual,
applicable codes, and the instructions of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction is mandatory. GE Security shall not under any
circumstances be liable for any incidental or consequential
damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses
owing to the failure of GE Security products beyond the cost of
repair or replacement of any defective products. GE Security
reserves the right to make product improvements and change
product specifications at any time.
While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of
this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents, GE Security
assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.

FCC warning
This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy.
If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual,
it may cause interference to radio communications. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits
for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference when this
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment is likely to cause interference, in which case
the user at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.

Industry Canada information

Note: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment.

This certification means that the equipment meets certain

telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety
requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment
will operate to the users satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized

Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical
ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections

themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection

authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Note: The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device
denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a
telephone loop that is used by the device, to prevent overloading.
The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirements that the sum of the Load
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.

UL 864 9th edition requirements

NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER
INVOLVED PARTIES
This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with
the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL
864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all
as indicated below.
Programmable feature or
option

Permitted
in UL 864?
(Y/N)

Possible settings

Settings permitted in
UL 864

Enable Supervision
(telephone line is supervised
for ground faults, a single
open line, or a wire-to-wire
fault)

No

Yes

DACT Settings - Line 2

Installed (single line or dual
line dialer)

Trouble Resound (panel

resound)

AC Power Delay

Yes

No

Yes

Yes
Disabled (0)

Disabled [2]

1 second to ~99 hours

0 to 24 hours

Disabled

1 to 3 hours

1 minute to 45 hours

vi

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

Programmable feature or
option

Permitted
in UL 864?
(Y/N)

Possible settings

Settings permitted in
UL 864

Event message routing

All Cabinets

All Cabinets

No Cabinets

No Cabinets [3]

User defined routes (1

to 15)

User defined routes (1 to

15) [4]

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled [5]

Delays (programmed in rules) Y

0 to 240 seconds

0 to 240 seconds [6]

CMS event reporting priority

(programmed in rules)

1 to 255

1 to 255 [7]

CMS activate and restore

messages (programmed in
rules)

Send on activation

Activation and
restoration triggers must
match the message type

4-state alarm IDC

N/A

In Signature module
configuation, personality
code 18 is prohibited
[11]

Alarm zone group members

Alarm device type

Alarm device type [8]

Pull device type

Pull device type

Heat device type

Heat device type

Verified smoke device

type

Verified smoke device

type

Water flow device type

Water flow device type

Alarm device type

Alarm device type [8]

Pull device type

Pull device type

Heat device type

Heat device type

Verified smoke device

type

Verified smoke device

type [9]

Water flow device type

Water flow device type

Alarm zone device type

Alarm zone device type

Fire zone device type

Fire zone device type

Matrix group device

type

Matrix group device type

1 to 255

1 to 255 [10]

Event message display

filtering: Alarm, Supervisory,
and Trouble options

AND group members

AND group device activation

count

Send on restoration

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

vii

Content

Programmable feature or
option

Permitted
in UL 864?
(Y/N)

Possible settings

Settings permitted in
UL 864

Matrix groups: Members

Alarm device type

Alarm device type [8]

Pull device type

Pull device type

Fire device type

Fire device type [8]

Call point device type

Call point device type

Heat device type

Heat device type

Verified smoke device

type

Verified smoke device

type [9]

Water flow device type

Water flow device type

3 to 10

3 to 10 [10]

Matrix groups: Device

activation count

Notes
[1]

Allowed only when the supervising station supervises the telephone line and annunciates
fault conditions within 200 seconds

[2]

Allowed only on control panels that transmit trouble event signals off premises

[3]

Allowed only with monitor device types and switches

[4]

Allowed only if user route includes the control panel

[5]

Allowed only on nonrequired remote annunciators

[6]

Allowed only when setting does not prevent the activation or transmission of alarm or
supervisory signals within 10 seconds or trouble signals within 200 seconds

[7]

When priorities are used, alarm events must have a higher priority than supervisory and
trouble events.

[8]

Allowed in alarm zone groups, AND groups, and matrix groups that are used to initiate the
release of extinguishing agents or water except when the addressable smoke detector's
alarm verification is used.

[9]

Allowed only in alarm zone groups, AND groups, and matrix groups that are not used to
initiate the release of extinguishing agents or water

[10] A minimum device activation count of 2 is required if the AND group or matrix group is used
to initiate the release of extinguishing agents or water
[11] Personality code 18 is typically used when a short condition must be distinguished from an
alarm condition. This type of IDC is prohibited by UL 864.

viii

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

About this manual

This manual provides information on how to properly install,
wire, and maintain the EST3 integrated system and related
components. This manual applies to the following EST3 models:
EST3
EST3R
EST3-230
EST3R-230

Organization
Chapter 1: System overview: a descriptive overview of the
components and subsystems that comprise an EST3 system.
Chapter 2: Security applications: covers security applications.
This chapter contains block diagrams that show the components
required to create specific security systems.
Chapter 3: Access control applications: covers access control
applications. Like Chapter 2, this chapter contains block
diagrams and descriptions of specific access control systems.
Chapter 4: Centralized audio applications: describes the
equipment and configuration required to create centralized audio
for a site.
Chapter 5: Installation: installation information for system
components and applications that supplement the instructions
provided on individual component installation sheets.
Chapter 6: Power-up and testing: information and procedures
necessary to perform initial system power-up and acceptance
testing.
Chapter 7: Preventive maintenance: lists the required scheduled
maintenance items and procedures.
Chapter 8: Service and troubleshooting: a comprehensive set of
procedures and tables to aid certified technical personnel in
servicing and troubleshooting the system.
Appendices A, B, and C provide supplementary information
about system addressing, calculations, and compatibility.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

ix

Content

Safety information
Important safety admonishments are used throughout this
manual to warn of possible hazards to persons or equipment.
Caution: Cautions

are used to indicate the presence of a hazard

which will or may cause damage to the equipment if safety
instructions are not followed or if the hazard is not avoided.

WARNING: Warnings

are used to indicate the presence of a

hazard which will or may cause personal injury or death, or loss
of service if safety instructions are not followed or if the hazard
is not avoided.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

The EST3 library

EST3 documents
A library of documents and multi-media presentations supports
the EST3 life safety system. A brief description of each is
provided below.
EST3 Installation and Service Manual (P/N 270380): Gives
complete information on how to install and service the EST3
hardware. The manual also includes installation information on
selected Signature Series components.
SDU Online Help (P/N 180653): Provides full online support for
configuring and programming a system using the System
Definition Utility program.
EST3 System Operation Manual (P/N 270382): Provides detailed
information on how to operate the system and system
components.
EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual (P/N 270913):
Provides information for designing, programming, and testing an
EST3 smoke control system.
EST3 ULI ULC Compatibility Lists (P/N 3100427): Lists the
appliances, devices, and accessories that are compatible with
EST3.

Other documents
In addition to documents in the EST3 library, you may find the
following documents useful.
Signature Series Intelligent Smoke and Heat Detectors
Applications Bulletin (P/N 270145): Provides additional
applications information on the Signature series smoke and heat
detector applications.
Signature Series Component Installation Manual (P/N 270497):
Contains detailed mounting and wiring information for all
Signature series devices.
Speaker Application Guide (P/N 85000-0033): Provides
information on the placement and layout of speakers for fire
alarm signaling and emergency voice communications.
Strobe Applications Guide (P/N 85000-0049): Provides
information on the placement and layout of strobes for fire alarm
signaling.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

xi

Content

Related documentation
National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, MA 02269-9101

NFPA 70 National Electric Code

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 11 Low-Expansion Foam Systems
NFPA 11A Medium- and High-Expansion Foam
Systems
NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire
Protection
NFPA 16 Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and FoamWater Spray Systems
NFPA 17Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096

UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single & Multiple Station
UL 228 Door Closers/Holders for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems
UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems
UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems
UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances
UL 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances

xii

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Content

Canadian Electrical Code Part 1

Underwriters Laboratories of
Canada

ULC S527 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm

Systems

7 Crouse Road
Scarborough, ON
Canada M1R 3A9

ULC S524 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm

Systems
ULC S536 Standard for the Inspection and Testing of
Fire Alarm Systems
ULC S537 Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm
Systems
ULC ORDC6931994 Central Station Fire Protective
Signaling System and Services
CAN/ULC-S301 Standard for Central and Monitoring
Station Burglar Alarm Systems
CAN/ULC-S302 Standard for Installation and
Classification of Burglar Alarm Systems for Financial
and Commercial Premises, Safes, and Vaults
CAN/ULC-S303 Standard for Local Burglar Alarm Units
and Systems
CAN/ULC-S304 Standard for Central and Monitoring
Station Burglar Alarm Units
PLUS: Requirements of state and local building codes and the

local authority having jurisdiction.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

xiii

Content

xiv

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 1

System overview

Summary

This chapter provides a descriptive overview of the components

and subsystems that comprise a system.
Content
System description 1.2
System features 1.3
Minimum system requirements 1.4
System construction 1.4
Audio subsystem description 1.6
Network audio riser wiring 1.6
Amplifiers 1.7
Backup amplifiers 1.8
3-ASU Audio Source Unit 1.9
Firefighter phone 1.15
Digital network subsystem 1.16
Network data riser wiring 1.16
Class B network data risers 1.16
Class A network data risers 1.17
Download connections 1.18
Downloading database files over the network 1.19
Foreign language support 1.22
Printer use with foreign languages 1.22
Bilingual language support 1.22
Display device language support 1.23
Signature series devices 1.26
Network applications 1.29
Network layout 1.29
Feature/function domain 1.30
Audio applications 1.33
Audio channels 1.34
Manual audio zone selection 1.38
Messages 1.39
Firefighter phone system 1.42
Five phone off-hook limit 1.42
One phone per circuit 1.42
Five phones per circuit 1.43
Limited number of portable telephone handsets 1.43

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.1

System overview

System description
EST3 is designed using modular hardware and software
components to facilitate rapid configuration, installation, and
testing. Most network components are provided as local rail
modules (LRMs) that plug into the rail chassis assemblies. Rail
chassis assemblies are available to meet most any application.
Rail modules are used for data processing, intrapanel
communication of command/control data, response data, audio
signal processing, and power distribution. Each rail module
provides an interface to support a control/display module that
can be mounted on the front of the module. Most field wiring is
terminated using removable terminal strips for easy installation
and servicing of modules.
Cabinets are available in a variety of sizes. The smallest (3CAB5), in addition to the central processor module and primary
power supply module, supports two rail modules and three
control/display modules. The largest, the 3-CAB21 supports as
many as 18 rail modules and 19 control/display modules.
An EST3 cabinet can be configured as a stand-alone system or as
part of a network which supports up to 64 cabinets on a
peer-to-peer Class A or B token ring network. Below is a partial
list of local rail modules that can be incorporated into a system:

Central Processor module (CPU). One is required for each

panel. Several models of CPU are available. See the current
compatibility lists for details.

Primary Power Supply module (3 PPS/M, 3 BPS/M, or 3

BBC/M). One power supply module is required for each
panel.

Main LCD Display module (LCD). One LCD is required to

provide a point of control for the entire network. Additional
displays can be added to any CPU module for additional
points of control or annunciation. Several LCD models are
available. See the current compatibility lists for details.

Additional control/display modules as required by the

application:

1.2

3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module

3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module
3-SAC Security Access Control module
3-SSDC(1) Signature Driver Controller module
3-AADC(1) Analog Addressable Driver Controller module
3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module
3-OPS Off-Premises Signaling module
3-ZAxx Zoned Amplifier modules

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

The audio and firefighter phone functions use a different

hardware format, providing operator controls and storage for the
microphone and telephone handset in a chassis configuration.

System features
Each cabinet in the system provides local control, display, power
supply, and communication functions. Each cabinet has the
following capacities:

10 addressable device circuits (Signature and addressable

analog combined)

120 traditional input / output zones

4 Class B (2 Class A) security / access control

communication (SAC) busses

10 modem / dialer cards, each with two telephone lines

2 RS-232 external peripheral device ports

456 LED annunciation points

342 input switches

In addition, the EST3 system has these global features:

Firefighter telephone

Custom programmability and user-friendly front panel

Class B (Style B), initiating device circuits (IDC)

Event reporting by alarm, trouble, supervisory, or monitor

mode and message display routing

Dead front construction

Supports networking up to 64 nodes may be connected in

a regenerative Class A or Class B token ring

Fast response time, less than three seconds from initial alarm
to device activation on a fully loaded system over the
network

Flash memory on controller modules to facilitate quick

firmware upgrades

Supports 255 security partitions

Multiplexed eight-channel digital audio system

Transient protected field wiring

Class B (Style Y) or Class A notification appliance circuits

Ground fault detection by panel, Signature data circuit, and

Signature modules

Switch mode power supply

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.3

System overview

Copper or fiber network and audio communications

Application and firmware downloading over the network or

from a single point

Network-wide control routing

Form C alarm, supervisory, and trouble relay contacts

Refer to the release notes for the latest information regarding

specifications and capabilities.

Minimum system requirements

NFPA 72 system
classification

Required control equipment

Protected Premises
(Local)

Cabinet with a CPU (Central Processor

module), one LCD (Main LCD Display
module) one 3-PPS/M Primary Power
Supply and Monitor, appropriate
batteries, plus appropriate initiating
device circuits and notification appliance
circuits

Auxiliary
or
Remote Station
or
Proprietary Protected
Premises

Add a 3-OPS Off Premises Signal

module or a correctly configured and
programmed 3-MODCOM Modem
Communicator module to the protected
premises system

System construction
The EST3 system is assembled in layers as shown in Figure 1-1.
The cabinet (1) houses all the system components. A variety of
cabinets are available for as few as 5 and as many as 21 modules.
A 3-RCC14 cabinet is illustrated in Figure 1-1.
Mounted directly to the cabinets are the rail chassis assemblies
(2), of which there are three types: rail, audio, and audio with
telephone. The most common chassis is the rail chassis, which
provides mounting and electrical connections for the local rail
modules (LRMs) (4). Mounted on the rear of the chassis are the
cabinet power supplies (3).
The local rail modules (4) are the specialized cards that provide
an interface between the CPU and the field wiring. The front of
any rail module can support a control/display module (5),
providing customized operator controls and annunciators.

1.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Completing the EST3 CAB series cabinet assembly are the

inner (6) and outer (7) doors. The RCC cabinets use a single
outer door.

Figure 1-1: Exploded CAB series cabinet equipment installation

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.5

System overview

Audio subsystem description

The audio subsystem consists of a variety of signal sources,
integral amplifiers, and sophisticated control software. The
3-ASU Audio Source Unit is available with the optional 3-FTCU
Firefighter Telephone Control Unit as the model 3-ASU/FT. The
ASU/FT is the only audio equipment required at the fire
command control center. Zoned audio amplifiers are distributed
throughout the system and provide the de-multiplexing,
switching, amplification and circuit supervision.

Network audio riser wiring

A digital network audio riser consisting of a single pair (Class B)
or two pairs (Class A) of wires connect all amplifiers together.
Since the digital signals are multiplexed, any of 8 independent
audio sources can be directed to any amplifier connected to the
network. All command and control signals for the audio system
are distributed over the network data riser.

CPU

CPU

CPU

CPU

TB2

TB2

TB2

TB2

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO
A OUT

AUDIO AUDIO
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

A OUT
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO
A OUT

AUDIO AUDIO
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

A OUT
B IN
B OUT

From
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
on 3-ASU

Figure 1-2: Class B network audio riser wiring

1.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

CPU

CPU

CPU

CPU

TB2

TB2

TB2

TB2

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

A OUT
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

A OUT
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO
A OUT

AUDIO AUDIO
B IN
B OUT

AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

A OUT
B IN
B OUT

From
AUDIO DATA PRIMARY
connections on 3-ASU

Figure 1-3: Class A network audio riser wiring

Amplifiers
Amplifiers are designed to feed a single audio zone and provide
an integral 24 Vdc visual notification appliance circuit.
Amplifier modules are available in 20-, 40-, and 95-watt
versions, with each amplifier providing a single supervised Class
B or A audio output circuit. The amplifier is configurable for
either 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output. An independent supervised
Class B or Class A, 24 Vdc, 3.5 Amp notification appliance
circuit (NAC) is also provided on the 20- and 40-watt amplifiers
to drive notification appliances. In addition, automatic backup
amplifiers can be added on a switched common backup
configuration.
Each audio power amplifier has an integral demultiplexer,
making the 8 audio channels available to the amplifiers input, as
directed by the system programming. Each amplifier also
contains circuitry that handles routine signal processing
functions such as channel priority.
The amplifiers output is a dedicated, supervised, 25-, 70-Vrms
speaker circuit, which covers one audio zone in the protected
facility. Figure 1-4 is an example of an enclosure with four zone
amplifiers and a backup amplifier. In response to an alarm,
selected audio amplifiers have been connected to the required
audio channels. Note that three different audio signals are being
broadcast simultaneously.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.7

System overview
Network Data Riser
Network Audio Riser

Equipment Enclosure
Central
Processor
Module

Local Rail Bus

Backup
Amplifier

Zoned
Amplifier

Zoned
Amplifier

Page

Page

Zoned
Amplifier

Zoned
Amplifier

EVAC

Alert

Figure 1-4: Normal amplifier operation

Possible fault condition

Amplifier operation

Amplifier loses communication If the panel is configured for stand-alone operation, the amplifier
with Central Processor module automatically switches to the EVAC channel and outputs its 1
kHz temporal tone when the panel detects an alarm.
If the panel is not configured for stand-alone operation, the
amplifier will not output any signal.
Panel loses communication
with network data riser

Amplifier switches to the EVAC channel only in response to the

local panels programming uses the default EVAC message.

Panel loses communication

with network audio riser

Amplifier switches to the EVAC channel in response to the

system programming. For EVAC the amplifier uses its 1 kHz
temporal tone. For Alert the amplifier uses its 1 kHz 20 bps tone.

Backup amplifiers
In the event of an amplifier failure (not a field wiring problem),
the backup amplifier automatically replaces the failed amplifier,
as shown in Figure 1-5.

1.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview
Network Data Riser
Network Audio Riser

Equipment Enclosure
Central
Processor
Module

Local Rail Bus

Backup
Amplifier

Zoned
Amplifier

Page

Zoned
Amplifier

Page

Zoned
Amplifier

EVAC

Zoned
Amplifier

Alert

Figure 1-5: Single amplifier failure

The amplifier failure caused the backup amplifier to

automatically connect to the same audio source as the failed
amplifier. The output of the backup amplifier replaced the output
of the failed amplifier.
Note: The

backup amplifier will not replace an amplifier that has

detected a field wiring problem to prevent the amplifier from
driving into a shorted circuit.

3-ASU Audio Source Unit

The 3-ASU is the source of the network audio riser. Available
audio sources are local and remote voice PAGE functions and
the firefighter telephone PAGE function. An integral tone
generator database is provided for the EVAC, ALERT and other
functions. Alternately, the 3-ASUs integral digital voice
message playback unit can simultaneously provide up to 8
different prerecorded audio messages that may be assigned to
any channel.
The multiplexer within the 3-ASU converts and compresses the
real-time audio signal and converts it to a digital format. The
output of the digital message playback unit and the integral tone
generator database is already in the digital format. The 8 signal
sources in digital format are then combined together as selected
by the system designer using a multiplexer. This makes up the
network audio riser signal.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.9

System overview
Local mic.
Remote mic.

Firefighters
telephone
Auxiliary
input
Multiplexer
Audio signals

Network audio riser (eight

digitized audio channels)

Digital message
playback unit

Tone / message
database
Digital signals

Figure 1-6: ASU Signal Flow

The amplifiers at the remote-panels extract the audio signals

from the network riser, amplify it and send it to the speakers.

25/70 VRMS
supervised audio
circuit

Local tone
generator
Network audio riser
(eight digitized audio
channels)

Demultiplex
and decode

Channel
selection and
supervision

Power
amp

Network data riser

(command and control)

EOLR

Figure 1-7: Amplifier Signal Flow

Audio signal priority

During system configuration, each of the eight available audio

channels is assigned one of the five available attributes listed in
Table 1-1. The Page, and Auxiliary attributes may only be
assigned to a single channel. The General attribute may be
assigned to up to four channels.
Table 1-1: Network audio channel parameters

1.10

Channel attribute

Priority

PAGE

EVAC

ALERT

AUXILIARY

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Table 1-1: Network audio channel parameters

Channel attribute

Priority

GENERAL

Each channel attribute has a priority level associated with it.

When more than one channel is commanded to source a given
amplifier, the amplifier will connect to the source having the
highest priority. The Page channel will only go active when the
microphone push-to-talk switch is pressed.
Special audio source unit page modes

The front panel of the ASU offers four special page mode
switches:

All Call
EVAC
Alert
All Call Minus

These switches provide instantaneous switching of the page

signal to the most frequently contacted areas of the building. The
special page modes do not require any source switching by the
zoned audio amplifiers. When a special page mode switch is
activated, the signal content of the eight outgoing audio channels
is modified. Figure 1-8 illustrates this principle.
In the normal page mode, the eight audio signal sources are each
connected to a separate audio channel, as represented by a at
the intersection of the signal source and the audio channel,
shown at the lower left of Figure 1-8. Each audio channel is
represented as a vertical line in this figure. The eight audio
channels are actually multiplexed together and distributed over a
common pair of wires called the network audio riser. The figure
shows the system in the normal page mode, with the zoned audio
amplifiers processing EVAC signals on the 1st and 3rd levels, a
page signal on the 2nd level, and the alert signal on the 4th level.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.11

System overview

Eight multiplexed audio channels

on a two-wire circuit

25/70 VRMS supervised

audio circuit
Power
amp

EOLR

Local tone
generator

ALERT

25/70 VRMS supervised

audio circuit
Power
amp

EOLR

Network data riser

Local tone
generator

EVAC

25/70 VRMS supervised

audio circuit
Power
amp

EOLR

Local tone
generator

PAGE

25/70 VRMS supervised

audio circuit
Power
amp

EOLR

Local tone
generator

3-ASU signal sources

EVAC
Network audio signals
Page
Evac
Alert
Auxiliary
General1
General2
General3
General4

= Audio source unit

audio signal to audio
channel connection

Normal mode
Audio signal distribution during special paging modes

Page
Evac
Alert
Auxiliary
General1
General2
General3
General4

ALL CALL mode

Page
Evac
Alert
Auxiliary
General1
General2
General3
General4

Page to EVAC mode

Page
Evac
Alert
Auxiliary
General1
General2
General3
General4

Page
Evac
Alert
Auxiliary
General1
General2
General3
General4

Page to ALERT mode

ALL CALL MINUS mode

Figure 1-8: Audio Source Unit Special Page Mode Signal Flow

1.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

The All Call mode is used to send a page to the entire facility.
When the All Call switch is activated, the Audio Source Unit is
put into the all call mode. In this mode, the zoned audio
amplifiers do not all transfer to the page channel. Rather, the
Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to all the
audio channels. Figure 1-8 shows the all call page source to
audio channel connections in the lower left corner. Note that all
channels receive the same signal. Any amplifier on the system,
regardless of the audio channel selected, will receive the page.
Any amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and
receive the page.
The Page to EVAC mode is used to send a page to the areas
automatically receiving the evacuation signal. Activating the
EVAC switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to
EVAC mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers connected
to the EVAC channel do not transfer to the page channel. Rather,
the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the
EVAC channel. Figure 1-8 shows the page to EVAC mode page
source to EVAC channel connections. The page and EVAC
audio channels both receive the page signal. Any amplifier
connected to either the page or EVAC audio channels will
receive the page. The alert, auxiliary and general channels are
connected to their respective signal sources, as in the normal
mode.
The Page to Alert mode is used to send a page to the areas
automatically receiving the alert signal. Activating the Alert
switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to alert
mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the
alert channel do not transfer to the page channel. Rather, the
Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the alert
channel. Figure 1-8 shows the page to alert mode page source to
alert channel connections. The page and alert audio channels
both receive the page signal. Any amplifier connected to either
the page or alert audio channels will receive the page. Any
amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and receive
the page. The EVAC, auxiliary and general channels are
connected to their respective signal sources, as in the normal
mode.
The All Call Minus mode is used to send a page to all areas NOT
automatically receiving the EVAC or alert signals. In high rise
applications, all call minus is an effective way to quickly select
stairwells. Activating the All Call Minus switch causes the
Audio Source Unit to enter the all call minus mode. In this mode,
the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the auxiliary and general
channels do not transfer to the page channel. Rather, the Audio
Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the auxiliary and
four general channels. Figure 1-8 shows the all call minus mode
page source to auxiliary and general channel connections. The

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.13

System overview

page, auxiliary and four general audio channels all receive the
page signal. Any amplifier connected to the page, auxiliary or
general audio channels will receive the page. The EVAC and
alert channels are connected to their respective signal sources, as
in the normal mode.
Automatic messaging

One of the features of the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit is the

method used to monitor the integrity of the digital audio system.
When an audio messaging system is configured, default audio
messages are recorded for the Evacuation and Alert channels.
The text of default messages should be generic in nature, and
should not include location-specific instructions. When the
system is in the normal condition, the 3-ASU continuously
transmits default messages over the network audio riser. The
zone amplifiers use the default messages to verify their
operational integrity, as well as the integrity of the riser wiring.
When an alarm is detected, the evacuation and alert message
channels are selected by the amplifiers in the appropriate areas in
the facility, as directed by the system rules. If a specific
evacuation message has been programmed to play in response to
the alarm, it is sent out over the evacuation channel. Location
specific evacuation messages contain information and
instructions that should only be used for a specific alarm
location. Should a second alarm from another location be
received, the evacuation message playing as a result of the first
alarm may not be appropriate for the second alarm.
Note: In the event of conflicting messaging instructions caused

by multiple alarm events, the system will play the default

evacuation message, whenever two or more different messages
are requested at the same time on the evacuation channel.
Automatic message processing is illustrated in Figure 1-9. By
reverting back to the generic default evacuation message in
multiple alarm location scenarios, no one can be misdirected by
the wrong message. Default messages also play during alarms
when no location specific message has been requested.

1.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

83
82
80th floor, west wing evacuation message:
A fire has been reported on the west wing
of the 80th floor.

81
80
79
78
77
Generic (default) message:
An emergency has been reported in the
building. Remain where you are and await
further instructions.

Location specific messages

33
32
30th floor, north wing evacuation message:
A fire has been reported on the north wing
of the 30th floor.

31
30
29

Generic (default) evacuation message

28

The generic (default) evacuation

message plays when multiple locationspecific messages have been requested
by the system, or when no locationspecific message has been specified.

27
Figure 1-9: Automatic Message Processing

Firefighter phone
The 3-FTCU contains a master telephone handset that provides
an analog telephone riser for totally independent 2-way
communications between the fire command station and
Firefighter telephone stations / jack telephones installed at
strategic locations throughout the protected facility.
Taking a telephone off-hook or plugging into a telephone jack
generates a visual and audible incoming call signal at the fire
command station. The individual originating the call hears a tone
until the handset is connected to the system. The fire command
station operator manually connects the incoming phone call to
the phone riser to complete the call. Up to five remote telephones
may be connected to the riser simultaneously. The fire command
center operator can also use the telephone circuit as a page
source, permitting paging via the telephone system.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.15

System overview

Digital network subsystem

Network data riser wiring
The network data riser provides the communication path
between each CPU module (3-CPUx or 3-ANNCPUx) installed
in the system. Each CPU module has two bi-directional RS-485
ports (Network A and Network B) that are used to connect the
network data riser wiring. Network B is isolated from ground
and Network A is not.
The correct method for running the network data riser is to
connect the isolated Network B port on one CPU module to the
non-isolated Network A port on another. Any remote CPU
modules connected to a local CPU modules Network B port is
considered to be downstream from the local CPU module. Any
remote CPU modules connected to a local CPU modules
Network A port is considered upstream from the local CPU
module.
Additionally, next and previous refer to the order in which
remote CPU modules are electrically connected to a local CPU
module. Previous refers to the remote CPU module whose
isolated Network B port connects to the local CPU modules
non-isolated Network A port. Next refers to the remote CPU
module whose non-isolated Network A port connects to the local
CPU modules isolated Network B port.
Note: Since the data traveling the network data riser is
bi-directional, out and in references are used to direct wire
connections.

Class B network data risers

In a Class B network, a break or short in the network data riser
wiring divides the network into separate independent networks.
Panels on the same side of the line fault will communicate with
each other but not with panels across the line fault. Figure 1-10
shows the wiring for a Class B network.

1.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

B1_CAB1

J5

B1_CAB2

J5

CPU

TB2

J5

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB3

J5

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

B1_CAB4

CPU

TB2
AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

Upstream

Downstream

Figure 1-10: Class B network data riser wiring using copper wire
Note: As a matter of convention, a Class B network data riser
should start at the CPU module that does not have wires
connected to its Network A port.

When wiring a Class B network, give careful consideration as to

the location of the service panel. The service panel provides a
single point from which you can download files to all other
panels on the network. For this function to work properly you
must use the panel at the start of the network data riser as the
service panel. See Downloading data files for more
information.

Class A network data risers

In a Class A network, a single break or short in the network data
riser wiring does not interrupt communications between panels.
Figure 1-11 shows the wiring for a Class A network.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.17

System overview

B1_CAB1

J5

J5

CPU

TB2
NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
A
B
B

B1_CAB2

J5

CPU

TB2
AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB3

J5

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
A
B
B

AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB4

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
A
B
B

AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
A
B
B

AUDIO
A IN

Figure 1-11: Typical Class A network data riser wiring using copper wire

Download connections
Each programmable rail module has a modular phone jack to use
for downloading data directly from the SDU computer. The
modular phone jack on any CPU module can also be used to
download data to other programmable rail modules in the same
panel over the rail bus, or to other panels over the network data
riser.
In addition to the modular phone jack, the CPU module has two
serial communication ports that can be used to download data,
provided both of these conditions are met:

A 3-RS232 option card is installed

The serial port used to download data is not configured for
gateway or coder applications

Tip: To download data over the network without having to

reconfigure the system, temporarily install a 3-RS232 option
card on any CPU module in the system and connect the SDU
computer to serial port 1.

1.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Connect here to download data to all three programmable

rail modules over the rail bus (network mode) or to this
programmable rail module only (single-step mode)

N
O

N
C

N
O

TR OU BLE

N
A

N
C

N
O

A LA R M

N
C

B
+

B
-

S
H

A
+

A
-

SI GA 1

SI GA 1

S UP

SP
MW
KR
1

B
+

B
-

B
+

SI GA 1

B
-

S
H

A
+

A SP
- MW
KR
1

SI GA 1

SI GA 1

B
+

B
-

SI GA 1

TB1

J9
J8

J11
J10

OUT PU T M OD U LE

OUT PU T M OD U LE

J1

A
+

N ETW O RK
OU T
IN
A B
B
+
-

A UD I O
A IN
+

A UD I O
A OU T
+

A UD I O
B IN
+

A UD I O
B OU T
+

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

SI GA 2
B
-

B
+

2
SP
MW
KR

SI GA 2
A
-

Optional serial ports may be used to

download over the network (3RS232 required)

A
+

SI GA 2
S
H

B
-

B
+

SI GA 2
B
-

B
+

2
SP
MW
KR

SI GA 2
A
-

A
+

SI GA 2
S
H

B
-

B
+

Connect here to download data to

this programmable rail module only
(single-step mode)

Figure 1-12: Potential connection points for downloading data

Downloading database files over the network

A CPU modules Network A port and its modular phone jack
share an interrupt with the modules microprocessor. As such,
the microprocessor disables the Network A port whenever you
connect the SDU computer to the modular phone jack.
Consequently, download options differ for Class A and Class B
networks.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.19

System overview
Download connection
from SDU computer

B1_CAB1

J5

J5

CPU

TB2
NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

B1_CAB2

J5

CPU

TB2
AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB3

J5

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB4

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

Figure 1-13: Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class B networks during a
download

Figure 1-13 shows how connecting the SDU computer to the

modular phone jack affects downloading data over a Class B
network. Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone
jack on the CPU module installed in panel B1_CAB3, disables
that CPU modules Network A port. Downloading data to panels
B1_CAB2 and B1_CAB1 from panel B1_CAB3 is no longer
possible but downloading to B1_CAB4 still is.
Since the microprocessor disables only the Network A port, the
CPU module that doesnt have a Network A port connection
should be used as the service panel. It is the only panel that is
capable of downloading to every panel on the network using the
modular phone jack.
Note: Connecting the SDU computer to an optional serial
communications port does not affect the Network A port. If a
3-RS232 option card is connected to the CPU, you can download
data to any panel on a Class B network regardless of where the
panel physically connects to the network data riser.

1.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview
Download connection
from SDU computer

B1_CAB1

J5

J5

CPU

TB2
NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

B1_CAB2

J5

CPU

TB2
AUDIO
A IN

B1_CAB3

J5

CPU

TB2

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

B1_CAB4

CPU

TB2
AUDIO
A IN

NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
B
A
B

AUDIO
A IN

Figure 1-14: Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class A networks during a
download

On Class A networks however, see Figure 1-14, disabling the

Network A port on panel B1_CAB3 does not prevent the other
panels from receiving data through B1_CAB3s Network B port.
Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack does
cause the panel to report a Network Class A Failure trouble.
When the network data riser is configured for Class B,
connecting to the panel modular phone jack causes the local
CPU module to report a communications fault with every panel
upstream of the local CPU module.
Tip: To download data to every panel across the Class B network
data riser, connect to the first connection on the network data
riser as the download panel the panel with no connections on
its Network A terminals.)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.21

System overview

Foreign language support

Printer use with foreign languages
When supporting a single-byte character set language, your
printer must be able to support the appropriate DOS code page.
To support a double-byte character set language, your printer
must be able to support the appropriate Windows code page. The
required code pages are listed below.
Remember that not all Windows characters are available on DOS
printers, so some characters are not supported on these printers.
Language

Code page

Chinese simplified

Windows Page Code 936 (GB)

Chinese traditional

Windows Code Page 950

(Big 5)

Korean

Windows Code Page 949

(Extended Wansung)

Hebrew

DOS Code Page 862

Turkish

DOS Code Page 857

Dutch, French, Italian,

Portuguese, Spanish, English

DOS Code Page 850

Polish, Slovak

DOS Code Page 852

Russian

DOS Code Page 866

Bilingual language support

EST3 display modules (all LCD models and the KPDISP)
feature bilingual operation. For two languages to be supported
simultaneously, they must appear on the same code page. Refer
to the table below to determine the system bilingual capabilities.
Bilingual operation is not supported for Chinese and Korean.

1.22

Windows code page

Languages supported

1250 (Eastern Europe)

English, Polish Slovak

1251 (Cyrillic)

English, Russian

1252 (Western Europe)

Dutch, English, French, Italian,

Portuguese, Spanish

1254 (Turkish)

English, Turkish

1255 (Hebrew)

English, Hebrew

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview
Example: Bilingual operation between Polish and Slovak is
supported (code page 1250). Bilingual operation between Polish
and Russian is not supported, as no code page has both.

Display device language support

LCD language support

Chinese, simplified (PRC)

Dutch

English (UK)

X
X

X[1]

Mideast

Chinese, traditional (Taiwan)

Canadian

Asian

European

Language

US

Marketplace

English (US)

French Canadian

Hebrew

Italian

Korean, Extended Wansung

X
X

Polish

Portuguese (Brazil)

Russian

Slovak

X
X

Spanish (South America)

Turkish

[1] For testing and support purposes only

3-FTCU language support

Chinese, traditional (Taiwan)

[1]

Chinese, simplified (PRC)

[1]

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Mideast

Canadian

Asian

European

Language

US

Marketplace

1.23

System overview

3-FTCU language support

English (UK)

X
X

Mideast

Canadian

Dutch

Asian

Language

European

US

Marketplace

English (US)

French Canadian

Hebrew

[1]

Italian

Korean, Extended Wansung

[1]

X
[1]

Portuguese (Brazil)

Spanish (South America)

Turkish

[1]

[1]

Russian

[1]

[1]

Polish

[1]

Slovak

[1]

[1]

[1] Only Western European character set is supported

KPDISP language support

Canadian

Mideast

Asian

Language

European

US

Marketplace

Chinese, traditional (Taiwan)

Chinese, simplified (PRC)
Dutch

English (UK)

English (US)

French Canadian

Hebrew

Italian

Korean, Extended Wansung

1.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

KPDISP language support

Polish

Mideast

Canadian

Asian

Portuguese (Brazil)

Russian

Slovak

X
X

Spanish (South America)

Turkish

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

European

Language

US

Marketplace

X
X

1.25

System overview

Signature series devices

The Signature series family consists of intelligent smoke and
heat detectors, bases, input/output modules, and ancillary
devices. The EST3 network supports Signature series devices
using several models of the Signature Driver Controller module.
Up to 125 detectors and 125 modules can be connected to the
Signature Data Circuit on these modules.
The Signature series smoke and heat detectors contain their own
microprocessors. This allows the devices to make alarm
decisions based on the information gathered by the sensing
elements incorporated in the device. Signature series detectors
can be installed in any of four detector bases:
The Standard Base provides wiring terminals for connection
to a remote LED.
The Relay Base provides a detector activated, pilot-duty dry
contact relay used to control external appliances.
The Sounder Base incorporates a sounder horn that can be
controlled by the detector, by a special Signature module, by
the control panel, or by programmed rules
The Isolator Base protects the Signature Data Circuit from
wiring shorts.
Signature modules interface and support the operation of
initiating devices, conventional 2-wire smoke and heat detectors,
manual pull-stations, strobes, bells, etc. The actual functions of
each Signature module is determined by a personality code
downloaded to the module through the System Definition Utility
(SDU) program.
Signature series manual pull-stations (1-stage and 2-stage)
feature an integral Signature module that monitors the station.
One-stage stations are monitored by a single input module that
sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the station is
activated. Two-stage stations are monitored by a dual input
module which sends two independent alarm events to the control
panel; one when the pull-switch is activated, and the second
when the key switch is activated.
Alarm sensitivity setting

Alarm sensitivity refers to the primary threshold (expressed in

percent smoke obscuration) at which the smoke detector will go
into alarm. The alarm sensitivity setting for smoke detectors can
be set to one of five sensitivity levels. When smoke detectors
having both ionization and photoelectric elements are used, the
sensitivity setting applies to both elements. Reduced sensitivity
settings are used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms.

1.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

The alarm sensitivity setting may be individually set for each

detector using the SDU program.
Alternate alarm sensitivity setting

Alternate alarm sensitivity refers to the secondary threshold

(expressed in percent smoke obscuration) at which the smoke
detector goes into alarm. The alternate alarm sensitivity setting
for smoke detectors can be set to one of the same five sensitivity
levels as the primary alarm. When smoke detectors having both
ionization and photoelectric elements are used, the sensitivity
setting applies to both elements. This feature permits increasing
or reducing an individual detectors sensitivity at various times
of the day, dependent upon, environmental conditions,
occupancy, manufacturing processes, etc. Increased sensitivity is
typically used when a facility is unoccupied. Reduced sensitivity
is typically used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms
when occupancy or environmental conditions may create
prealarm conditions. An alternate alarm sensitivity setting for
each detector can be set using the SDU program.
Alarm verification

Upon receipt of the initial alarm signal from a verified detector,

the EST3 panel issues a detector reset command. After a
programmable reset/retard period, if the detector continues to
generate an alarm during the fixed confirmation period, the
alarm is considered valid and processed by the EST3 control
panel. Alarm verification reduces the occurrence of nuisance
alarms, as it provides a time frame in which the cause of the
alarm can be investigated to determine whether an actual alarm
condition exists. The alarm verification period can be increased
or decreased through the SDU program, as limited by the listing
agencies.
Alternate alarm verification

The alternate alarm verification feature operates the same way

the alarm verification feature operates using a second, alternate,
programmed reset/retard period.
Prealarm setting

Signature smoke detectors can be configured to enter a prealarm

state, which generates a monitor event message. Detectors
configured for prealarm have a prealarm pseudo point for which
rules can be written.
During configuration, you specify a percentage of the alarm
sensitivity setting that will generate a prealarm event.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.27

System overview
Alternate prealarm setting

The alternate prealarm setting is similar to the prealarm setting,

but it represents a percentage of the alternate alarm sensitivity
that will generate a prealarm event.

1.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Network applications
This section deals with the initial layout of the network cabinets
as well as application configurations for the basic network
modules.

Network layout
The first task for the system designer is locating the equipment
cabinets throughout the project. The objective when locating
cabinets is to maximize the per cabinet coverage of the facility
while minimizing hardware cost. The following general
information should be used as a guide to designing the system.
The per cabinet coverage is, in some part, based upon the type of
project being designed. In a high rise building installation that
requires an audio emergency voice communication system, the
problem becomes how many floors can be served by a single
cabinet. In a campus style installation, there may be one or more
cabinets per building, depending on building size.
Cabinet coverage

The following factors govern how much area a single cabinet can
cover:
Cabinet capacity: Depending on the installed equipment, the

largest backbox available can have 21 module spaces and 3

chassis spaces. Is this enough cabinet capacity to house the
equipment required to cover the proposed area?
Available current per cabinet: Does the proposed number of

large current components (audio amplifiers and 24 Vdc

notification appliance circuits), in addition to the required
module currents, exceed the available 28 amps per cabinet or
60-Ah battery capacity?
Notification Appliance Circuit voltage drop: Does the distance

from the cabinet to the last strobe, horn, speaker, etc. exceed the
acceptable limits?
User interface requirements: Depending on the installed

equipment, the largest backbox available can have 19 module

displays installed. Will this provide enough capacity for the
required control/display module functions?
Distance between cabinets: Does the wiring length between
any three cabinets exceed 5,000 ft. (1,524 m)?
System capacity of 64 cabinets per network: Does the

proposed system require more than 64 cabinets?

Cost of installation labor and materials: Is it cheaper to install
a smaller cabinet and service the floor above and below the floor

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.29

System overview

of installation, or install a larger cabinet with more equipment,

and wire two floors above and two floors below the cabinet
floor?

Feature/function domain
The EST3 life safety system utilizes peer-to-peer networking
technology. No single cabinet is in control of the network.
Peer-to-peer networking permits multiple control locations
within a single network. The feature/function domain is defined
as the group of cabinets that are affected when the feature or
function is activated. A network cabinet may be a part of one or
more groups. Multiple control locations are permitted for any
group.
Three types of domains are available.
Local: The feature/function affects only the cabinet on which the

LCD module is installed.

Group: The feature/function affects a predefined group of

cabinets on the network.

Global: The feature/function affects all the cabinets on the

network.

Group #3
Group #1

Group #2

Figure 1-15: Sample domain consisting of three groups

Using the System Definition Utility (SDU), you can configure

the system so that information from any cabinet can be
selectively sent to any combination of other cabinets on the
network.
Each cabinet may selectively transmit the following information
to other cabinets on the network:

1.30

Reset commands
Alarm Silence commands
Trouble Silence commands
Drill commands
Acknowledge commands

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

A cabinet can also be configured to receive state changes

(Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, firefighter telephone
incoming calls), logicals, events, audio controls, and so forth,
from a select group of cabinets.
Feature/function domains are associated with the cabinet
providing the operator controls. In Figure 1-15, the
feature/function domain for Cabinet 1, which has the operator
controls for the first subnet, is groups 1 and 3. The
feature/function domain for Cabinet 6, which has the operator
controls for the second subnet is groups 2 and 3.
Two subnetworks, with operator controls at cabinets 1 and 6.
Cabinets 3 and 4 are common to both subnetworks.
Commands
Alarm
silence

Trouble
silence

1, 2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

1, 2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3, 4

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cabinet 3

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cabinet 4

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cabinet 5

3, 4, 5, 6

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cabinet 6

3, 4, 5, 6

3, 4, 5, 6

3, 4, 5, 6

3, 4, 5, 6

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

3, 4, 5, 6

Group 2 Group 3 Group 1

Sending
cabinet

Cabinet
state

Reset

Cabinet 1

1, 2, 3, 4

Cabinet 2

Drill

Acknowledge

Legend
1 through 6 = Cabinets that receive commands from the sending cabinet
N/A = Not applicable

Figure 1-16: Routed network commands for the domain illustrated in Figure 1-15

In Figure 1-16, the Cabinet 1 entry under the Cabinet State

column indicates that Cabinet 1 should receive from cabinets 1,
2, 3, and 4 all information about changes of state. Because
Cabinet 1 is the location of the operator controls it should send
information about reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and
acknowledgments to all the cabinets in the domain, which are
cabinets 1, 2, 3, and 4. In this example, the drill command is
common to both systems. Note, that the drill command is also
sent to cabinets 5 and 6 by Cabinet 1.
The Cabinet 2 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates
that Cabinet 2 receives its change of state information from
cabinets 1, 2, 3, and 4. Because there are no operator controls
located at cabinet 2, there is no need to send reset, alarm silence,
trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgment information to other
cabinets. As an alternative, the table could show these
commands sent to other cabinets, because they can never be
issued due to the lack of an LCD module in the cabinet.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.31

System overview

Cabinets 3 and 4 receive their change of state information from

all cabinets on the network, as indicated in the cabinet state
column. This is necessary as cabinets 3 and 4 are part of both
domains. Again, there is no need to send reset, alarm silence,
trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgment information to other
cabinets from cabinets 3 and 4.
The Cabinet 5 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates
that Cabinet 5 receives its change of state information from
cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Cabinet 6 information indicates that Cabinet 6 should receive
from cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6 all information about changes of
state. Because cabinet 6 is the location of the operator controls it
should send information about reset, alarm silence, trouble
silence, drill, and acknowledgments to cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6,
(all the cabinets in the domain.) In this example, the drill
command is common to both systems. Note, that the drill
command is also sent to cabinets 1 and 2 by Cabinet 6.

1.32

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Audio applications
Amplifier selection

The EST3 system provides amplifiers with 20-, 40-, and 95-watt
output ratings to meet any project requirement. Selection of the
proper amplifiers requires an understanding of the amplifier
characteristics and application related information that follows.
Audio zoning

The output of each amplifier usually covers a single audio zone,

typically a floor of a high rise building. Using the appropriate
Signature modules, the amplifiers output can be divided into
several zones. The output circuit can be configured for either
Class A or Class B wiring.
Output wattage

The output rating of an amplifier is determined by the speaker

load it is required to drive, and any expansion or safety factor
required. The speaker load is determined by adding up the value
of all the wattage taps selected on each speaker connected to the
amplifier. For a conservative approach, use the highest wattage
tap available on each speaker. This insures there is enough head
room to adjust speaker taps to compensate for any installation
variables such as sound absorbing furniture, etc.
Output voltage

Zoned amplifiers are available with either a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms

output. The 25 Vrms output amplifiers are primarily used in
retrofit applications that previously had 25 Vrms speakers
installed. 70 Vrms output amplifiers are recommended for new
installations. The output circuits of a 70 Vrms amplifier can be
run eight-times farther than a 25 Vrms amplifier, given the same
load.
Note: If all the system wiring is required to be power limited,
you may use any 20-, 40-, or 95-watt amplifier with either a 25
Vrms or 70 Vrms output.
Wiring considerations

Refer to Appendix B of this manual for wire distance

calculations and other wiring considerations.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.33

System overview
Backup amplifiers

Each cabinet can contain 1 zoned amplifier module to use to

back up the remaining primary zoned amplifier modules installed
in the same cabinet with the following restrictions:

All the amplifiers must have the same output voltage rating.

If the cabinet contains older amplifier modules (15- and

30-watt) and newer amplifier modules (20- and 40-watt), the
amplifier used to back up the primary amplifier modules
must be of the older type.

Note: In cases where older and newer zoned amplifiers exist in

the same cabinet, the older modules should be replaced with
newer modules for optimum results.

The backup amplifier must have an output wattage rating

equal to or greater than the largest primary amplifier it is
backing up. If not, the output capacity of the speaker circuit
is diminished proportionately.

The wire used to wire the backup amplifier to the other

amplifiers must be the same size or greater than that used to
wire the speaker circuit.

Cabinet space

The 20- and 40-watt amplifiers each require one space on the rail
assembly. The 95-watt amplifier requires two rail spaces.
The number of zoned amplifier modules that can be installed in a
single cabinet is limited by the number of available rail spaces,
the number of power supplies installed in the cabinet, and battery
limits, if any.

Audio channels
The EST3 audio system provides eight (8) simultaneous
channels for distribution of audio signals. The functions of four
of these channels are fixed by the system. These four channels
are referred to by their functions: Page, EVAC, Alert, and
Auxiliary Input channels. The four remaining channels are
referred to as general channels 1 to 4.
Under manual or automatic network control, each amplifiers
input can be connected to either the Alert channel, the
Evacuation (EVAC) channel, the Page channel, the Auxiliary
Input channel, or one of four (4) general input channels. Should
conflicting commands be issued to a single amplifier, the
amplifier responds to the channel with the highest priority. The
eight channels are prioritized as follows, with the Page channel
having the highest priority

1.34

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview
Page channel

Paging is a manual function. An operator is required to select a

destination for the page, and then make an announcement. The
Page channel is never automatically selected by the EST3
system.
The page channel always carries a live page signal, regardless of
its source. There are three sources which can supply the paging
signal: 1) the local 3-ASU microphone, 2) the remote
microphone, and the 3) the firefighter telephone system. These
sources are automatically prioritized as shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2: Page priorities
Priority

Page signal source

1 (highest)

Local microphone

Firefighter phone

3 (lowest)

Remote microphone

The page command is a non-latching function. When the page

command ends, amplifiers automatically switch back to the
source channel that was active (if any) prior to the page
command.
Five types of page commands are available on the network. The
first four page commands are available simply by pressing a
single switch on the front of the 3-ASU. These are the paging
functions most commonly used in an emergency situation.
1. The All Call command temporarily transfers all amplifiers to
the Page channel while the page is active. All Call distributes
the page signal to every amplifier in the system.
2. The Page to EVAC command temporarily transfers the Page
signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the EVAC
channel. All EVAC amplifiers then receive and distribute
the Page signal.
3. The Page to Alert command temporarily transfers the Page
signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the Alert
channel. All Alert amplifiers then receive and distribute the
page signal.
4. The All Call Minus command temporarily transfers the page
signal to all amplifiers except those connected to the EVAC
and Alert channels.
5. A Selective Page temporarily transfers the selected
amplifiers to the Page channel while the page is activate,
distributing the page signal only to selected audio zones

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.35

System overview

(amplifiers). Audio zones are selected manually by the

operator using the LED/Switch displays.
An example of how the page commands work is illustrated in
Figure 1-17. This figure shows a nine story high rise building,
with a fire on the 6th floor. The fire plan requires the evacuation
signal to be sounded on the fire floor, floor above the fire, and
floor below the fire. The alert signal is required to sounded in all
other areas of the building except the stairwells. The first column
(Fire Alarm) shows the automatic responses on the affected
floors according to the fire plan.

Floor

Fire
Alarm

ASU page commands

Page to
Alert

Page to
Evac

Stairwells

All Call
Minus

All Call

Page

Page

Zoned
Paging

9th floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

8th floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

7th floor

Evac

Page

Evac

Evac

Page

Evac

6th floor

Evac

Page

Evac

Evac

Page

Page

5th floor

Evac

Page

Evac

Evac

Page

Evac

4th floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

3rd floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

2nd floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

1st floor

Alert

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

Legend
Fire floor
Floor above or floor below fire

Figure 1-17: ASU Page Command Example

The Page to EVAC command replaces the EVAC signal with the
Page signal, as shown in the figures second column.
The third column shows the Page to Alert command response, all
the Alert signals have been replaced by the Page signal.
The All Call Minus command directs the Page to the areas which
are not receiving the EVAC or Alert signals, i.e. the stairwells.
In the fourth column of Figure 1-17, the stairwells receive the
Page signal when the All Call Minus command is used and do
not automatically receive either the EVAC or Alert signals.

1.36

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

The All Call command directs the page signal to all areas of the
building, as illustrated in the last column of Figure 1-17.
Any combination of floors and stairwells could be selected to
receive the page by manually selecting the audio zones on the
audio zone select control/display module. Notice that at no time
does any area receiving a signal have its signal interrupted by
any page command function.
Evacuation (EVAC) channel

The EVAC channel always carries a signal designed to notify the

occupants they must leave the facility. The evacuation signal
may take the form of a textual message, a variety of audio tones,
or an audio tone modulated by the standard 3-3-3 evacuation
pattern, or any combination of these signals.
The EVAC channel is preprogrammed, and activated by the
system in response to an alarm. The EVAC signal is
automatically sent to the areas that are in danger and require
immediate evacuation.
The EVAC channel has priority over all channels signals except
for the Page channel. The alarm silence function automatically
silences the EVAC channel when an operator presses the Alarm
Silence switch.
Alert channel

The Alert channel always carries a signal designed to notify the

occupants that an emergency situation exists in the facility.
Occupants hearing the alert signal are not in immediate danger,
but should prepare to evacuate. In some installations, the alert
signal advises occupants that persons evacuating the danger area
will be entering the area for safety.
The Alert channel is preprogrammed, and activated by the
system in response to an alarm. The Alert signal is automatically
sent to areas that are not in immediate danger and do not require
immediate evacuation.
The Alert channel has priority over all other channels except the
Page and EVAC channels. The alarm silence function
automatically silences the Alert channel when an operator
presses the Alarm Silence switch.
General channel

The General channel is used to distribute special purpose signals

to special areas in the facility. Typically these areas include
elevator cabs, stairwells, and areas in less peril than those areas
receiving the Alert signal.
The general channel signals can be preprogrammed in response
to an alarm, or they may be manually activated.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.37

System overview

General channels have a lower priority than the Alert channel.

The alarm silence function does not automatically silence the
Alert channel unless programmed to do so.

Manual audio zone selection

If manual audio zone selection is required on the system, the
appropriate control/display modules must be mounted on
modules in the same cabinet as the Audio Source Unit. Typical
configurations of control/display modules is shown in Figure
1-18. Exact operation of each display is dependent on system
programming. Typical operation is described below.

Page
8th Fl

Page
8th Fl

Alert

Page
7th Fl

Page
7th Fl

Page

Page
6th Fl

Page
6th Fl

Alert

Page
5th Fl

Page
5th Fl

Page

Page
4th Fl

Page
4th Fl

Alert

Page
3rd Fl

Page
3rd Fl

Page

Page
2nd Fl

Page
2nd Fl

Alert

Page
1st Fl

Page
1st Fl

Page

Evac

Evac

Evac

Evac

Status

Status

Status

Status

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

Alert

Page

6th Floor

Page

Alert

5th Floor

Page
9th Fl

Status

4th Floor

Page
9th Fl

Evac

3rd Floor

Alert

2nd Floor

Page
10th Fl

Page

1st Floor

Page
10th Fl

6th Floor

Page

5th Floor

Page
11th Fl

Alert

Status

4th Floor

Page
11th Fl

Evac

3rd Floor

Alert

2nd Floor

Page
12th Fl

1st Floor

Page
12t h Fl

Figure 1-18: Audio zone selection displays

Display A is a model 3-12SG. Each floor switch provides audio

zone selection for the Page signal, and the integral green LED
indicates the audio zone is selected.
Display B is a model 3-12GY. Each floor switch provides Page
audio zone selection. The green LED to the upper left of the
switch indicates the audio zone is selected. The yellow LED to
the lower left of the switch indicates audio circuit trouble.

1.38

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Displays C and D are model 3-6/3Sxxx. The display C

configuration permits manual selection of the Alert, EVAC, and
Page signals by floor. This configuration is well suited for
systems which do not sound signals through the entire facility
during an alarm. Responsible authorities can then manually add
EVAC and Alert signals to other floors of the facility. Display
configuration D is used in facilities which sound the Alert signal
in all areas not receiving the EVAC signal. This eliminates the
need to switch the Alert signal. The middle switch is not used,
the middle LED indicates amplifier status.

Messages
General

While there is no standardization on message content, messages

must tell the occupant what is happening, why it is happening,
and what actions they should take.
As a rule, each message should be repeated three times. If there
is more than one language spoken in the area, the messages
should be provided in each language.
A male voice has been demonstrated to be more authoritative
than a female voice, and should be used where urgency is
required. A female voice has been shown to initially gain the
publics attention quicker than a male voice.
Alarm message format

The basic alarm message format consists of an alarm tone

followed by an evacuation message repeated three times. The
suggested alarm tone can take the form of a 1000 Hz tone
modulated by the standard 3-3-3 evacuation pattern, a slow
whoop, an electronic bell, a constant tone, or a constant tone
modulated at a 120 pulse per minute rate. Please refer to the
Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific requirements.
Typical Alarm Message text:
Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I
have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been a
fire reported in the building. Proceed to the nearest
stairwell and exit the building. Do not use the elevators.
Repeat, do not use the elevators.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.39

System overview

Note: The EST3 amplifiers operate in a stand-alone mode should

they lose communication with the Audio Source Unit. The alarm
tone used in the alarm message should be the same tone used by
the amplifier for stand alone alarm signaling.
Alert message format

The basic alert message consists of an alert tone followed by an

advisory message. The suggested alert tone should be easily
differentiated from the alarm tone and can take the form of a
constant tone, or a constant tone modulated at a 20 pulse per
minute rate. Please refer to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for
specific requirements.
Typical Alert message text:
Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I
have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been an
emergency reported in the building. Your area is in no
immediate danger. People from other areas of the building
may be entering your area. Be prepared to leave the
building if you hear the evacuation signal. Repeat, you are
in no immediate danger.
Informative messages

Informative messages are those special purpose signals to areas

of the facility which may have special concerns during an
emergency situation. Typically these areas include elevator cabs,
stairwells, and areas in less peril than those areas receiving the
Alert signal. Some sample informative messages appear below.
Elevator message text:
Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I
have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been an
emergency reported in the building. The building manager
has directed the elevators to the lobby. Please exit the
building when you reach the lobby.
Stairwell message text:
Female Voice: Please continue down the stairs to your
assigned re-entry floor or the lobby. Do not attempt to use
the elevators.
Do Not Enter message text:
Male Voice: Do not enter this area. This is not an exit.
An emergency has been reported in this section of the
building. Please exit the building using a marked fire exit.

1.40

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview
Message and tone storage

The prerecorded messages and tone sequences are stored in a

digital format in the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit internal memory.
When the message and tone library exceeds two minutes in total
length, a 3-ASUMX/32 Expansion Memory card must be
installed in the 3-ASU. The 3-ASUXM/32 provides additional
storage space for up to 32 minutes of messages.
Messages and tone sequences are created and downloaded
directly into the Audio Source Unit using the SDU and a
computer equipped with a compatible sound card.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.41

System overview

Firefighter phone system

Five phone off-hook limit
The circuitry on the 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit
can support up to five telephones off-hook in addition to the
master handset at the 3-FTCU at any one time. The flexibility of
the EST3 system permits any number of phones to be wired on a
single phone circuit, as long as they are not all used
simultaneously. There are a number of different designs which
can be used to insure that no more than five phones are active at
any one time.

One phone per circuit

The advantages of installing a single firefighter phone station or
jack on a SIGA-CC1 Signature module (personality code 6) are
numerous. The system provides complete control and
annunciation phone/circuit. Installing a single phone on a circuit
permits the operator to immediately identify the exact location of
the calling party. Because the 3-FTCU will only permit five
circuits to be connected simultaneously, the maximum number
of off-hook handsets can never be exceeded. Should a branch
telephone circuit be damaged during a fire, the fault will not
affect other phone circuits. When there is only one phone per
circuit, troubleshooting of faults is simplified.
The largest disadvantage of installing one phone per branch
telephone circuit is cost. Each phone location requires a separate
SIGA-CC1 module.

1.42

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System overview

Typical branch
telephone circuit
UL/ULC Listed
47 k EOLR

Class B
+ TB3

10 9

SIGA-CC1 with
personality code 6
8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1

TB2

TB1
RISER OUT (+)
RISER OUT (-)

From 3-FTCU
From Signature
controller module or
previous device

To next SIGA-CC1 or
UL/ULC Listed EOLR

RISER IN (+)
RISER IN (-)
DATA IN (+)
DATA IN (-)

DATA OUT (+)

DATA OUT (-)

To next device

Figure 1-19: SIGA-CC1 with one phone installed

Five phones per circuit

Installing up to five phones per branch circuit is a realistic
compromise between installing a single phone per circuit and
more than five phones per circuit. In the rare instance that all
five phones are off-hook and a need to communicate with a sixth
remote phone arises, the 3-FTCU operator can temporarily
disconnect the entire branch circuit. Then the second branch
circuit can be connected to complete the conversation.
The advantages of installing up to five telephone stations or
jacks on a SIGA-CC1 Signature module (personality code 6) are:
a reasonable balance between cost and performance; and the
system maintains the high quality voice circuit at all times
because the maximum number of off-hook handsets can never be
exceeded.
The main disadvantage of installing up to five phones per branch
telephone circuit is that a circuit failure can render the entire
branch circuit useless. Additionally, the location of the incoming
caller is not precisely known, and troubleshooting is more
difficult.

Limited number of portable telephone handsets

Another method of limiting the number of off-hook phones to
five limits the number of available portable phones available to
the fire department to five. The biggest advantage of this method

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1.43

System overview

is low cost, as multiple remote telephone jacks can be installed

on a single branch circuit.
The main disadvantage of this method are: that five phones may
not be adequate to properly cover the facility; a circuit failure
can render many of the phone jacks useless; the location of the
incoming caller is not precisely known; and troubleshooting is
more difficult.

1.44

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 2

Security applications

Summary

EST3 has powerful and flexible security capabilities. This

chapter introduces you to the equipment required for security
systems.
This chapter also illustrates and describes several security
applications. Each application is presented as a separate topic
that includes a block diagram and description. These give you an
overview of the application, and show the components required
and their interconnection.
Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component
settings and terminal connections.
Content
Security equipment 2.2
Certificate installations 2.8
Multiple 3-MODCOM modules 2.12
Multiple site security and access 2.13
Multiple tenant security 2.16
Secure access 2.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.1

Security applications

Security equipment
Introduction
The equipment required for a general security system is shown in
Figure 2-1. Well discuss each item shown in the drawing, plus
the other factors called out on the drawing.

Control panel
Signature data circuit
Signature Controller
Module

Signature fire
alarm
devices

3-SAC
Security Access Control
Module

KPDISP
Keypad Display

SEC2
Security Loop
Module

MD
Motion Detector

SAC bus

Conventional
security devices

Telephone lines

3-MODCOM
Modem Communication
Module

Distributor
KDC program

Central
monitoring
station

SDU

Other factors
X Power supply
X Hardware configuration

Resource
profile

RPM

X SDU programming
X

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 2-1: Equipment required for a basic security system

Equipment
The equipment used in security applications includes:

2.2

Control panel
Signature Controller module
SIGA-MD Motion Detector module
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop module
3-SAC Security Access module
SAC bus

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

KPDISP Keypad Display

3-MODCOM Modem Communication module
RPM Resource Profile Manager tool
KDC Keypad Display Configuration program

Control panel
It is a UL listing requirement that all cabinets in a system that
includes security functions must have a tamper switch. The
control panel must include a 3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5, or
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch.

Signature Controller module

The Signature data circuit plays a dual role in integrated systems.
First, it supports devices and modules belonging to the fire alarm
system. Second, it supports security devices that are part of the
security system.
Figure 2-1 shows a Signature Controller module with a Class B
Signature data circuit. Shown on this circuit are Signature fire
alarm devices, plus two security devices, the SIGA-MD and the
SIGA-SEC2.
Several Signature Controller models are available, and can be
used with integrated systems.
Note: Security devices can also be installed on the SAC bus via

CRCs, or on an analog device loop.

SIGA-MD Motion Detector module

The SIGA-MD is a passive infrared motion detector that
connects to the Signature loop. The detector has alarm and
tamper output monitoring capability. A contact closure causes an
alarm but does not latch at the module.
The SIGA-MD provides six separate curtain coverage patterns
with a 34-foot range. The detector can be mounted in flat corners
or on walls up to a height of ten feet.

SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop module

The SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module is an intelligent analog
addressable device that connects one or two security loops to a
Signature data circuit. In Figure 2-1 this is indicated by the
conventional security devices connected to the SIGA-SEC2.
The operation of the SIGA-SEC2 is determined by its device
type and personality code. These are assigned during system
design and configuration.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.3

Security applications

3-SAC Security Access Control module

The 3-SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a highspeed RS-485 circuit called the Security Access Control (SAC)
bus. The SAC bus supports fire, security, and access control
devices.
The 3-SAC handles message traffic for these devices, interfacing
them with the CPU as required. Events are passed from the
devices to the 3-SAC module, then to the CPU for alarm
processing.
The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of
Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can
include 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A
circuits can include 30 devices total. In the figure, we show a
Class B bus with a KPDISP Keypad Display control and display
module.

SAC bus
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we
suggest that you always use a four-wire cable (two twisted-pairs)
for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply.
For the data wires we suggest unshielded, twisted pair, with
greater than 6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq
mm).
For the power wires, we recommend 14 or 16 AWG.

KPDISP Keypad Display

The KPDISP Keypad Display is a control and display module for
security and fire alarm systems. The KPDISP has an LCD
display and a telephone-style keypad. It operates on the 24 Vdc
power supplied with the SAC bus.
The KPDISP is completely menu-driven. It lets the system user:

Arm and disarm partitions

Review off-normal points
Bypass or disable points
Execute fire alarm panel commands

Each KPDISP stores its portion of the security database.

You can create a security system that is operated via the LCD
module alone, or in combination with any Control/LED display
module. See the topic Secure access.

2.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module

The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both
modem and dialer functions. It can transmit and receive
information.
The 3-MODCOM can transmit alarm, supervisory, or trouble
messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two
telephone lines. A variation of the module (3-MODCOMP) can
transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP
protocol. The 3-MODCOMP remote paging feature is
supplemental and is not supervised.
The module can also receive information sent over telephone
lines by the Keypad Display Configuration program.

RPM Resource Profile Manager tool

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool is part of the SDU. It
uses the project database to let you create a separate resource
profile for each company that will be using the security system.
The resource profile defines the security system for the KDC
program. It includes such information as:

The KPDISPs in the system

The routing required to access each KPDISP for downloads
Which KPDISPs can execute fire alarm system commands

The resource profile is imported into the KDC program during

installation.

KDC Keypad Display Configuration program

The Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) program lets the
system user define and maintain a database of information about
KPDISPs, users, and access levels. This is part of the overall
security database.
The KDC program runs on the users PC. Additions or updates
to the security database can be transmitted to the KPDISP units
in two ways.
The first method is via modem and dial-up telephone line to
the3-MODCOM. The information is then routed to the CPU,
through the correct 3-SACs, and finally to the affected KPDISP
units.
The second method is by connecting the users PC directly to the
CPU using an RS-232 cable. The connection is made between
the PCs COM1 port and any of the RS-232 terminals on the
CPU. As in the first method, after reaching the CPU additions
and changes are routed through the correct 3-SACs to the
affected KPDISPs.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.5

Security applications
Note: Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into
a control panel from a remote location. You must perform all
panel programming on site. Changes to the security database
have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire
system equipment.

When the site includes an access control system, the Access

Control Database (ACDB) program is used in place of the KDC.
The ACDB includes the required KDC functionality.

Other factors
Next, well cover the additional factors listed on the drawing:

Power supply
Hardware configuration
SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

These factors are called out on each application diagram given in

this chapter.

Power supply
The KPDISP is designed to operate on 24 Vdc. For this reason,
we recommend that you include power from the panel with the
SAC bus cable. You can use the panel 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or
3-BBC/M power supplies.
Note that additional power supplies must be listed for the
application.

Hardware configuration
The KPDISP does not have any switch or jumper settings. All
configuration is done with the SDU program.

SDU programming
While the KDC program controls a small portion of the security
database, all other definition, configuration, and programming
for the security system happens in the SDU.
The SIGA-MD and SIGA-SEC2 are both treated as modules on
the Signature data circuit. You configure each security module
using the SDU.
The SDU controls the general configuration of the 3-SAC
modules, plus the configuration of all CRC or KPDISP devices
on the SAC busses.
KPDISP modules can be configured to execute a specific,
predefined command list when a specific security or access

2.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

control event occurs. You write the command lists in the SDU,
and assign them to KPDISP events when you configure the
KPDISP module.
Partitions are fundamental groups used with security systems. A
partition is a group of devices intended to provide security for a
given area of the site. Partitions can be armed and disarmed
separately.
All partitions are created and defined in the SDU, and each CRC,
CRC input circuit, KPDISP, SIGA-SEC2 circuit, and SIGA-MD
circuit can be assigned to a partition. Partitions also play a role in
KPDISP message routing.
For the 3-MODCOM module, the SDU determines the dialer and
modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and
assigns each account to the correct receiver.
Finally, the SDU includes the RPM tool, described earlier in this
topic.

ACDB/KDC operation
The Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) program runs on the
end-users PC. It lets him create and maintain a database of
information about KPDISPs, users, and access levels. This is part
of the overall security database.
During setup of the program, the user imports the resource
profile created by the RPM during system programming.
Once installed, the user can create and revise his KDC database.
Changes and additions are transmitted via modem to the
3-MODCOM or via direct RS-232 connection to the CPU. The
data is then routed to the correct 3-SAC and KPDISP units.

Security applications
The remaining topics in this chapter cover specific security
applications. Each topic gives you an overview of the
application, and shows you the components required and their
interconnection.
Each topic has a block diagram and general description of the
application. Other factors (as called out on the drawings) are
discussed under separate headings in each topic.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.7

Security applications

Certificate installations
Description of the applications
An installation company can be listed to install burglar alarm
systems that are covered by UL under its Follow-Up Service.
The listed company issues a certificate of the appropriate class,
grade, and type.
This topic does not detail the steps required for certificate
installations. You must follow UL 681 to determine the exact
requirements for a given installation. Here, we simply list special
EST3 equipment that can be used in the following applications:

Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate

Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate
Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate
Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate

Refer to Appendix C, Listing requirements for additional

information.

Special equipment
Certificate installations require the use of specialized attack and
tamper equipment. Here are brief descriptions of the special
parts. The diagrams for each application show which parts are
required.
ATCK Attack Kit: a replacement cover kit for the 3-RCC7

cabinet. The kit provides a two-minute attack delay time. It

includes a red, overlapping box cover for the cabinet. The cover
attaches to the backbox sides using sheet metal screws and four
locks. The kit also includes special knockout plugs that secure
the unused knockout holes.
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch: a switch that detects

removal of the cover.

Central station grade B alarm certificate

Figure 2-2 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a
Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate installation. Note that
this is the same equipment used for a Grade A Police Station
Connect Certificate installation.

2.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

Listed
Grade A bell

Control panel

Tamper loop
Bell circuit
Wires must be in a
metal conduit with no
boxes or other
junctions

3-IDC8/4
3-SAC
3-MODCOM

3-TAMPRCC Cabinet
Tamper Switch
ATCK Attack Kit

KPDISP
SAC bus
Telephone lines: one
line with 24-hour test or
two lines with line cut
monitors

Other factors
Power supply

Central
monitoring
station

Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 2-2: Components used with a central station grade B

certificate application

For this certificate, the control panel cabinet must be fitted with
an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper
Switch. In addition, a listed Grade A local bell is required.
The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every
arming station in the system. You can use multiple bells if
required.
The bell requires a tamper detection loop. Both the bell circuit
and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3-IDC8/4
module.
A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24-hour
period can be used. Alternately, two lines with line cut
monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24-hour testing.
If the central monitoring station (CMS) does not have testing
services, the SDU can program the system to issue tests on a
fixed or relative basis to meet this requirement.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.9

Security applications

The CMS must have a maximum response time of 30 minutes.

When this application includes partitions, the partition that
contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3-MODCOM and
local bell must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, highlevel access.

Grade A police station connect certificate

The equipment, installation requirements, and application
restrictions for a Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate
installation are the same as for a Central Station Grade B Alarm
Certificate installation, as described above.

Central station grade C alarm certificate

Figure 2-3 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a
Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate installation.

Control Panel
3-SAC
3-MODCOM

3-TAMPRCC Cabinet
Tamper Switch
ATCK Attack Kit

KPDISP
SAC bus

Telephone lines: one

line with 24-hour test or
two lines with line cut
monitors

Other factors
Power supply

Central
monitoring
station

Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 2-3: Grade C central station certificate

This certificate requires that the control panel be fitted with an

ATCK Attack Kit and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch.
No local bell is required.
A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24-hour
period can be used. Alternately, two lines with line cut
monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24-hour testing.

2.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

When this application includes partitions, the partition that

contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3-MODCOM must
be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, high-level access.

Local mercantile grade A alarm certificate

Figure 2-4 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a
Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate installation. The
control panel cabinet must be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit
and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch. A listed Grade A
local bell is also required.
The bell requires a tamper detection loop. Both the bell circuit
and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3-IDC8/4
module.

Listed Grade
A bell and
bell housing

Control Panel
3-IDC8/4
3-SAC

3-TAMPRCC Cabinet
Tamper Switch
ATCK Attack Kit

Tamper loop
Bell circuit
Wires must be in a
metal conduit with no
boxes or other
junctions
SAC bus
KPDISP
Other factors
Power supply
Hardware configuration
SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 2-4: Grade A local certificate

The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every

arming station in the system. You can use multiple bells if
required.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.11

Security applications

Multiple 3-MODCOM modules

You can install more than one 3-MODCOM Modem
Communicator module in a system. Two or more 3-MODCOM
modules can be installed in the same cabinet. Two or more
cabinets can contain 3-MODCOM modules.
There are several reasons for using multiple 3-MODCOMs:

Redundant communication to a CMS

Backup of critical communication links
Dedicated security transmission hardware

In a redundant communication system both 3-MODCOMs are

programmed to transmit the same message to different receivers
at the CMS or at different CMS installations.
One 3-MODCOM can be programmed to back up another. This
guarantees CMS communication (or TAP paging) should one
panel in the system become disabled.
In a multiple tenant application, there may be a high volume of
ACDB/KDC program traffic. You can design such systems with
a second 3-MODCOM, dedicating the first module to
ACDB/KDC traffic, and the second module to CMS
transmissions. This prevents contention for communication
channels.
Overall limits for the number of 3-MODCOM modules are:

2.12

10 modules per node

10 modules total per network

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

Multiple site security and access

Description of the application
Figure 2-5 shows how a company with multiple sites can
centralize security and access control functions for all sites. This
means an employee only needs to carry a single access card to
gain appropriate access to any company site.
The figure shows a company with three plants, designated sites
A, B, and C. Site C is chosen as the company headquarters for
security and access control purposes.
Each site is a separate SDU project. At each site, the Resource
Profile Manager (RPM) tool is used to create a profile for that
site. This includes site C, the headquarters plant.
All the profiles are sent to the security office at site C for import
into the Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) or Access Control
Database (ACDB) program. This means that the programs will
present all resources at all sites in a single hierarchy, as shown
by the tree diagram.
The security personnel at site C can create global access groups.
This means that they can assign an employee the correct security
and access privileges for all sites from one central location. The
employee can carry a single access card that will grant him the
correct security and access privileges at each site.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.13

Security applications

SDU

SITE A

SITE B

EST3
system

EST3
system

SDU

RPM

RPM

Site A
profile

Site B
profile

Telephone lines
SITE C (HQ)

EST3
system

A
D1
D2
D3

ACDB
KDC

B
D1
D2
D3
C
D1
D2
D3

Site C
profile
Other factors
Power supply
X

Hardware configuration

SDU programming

ACDB/KDC operation

Total resource
profile tree

RPM
SDU

Figure 2-5: Multiple site security and access control system

Hardware configuration
Each site must have an EST3 system. In each EST3 system, at
least one panel must include a 3-MODCOM module to support
modem communication between headquarters and sites A and B.
The KDC and ACDB programs can communicate with the EST3
system either by modem, or by direct connection to an RS-232
port on the CPU module.

2.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

Each system includes 3-SAC modules as required to support the

security and access control systems implemented.

SDU programming
No special project programming is required to enable multiple
site security and access control systems. When running the RPM
tool, each site receives 100% of the resources for that site.
Note that all profiles must be sent to the site C headquarters
when the project is finished.

ACDB/KDC operation
At the headquarters site, all three profiles are imported into the
ACDB/KDC program. The result is a global tree of resources
that includes each KPDISP and CRC device in each site.
Importing all the profiles into one ACDB/KDC program creates
the global database.
When additions or changes to the KPDISP database are made,
headquarters can transmit the changes to the affected sites.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.15

Security applications

Multiple tenant security

Description of the application
Figure 2-6 illustrates a simple strip mall security application. The
mall consists of three identical stores and an electrical room.
The control panel supports a SIGA data circuit and a SAC bus.
The panel also supports modem communications via telephone
lines.
The SIGA circuit has pull stations and smoke detectors. In
addition, the SIGA circuit has two security devices, the motion
detector and the SIGA-SEC2 security loop module. The SIGASEC2 connects a conventional door contact to the SIGA circuit.
The SAC bus is used exclusively for the KPDISP devices.
Each company owner has a Keypad Display Configuration
(KDC) program. The program runs on a computer equipped with
a modem, and uses the modem and a dial-up telephone line to
communicate with the control panel.
Each company owner can use the KDC to download changes to
that companys portion of the security database. The changes are
routed through the panel to the appropriate KPDISP unit.
Note: Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into
a control panel from a remote location. You must perform all
panel programming on site. Changes to the security database
have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire
system equipment.

The control panel can be configured to provide telephone

connection to a central monitoring station (CMS). Each tenant
company can have a separate account at the same CMS, or can
use the services of a separate CMS.
Refer to Appendix C, Listing requirements for additional
information.

2.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

SIGA-270
Pull station

KDC
Program

KPDISP

SIGA-IPS
Smoke

Company A
Partition 2

Door
contact

Door
contact

KPDISP

SIGA-IPS
Smoke

Company B
Partition 3

SIGA-MD
Motion

SIGA-SEC2
Security

SIGA-270
Pull station

KDC
Program

SIGA-SEC2
Security

SIGA-MD
Motion

NOTE: Star taps are shown to simplify this diagram, but are not
recommended for Signature data circuits. Create two T-taps in
the same junction box if required.

Security
bell

KPDISP

SAC bus

Control
panel

SIGA loop

Partition 1

SIGA-MD
Motion

SIGA-270
Pull station

KDC
Program

Door
contact

SIGA-SEC2
Security

X ACDB/KDC operation

X SDU programming

X Hardware configuration

Power supply

Other factors

KPDISP

SIGA-IPS
Smoke

Company C
Partition 4

SIGA-MD
Motion

Telephone line

Security applications

Figure 2-6: Multiple tenant security in a strip mall

2.17

Security applications

Hardware configuration
The control panel contains the following rail modules:

Signature Controller module

3-SAC Security Access Control module
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module

The Signature Controller module supports the SIGA loop.

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the
KPDISP can be taken from the 3-PPS/M and routed with the
data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.
The 3-MODCOM module supports modem communication
between the control panel and the KDC programs via telephone
lines.
In the Class B configuration illustrated, an appropriate RS-485
line terminating resistor is required in the KPDISP located in
partition 4.
The electrical room, partition 1, must be armed 24 hours a day,
and have limited, high-level access.

SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, you define
the required partitions and assign the correct partition number to
each security device.
Part of the programming effort includes using the Resource
Profile Manager (RPM) tool to create resource profiles for the
site owner and for each company owner.
Since none of the devices are shared, each company should
receive 100% of the resources of their KPDISP. A small
percentage may be set aside for use of the site owner, depending
on the owners policy.
Programming for the 3-MODCOM module determines the dialer
and modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and
assigns each account to the correct receiver.
Finally, when running the RPM tool, you specify which, if any,
of the KPDISP modules can execute fire system commands.
Typically, this privilege is reserved for the site owner or site
security staff.
Refer to the SDU Online Help for more information.

KDC operation
Each company owner must import the resource profile output
from the RPM. After importing this resource data, each company

2.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Security applications

owner can create his portion of the security database, according

to the instructions included with the KDC program.
Changes to the tenant portion of the security database can be
made at any time, and from any location.
Note: Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into
a control panel from a remote location. You must perform all
panel programming on site. Changes to the security database
have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire
system equipment.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2.19

Security applications

Secure access
Description of the application
Secure access is a simplified type of security application.
Typical secure access applications are operated from a secured
control panel, and use partitions with no entry or exit delay
timers.
Secure access applications often use the control panel LCD
module (or dedicated Control/LED display modules) to control
the security partitions. Partitions can be armed or disarmed using
any of the following:

LCD menus
EST3 Control/LED modules
FireWorks interface
ENVOY annunciators
KPDISP

A secure access system can be implemented using either

Signature or Analog Addressable security devices. Signature
devices are less prone to false alarms, and are more resistant to
tampering, since they cannot be swapped with deliberately
compromised devices.

SDU programming
When you create a secure access application, use the SDU to
create partitions as required. When configuring the partitions, set
the Entry Delay Timer and Exit Delay Timer values to zero.
When configuring SIGA-SEC2 and SIGA-MD devices, set the
Delay to None.
You can use LCD menu commands to arm and disarm the
partitions. To do so, you must check the Enable LCD Security
Control Functions check box. This is located on the Options tab
of the Cabinet Configuration dialog box. Checking this box
causes the Security menu to appear in the Command Menus list.
You can use any suitable Control/LED module to arm and
disarm partitions. Configure the switches as momentary contact
switches, and use them to activate command lists. Program the
command lists to perform the desired arm and disarm actions and
control the LEDs.
Refer to the SDU Online Help for more information on rule
programming for secure access applications.

2.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 3

Access control applications

Summary

EST3 supports rugged and adaptable access control systems.

This chapter introduces you to the equipment required for access
control applications.
This chapter also illustrates and describes several access control
applications. Each application is presented as a separate topic
that includes a block diagram and description. These give you an
overview of the application, and show the components required
and their interconnection.
Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component
settings and terminal connections.
Security applications make use of the CRC Card Reader
Controller. Refer to the CRC and CRCXMCard Reader
Controller Installation Sheet for specific installation information
on this module.
Content
Access control equipment 3.2
Anti-passback 3.11
Central monitoring station 3.14
Common door access 3.16
Delayed egress 3.18
Elevator control 3.21
Emergency exit door 3.24
Handicap access door 3.26
Maglock peripherals 3.28
Multiple card readers 3.30
Muster 3.32
Power for continuous locks 3.35
Power for intermittent locks 3.37
Power from an AC source 3.39
Power from a remote source 3.42
Remote controls 3.45
Two-person rule 3.47

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.1

Access control applications

Access control equipment

Introduction
The equipment required for a basic networked access control
system is shown in Figure 3-1. Well discuss each item shown in
the figure, plus the other factors called out on the drawing.

Input circuit 1

Input circuit 2

Control panel
SAC bus

3-SAC
Security Access Control
Module

CRC
Card Reader
Controller

3-MODCOM
Modem Communication
Module
Output circuit

Card reader

Lock

Telephone lines

Distributor
ACDB program
SDU

Central
monitoring
station
Other factors
X Power supply

RPM

X Hardware configuration

Resource
profile

X SDU programming
X

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-1: Equipment required for a basic access control system

Equipment
Here is a list of the equipment used in a basic networked access
control system:

3.2

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-MODCOM Modem Communication module
SAC bus
CRC Card Reader Controller

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Input circuit 1
Input circuit 2
Output circuit
Card reader
Lock
RPM Resource Profile Manager tool
ACDB Access Control Database program

3-SAC Security Access Control module

The 3-SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a highspeed RS-485 circuit called the Security Access Control (SAC)
bus. The SAC bus supports fire, security, and access control
devices.
The 3-SAC handles message traffic for these devices, interfacing
them with the CPU as required. Events are passed from the
devices to the 3-SAC module, then to the CPU for alarm
processing.
The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of
Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can
include 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A
circuits can include 30 devices total. In Figure 3-1, we show a
Class B bus with a CRC Card Reader Controller module.

3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module

The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both
modem and dialer functions. It can transmit and receive
information.
The 3-MODCOM can transmit alarm, supervisory, or trouble
messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two
telephone lines. A variation of the module (3-MODCOMP) can
transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP
protocol.
The module can also receive information sent over telephone
lines by the Access Control Database (ACDB) program.

SAC bus
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we
suggest that you always use a four-wire cable for the SAC bus
and a 24 Vdc power supply.
For the data wires, use unshielded, twisted pair, with greater than
6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq mm). For the
power wires, use 14 or 16 AWG.
You can use a four-conductor cable with an overall jacket
containing solid 2-19 AWG and 2-16 AWG for the SAC bus.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.3

Access control applications

The maximum run from a CRC to the 3-SAC is 4,000 ft

(1,220 m) at 25 pF/ft. The maximum total capacitance of the run
is 0.1 F, and the maximum total resistance is 52 .

CRC Card Reader Controller

The Card Reader Controller (CRC) module performs all access
decision processing. Each CRC stores a database and is capable
of granting or denying entry without external communication. If
entry is granted, the CRC applies or removes power to the strike
or maglock to unlock the door. The CRC is also capable of
unlocking a door by activating a manual push button.
Each CRC stores an access database of users and events for the
door it controls. The CRCXM model features enhanced storage
capacity. (Refer to the product installation sheets for quantities.)
Each CRC has terminals that support:

Two card readers, typically one inside and one outside the
door

One lock device, either strike or maglock type

Two input circuits for devices such as request to exit

detectors, door contacts, or motion detectors

One output circuit with N.O and N.C. contacts for auxiliary
devices, such as door openers

With the addition of an internal battery, the CRC can continue

processing access events even if there is a loss of communication
or power.

CRC options
CRCSND CRC Sounder

The CRC Sounder is a small horn that mounts inside the card
reader controller module. The sounder operates if an emergency
exit door is opened without an exit request and can also indicate
that a door has been left open.
The CRC Sounder can be programmed, using rules written in the
SDU. Further, the ACDB program can control several operating
parameters of the sounder.
CRCRL CRC Accessory Relay

The CRCRL is an accessory relay for the CRC (or CRCXM)

Card Reader Controller. Use the CRCRL in conjunction with an
external power supply to control a lock which requires voltage or
current outside the CRC's operating range.

3.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

The CRCRL can be mounted inside the CRC housing when

connected to power-limited wiring. The unit includes a hookand-loop patch which can be attached to the CRC battery strap.
When nonpower-limited wiring is used, the CRCRL must be
mounted in a junction box.
The CRCRL is listed as an Access Control Accessory and
Control Unit Accessory.
Battery

Each CRC has space for an internal, 1.2 Ah, sealed lead-acid
battery. The battery supplies power to the CRC and its
peripherals, and provides local standby power.
The CRC battery provides 30 minutes of standby power for
access control functions and up to 4 hours for security functions.
The battery cannot be used for fire applications.
CRCXF CRC Transformer

The CRCXF CRC Transformer is a 16.5 Vac transformer that

can power the CRC or CRCXM. It provides local power for
applications requiring additional power at door lock. The CRC
has AC load terminals for easy connection to transformer.
Be sure to check the CRC installation sheet for a list of
applications that prohibit the use of the CRCXF.

Input circuits 1 and 2

Each CRC supports two input circuits for such devices as:

Door contacts
Motion detectors
Request to exit (REX) switches
Security devices

A door contact device monitors the door position (open or

closed) for various applications.
A motion detector detects a persons approach and can be used
to unlock the door.
A request to exit (REX) push button (or bar) can be used to
manually unlock the door.
Security devices, such as glass-break detectors can be associated
with the door to enhance its security, or to monitor a nearby
window.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.5

Access control applications

Output circuit
Each CRC supports one output circuit in the form of N.O. and
N.C. dry contact connections. The output circuit can be used for
such devices as:

Automatic door openers

Door holder control

Card reader
By card reader, we mean any of the different types of credential
reader supported by the CRC. A card reader scans a card to
determine the card number and passes the card number to the
CRC.
A card reader is a self-contained module capable of reading one
type of access card and transmitting the cards code to a card
reader controller.
All the required electronics are assembled in the card reader
housing. The card reader connects directly to the CRC, which
processes the card code and grants or denies access.
Each CRC can support several card readers. Typically, a CRC
will control an entry and exit card reader for the doorway. It can
also support multiple readers for such applications as two-person
rule or anti-passback.
Note that the CRC supports any type of reader that uses the
industry standard Wiegand output format. These include:

Proximity
Wiegand pin
Magnetic stripe
Bar code
Keypad
Smart card
Biometric

For simplicity, we present all the applications in this chapter as

operating with proximity readers, but other reader types can be
used.
Some applications work best with card readers that support dual
LED control. The CRC uses two LEDs, or two LED states, to
indicate that further actions are required after the initial badging
operation, before access is granted. These applications are:

Two-person rule
Visitor and escort
PIN schedule

Some card readers are also equipped with a keypad. The keypad
allows for entry of a PIN number in addition to the card code.

3.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

The CRC can accommodate any PIN number of 1-4 digits along
with the associated card code. The need to enter a PIN is
controlled by two factors: whether or not the CRC is armed, and
whether or not the access schedule calls for use of a PIN.

Lock
The CRC supports any type of door locking or releasing device.
Common lock devices are strikes and maglocks. A strike opens
the door when power is supplied, while a maglock secures the
door while power is supplied.

RPM Resource Profile Manager tool

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool is part of the SDU. It
uses the project database to let you create a separate resource
profile for each company that will be using the access control
system.
The resource profile defines the access control system for the
ACDB program. It includes detailed information about each
CRC used by a given company. For example:

Communication method
Primary or secondary control
Number of cardholders
Number of schedules
Number of holidays
Number of access levels
Command lists used

ACDB Access Control Database program

The Access Control Database (ACDB) program lets you define
and maintain a database of information about CRCs, cardholders,
and access levels.
The ACDB program runs on the your PC. Additions or updates
to the access control database can be transmitted to the CRC
units in two ways.
The first method is via modem and dial-up telephone line to the
3-MODCOM. The information is then routed to the CPU,
through the correct 3-SACs, and finally to the CRC units.
The second method is by connecting your PC directly to the
CPU using an RS-232 cable. The connection is made between
the PCs COM1 port and any of the RS-232 terminals on the
CPU. As in the first method, after reaching the CPU additions
and changes are routed through the correct 3-SACs to the CRCs.
Note: Changes to the access control database have no impact on
the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.7

Access control applications

Other factors
Next, well cover the additional factors listed on the drawing:

Power supply
Hardware configuration
SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

These factors are called out on each application diagram given in

this chapter.

Power supply
The CRC is designed to operate on 24 Vdc. For this reason, we
recommend that you include power from the panel with the SAC
bus cable. You can use the panel 3-PPS/M or 3-BPS/M power
supplies.
When using CRCXF CRC Transformer you must provide a
circuit common path between all devices, using the 24 Vdc
terminals.
If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF,
that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must
have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit
ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.

Hardware configuration
The CRC has two jumpers that configure the power source and
usage for the module. See the CRC installation sheet for details
on the jumper settings.
No other configuration settings are made at the device itself. All
other configuration is done via SDU or ACDB programming.
The SDU determines site-level configuration and parameters.
The ACDB program controls end-user settings.

SDU programming
While the ACDB program defines the access control database,
all other definition, configuration, and programming for the
access control system happens in the SDU.
The SDU controls the general configuration of the 3-SAC
modules, plus the configuration of all CRC devices on the SAC
busses.
CRC modules can be configured to execute a specific,
predefined command list when a specific access control event
occurs. You write the command lists in the SDU, and assign
them to CRC events when you configure the CRC module.

3.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Partitions are fundamental groups used with access control

systems. To use such access control features as two man rule,
muster, or anti-passback, CRCs must belong to the same
partition. All partitions are created and defined in the SDU, and
each CRC can be assigned to a partition.
For the 3-MODCOM module, the SDU determines the dialer and
modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and
assigns each account to the correct receiver. These settings
control CMS reporting and ACDB download operation.
Finally, the SDU includes the RPM tool, described earlier in this
topic.

ACDB operation
The ACDB program lets you create and revise your access
control database. Parameters stored in the database identify
cardholders, schedules, and holidays, and assign access
privileges.
The SDU includes a tool called the Resource Profile Manager
(RPM). The RPM lets you create a resource profile for each
company using the system for access control purposes. During
setup of the ACDB program, you import the resource profile
created by the RPM. This defines the system devices for the
ACDB program.
The ACDB runs on your computer. You can connect the
computer to the access control system in two ways:

From an RS-232 port on the computer to an RS-232 port on

the CPU

From the computer modem to a 3-MODCOM via telephone

lines

The end result is that the ACDB database can be downloaded

from your computer to the system. Each CRC stores that portion
of the database pertinent to its operation.

Locally defined unlock and open timers

Using the ACDB program, you can control how much time a
cardholder has to enter or exit after badging in or pressing a
request-to-exit button (REX). The CRC controls both the unlock
time and door open time. Both can be set in the ACDB program.
Unlock timers control the number of seconds that the door stays
unlocked after a cardholder badges in. When the unlock timer
expires, the door locks. The ACDB has four unlock timers:

Standard unlock
Handicap unlock

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.9

Access control applications

Manual unlock
Minimum unlock

The CRC relay can be used to control a door opener. Door open
timers control the number of seconds that the relay remains
active. The ACDB has two door open timers:

Manual open time

Relay open time

Access control applications

The remaining topics in this chapter discuss specific access
control applications. Each topic gives you an overview of the
application, showing the components required and their
interconnection.
Each topic includes a block diagram and general description of
the application. Other factors (as called out on the drawings) are
discussed under separate headings in the topic.

3.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Anti-passback
Description of the application
Anti-passback is a feature of the access control system that
prevents successive use of one card to pass through any door in
the same direction. Anti-passback prevents a card from being
passed back to another person for the purpose of gaining
unauthorized access.
The CRC supports three forms of anti-passback:

Strict
Logged
Timed

Strict anti-passback is the most restrictive form of anti-passback.

It requires all personnel to badge in and out, denying them access
to an area when they fail to do so.
Logged anti-passback is less restrictive than strict anti-passback.
It still requires personnel to badge in and out but does not deny
access when anti-passback rules are violated. Rather, such access
is logged as an access granted anti-passback event. With logged
anti-passback, security staff can work to correct violations, but
personnel are not locked out.
Timed anti-passback prevents reuse of a card for a specific
period, but does not require personnel to badge out. A timed
anti-passback system automatically badges a cardholder out of
the controlled partition after a specified time period, allowing the
card to be used again.
Note: Timed anti-passback cannot be used with a muster
application, since the system automatically logs cardholders out
of the partition, defeating muster accounting.

To implement anti-passback, a separate CRC is required at each

doorway in the controlled partition. Each doorway requires an
outside card reader. Strict and logged anti-passback applications
also require an inside reader at every doorway. Timed antipassback does not require the use of an inside card reader.
A typical anti-passback application is shown in Figure 3-2,
below.
The figure shows a building with a perimeter fence. It would be
easy for an employee to pass his access card to an unauthorized
individual through the fence, thereby allowing access.
Configuring the access control system for anti-passback
operation can help prevent this from happening.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.11

Access control applications

Perimeter fence

Entrance
turnstile

Outside
reader
Inside
reader

Lock circuit

SITE

Reader circuit

Building
entrance
CRC

SAC bus

Main building
Control panel
3-SAC

Emergency
exit
Other factors
Power supply
X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-2: Anti-passback

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain a 3-SAC Security Access Control
module. The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for
the CRC can be taken from the 3-PPS/M and routed with the
data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires (the
SAC bus).

3.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

SDU programming
If the CRC is to be used for anti-passback this must be
configured using the SDU. The CRC configuration dialogs let
you select the type of anti-passback you want to use:

None
Logged
Timed
Strict

You can also assign a predefined command list to various access

granted or access denied events, including the anti-passback
events:

Access granted anti-passback

Access denied anti-passback

The CPU runs the command list you specify when either of these
events occurs.

ACDB programming
With timed anti-passback, the cardholder is automatically
marked out after a specified period of time. This period is
defined by the ACDB. The period can be set from 0 through 255
minutes (4 hours and 15 minutes).

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.13

Access control applications

Central monitoring station

Description of the application
An access control system can transmit different kinds of event
information to a central monitoring station (CMS). The basics
for such a system are shown in Figure 3-3.
Card
reader

CRC

SAC bus
Control panel

Access denied event

3-SAC
CPU

Programmed rules
for transmission

3-MODCOM
Formatted CMS message
Telephone line
Other factors
Power supply
Hardware configuration
X

SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Central
monitoring
station

Figure 3-3: Access control reporting to a central monitoring

station

When a reportable access event occurs, the event message travels

from the CRC to the 3-SAC. The 3-SAC passes the message to
the CPU which executes a predefined command list. The
command list specifies the details of the message that is sent to
the 3-MODCOM for transmission to the CMS.

3.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

SDU programming
Reporting access control events to a CMS depends entirely on
programming and the creation of command lists. In essence, you
must assign a command list to each CRC event you want to
report. The command list contains the details of the message to
be transmitted.
The following CRC events can be assigned command events:

Access granted
Access granted irregular
Access granted anti-passback
Access granted muster
Access denied unknown
Access denied reader disabled
Access denied access level not active
Access denied outside schedule 1
Access denied outside schedule 2
Access denied partition armed
Access denied PIN not entered
Access denied PIN not valid
Access denied two-person timeout
Access denied anti-passback
Access denied escort

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.15

Access control applications

Common door access

Description of the application
A site that makes use of a common door is shown in Figure 3-4.
Here, the door is the main entrance of an office building, and
leads into a common lobby area. Within the building, two
companies rent offices, each with controlled access doors.
Telephone lines

Common door
CR 1

Site owner

Control panel

ACDB

3-SAC

Modem

3-MODCOM

CRC 1

SITE
Lobby
SAC bus

Distributor

Suite 101
Site
Owner

CRC 2

Company A

SDU
Company
A

ACDB

RPM
Modem

CR 2

Company
B

Suite 102
Company B

Other factors

CRC 3

Resource profiles
ACDB

X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC operation

Modem

CR 3

Power supply

Figure 3-4: Common door in a lobby area

3.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Hardware configuration
The site has an EST3 control panel that includes a 3-SAC and a
3-MODCOM module. The 3-SAC supports the SAC bus. The
3-MODCOM module supports modem communication with the
control panel over telephone lines.

SDU programming
As the distributor, you use the SDU to program the control panel
for this application. Part of the programming job is to use the
Resource Profile Manager (RPM) to create resource profiles for
the site owner and for each tenant company.
Resource profiles are imported into the Access Control Database
(ACDB) program. They determine which devices the user can
see and program. Resource profiles also establish transmission
routes that permit modem communication with the EST3 panel.
When a device is shared, the RPM lets you specify how much of
the device is allocated to each company. You can allocate
resources either by percentages or by actual numbers.
Its a good idea to hold some allocation in reserve, giving each
company only what it needs. It is much easier to allocate
additional resources as needed than to reclaim resources that are
already allocated.
In our example, the resource profile for company A would
contain CRC 1 (the lobby door) and CRC 2 (the suite 101 door).
For Company A, you might choose to allocate 80% of CRC 2,
and 20% of CRC 1.
Similarly, the resource profile for company B would allocate
80% of CRC 3 and another 20% of CRC 1.
The site owner will need access to the CRC2 and CRC3 doors
for cleaning or inspection purposes. The site owner resource
profile could allocate 20% of CRC 1, 10 % of CRC 2, and 10%
of CRC 3.
This leaves 40% of CRC 1 unallocated, and 10% of CRC 2 and
CRC 3 unallocated. The unallocated resources are reserved for
future expansion or changes.

ACDB operation
The site owner, the owner of company A, and the owner of
company B, can all use telephone lines to communicate with the
control panel via the 3-MODCOM module. They can download
additions and changes to the CRCs, and upload usage data for
various ACDB reports.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.17

Access control applications

Delayed egress
Description of the application
Delayed egress doors help to control shoplifting at retail sites. A
delayed egress door has card readers and a request to exit (REX)
switch. Employees can badge in and out as they would at any
other door. In an emergency, customers must press the REX
switch to unlock the door.
When the REX switch is activated, the CRC sounds the
CRCSND horn and sends a security alarm event to the panel. It
does not unlock the door immediately, thus allowing site staff
time to investigate.
The CRC waits for a specific interval of time before unlocking
the door. The typical delay time is 15 seconds; however, you
may be able to use a delay of up to 30 seconds with the approval
of the AHJ. The horn continues to sound for a specific period of
time, or until the CRC is reset.
After the delay time passes, the CRC unlocks the door, and
latches it in the unlocked state. The CRC must be reset in order
to relock the door and silence the horn. To reset the CRC, site
staff must use a valid badge at the card reader.
The CRC also activates the CRCSND horn if the door is opened
without badging. For example, if the door is forced open from
the outside, the CRCSND activates, even though the REX switch
has not been pressed.
Many codes require that delayed egress doors unlock during a
fire alarm, or when the panel is in trouble. This requirement
allows occupants to evacuate the site immediately when a fire is
detected, or when the panel loses its ability to detect a fire or
sound the alarm.
Figure 3-5 shows a delayed egress door with inside and outside
card readers and a request to exit switch. The CRC uses a door
contact switch to determine the position of the door, and a
maglock to lock the door. The door contact switch and REX
switch are connected to the input loops of the CRC.
Note: Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the
requirements for delayed egress applications.

3.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Card
reader
inside

CRC
CRCSND

Door
contact

Card
reader
outside

Maglock

REX
switch

Other factors
Power supply
X

Hardware configuration

SDU programming

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-5: Delayed egress doorway

Hardware configuration
A maglock is most commonly used for delayed egress
applications, but you can use any locking device that has no
manual override. For example, a strike with no knob could be
used.
The door contact is used to detect unauthorized opening of the
door. The CRC activates the CRCSND and reports a security
alarm event when the door is opened without badging or use of
the REX.
The door contact signal is also required to relock the door when
the CRC is reset. The lock cannot be reset until the door is
closed.

SDU programming
Most codes require you to program rules that unlock the door
when the panel goes into alarm or when the panel goes into
trouble.
When configuring the CRC, set the Delayed Egress Time field to
the value (in seconds) you want to use. Define the input loops as
follows.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.19

Access control applications

For the door contact input loop:

Device Type = Security P Monitor

Input Circuit Partition = as determined by project
Max Delta Count = as determined by project
Delays = None
Application = Emergency Exit Door Contact
Personality = Basic

For the request to exit switch:

Device Type = Monitor

Input Circuit Partition = None
Max Delta Count = not applicable
Delays = None
Application = Request to Exit with Delayed Egress
Personality = N.O. with Trouble

ACDB operation
When an employee badges in or out at the door, the CRC
bypasses the door contact for a specified period of time. This is
called the Bypass Time, and is specified in the ACDB.
The duration of the CRCSND horn is also specified in the
ACDB, as the Emergency Exit Sounder Time. This can be set to
any value between 0 and 255 seconds.
Setting the value to 0 seconds effectively inhibits the CRCSND.
Setting the value to 255 seconds programs the CRC to operate
the CRCSND until the CRC is manually reset by badging at the
CRC card reader.

3.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Elevator control
Description of the application
An access control system can determine which floors are
available to a given cardholder. This application is shown in
Figure 3-6.
A CRC and independent power source are installed in the
elevator cab. When a cardholder presents his card it is processed
by the CRC. If valid, the CRC sends an access granted event and
a command list request to the CPU via the 3-SAC.
The command list operates the Signature relay modules attached
to the Signature Controller module. The relays are connected to
the elevator controller, and turn on or off access to the correct
floors, according to the cardholders access level privileges.
The command list includes timing, so the cardholder has a
limited window of opportunity during which he can press the
desired floor button. After the time has lapsed, he must present
his card again.
Note: This application must be used only for floor access, and
not for elevator control.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.21

Access control applications

Elevator room
Elevator controller
SIGA-CR
Floor enabling
circuits

SIGA-CR
SIGA-CR

Elevator
traveller cable
Signature data circuit
Electrical room

Elevator line

SAC bus (using two

spare twisted pairs)

Control panel
Signature
Controller
CPU
3-SAC

Elevator cab
Operator
panel

CRC

Other factors

Card
reader

CRCXF
Transformer

X Power supply
X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-6: Access control and elevators

3.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Power supply
The figure shows an independent power source for the CRC.
This is suggested due to the length of cable from the cab to the
electrical room.
Two pairs of wires are used to connect the CRC to the control
panel. The SAC bus requires one pair for data communication.
One wire of the second pair is required to maintain a common
ground between the control panel and the CRC. For details, refer
to the topic Power from an AC source, later in this chapter.
If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF,
that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must
have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit
ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.

Hardware configuration
In this application, none of the CRC input circuits or relay
contacts are used. The CRC simply reads the card and passes the
command list request to the 3-SAC and CPU for processing.
Since the CRC lock and input circuits are not used, you must
provide dummy loads to maintain correct supervision currents.
See the installation sheet for the correct load values.

SDU programming
The SDU programmer must create a command list for each
combination of floors desired.

ACDB operation
The site security officer determines which floors should be
accessible for an access level, and assigns the correct command
list to the access granted event for that level. The site security
officer also determines which cardholders belong to each access
level.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.23

Access control applications

Emergency exit door

Description of the application
An emergency exit door is a door that is unlocked from the
inside either by badging out or by opening the door.
If the door is opened without badging out, it causes an immediate
alarm. Badging out bypasses the door for a specific period of
time, so no alarm event occurs.
A typical CRC application for emergency exit door is shown in
Figure 3-7 below.
CRC

Door
contact

CRCSND

Card
reader
outside

Card
reader
inside

Strike

Other factors
Power supply
X

Hardware configuration

SDU programming

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-7: Emergency exit door

Note: Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the
requirements for emergency exit applications.

Hardware configuration
A CRC used for an emergency exit door requires the following
additional hardware:

CRCSND CRC Sounder

Door contact

The CRCSND is installed inside the CRC. The sounder provides

a local sound alarm. Opening the door without badging out
activates the CRCSND.

3.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

The door contact is connected to the CRC via the input circuit.

SDU programming
In the SDU, youll need to define the input circuit for the door
contact as follows:

Device type: Security P Monitor

Delays: None
Application: Door Contact
Personality: Basic

ACDB operation
Two time periods are defined in the ACDB: Emergency Exit
Sounder Time, and Bypass Time.
Emergency Exit Sounder Time is the number of seconds (0
through 255) the CRC Sounder sounds when an emergency exit
door is opened without badging out.
When set to zero, the sounder is disabled. When set to 255, the
sounder sounds until manually reset. The sounder is reset when a
cardholder badges in at the door.
In all cases badging in on the affected CRC can silence the
sounder.
Bypass Time is the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the
door is bypassed after a cardholder badges out.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.25

Access control applications

Handicap access door

Description of application
A handicap access door is a door that helps a handicapped
person enter and exit a door by allowing extra access time and
providing an automatic door opener. See Figure 3-8, below.
The door can function for both normal access and handicap
access. A person without handicap privileges would operate the
door just as any other door.
When a person with handicap privileges badges in, the CRC
recognizes that the person has handicap privileges and provides
two extra benefits. The first is giving the handicap person extra
time to enter or exit the doorway before relocking the door. The
second is an automatic door opener.
A second card reader can be installed in parallel to the entry or
exit card reader to make it easier for a handicapped person to
reach. The second card reader should be placed at a lower level
and farther away from the door. The distance from the door
should allow the automatic door to open fully without a person
needing to move backwards.

Door
opener

CRC

Card
reader
outside

Card
reader
inside

Handicap
card reader
outside

Handicap
card reader
inside

Lock

Other factors
Power supply
X

Hardware configuration

SDU programming

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-8: Handicap access door

3.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Note: Refer to the appropriate ADA codes and the local AHJ to
determine the requirements for handicap access door
applications.

Hardware configuration
A CRC used for a handicap access door may require the
following additional hardware:

Automatic door opener

Additional card readers

The automatic door opener is installed directly to the access

door. The CRC controls the opening of the door with its internal
relay.
Caution: The CRC relay is for low-voltage only. Do not exceed

the relay limits stated on the installation sheet.

The additional card readers are wired to the standard card readers
in parallel.

SDU programming
In the SDU, youll need to define the CRC relay device type as
Access Door Control. This will activate the door opener for the
time specified by the ACDB.

ACDB operation
The relay open time needs to be defined in the ACDB. This is
the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the CRC will
activate the relay that automatically opens the door. The default
is 30 seconds.
The handicap unlock time also needs to be defined in the ACDB.
This is the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the lock will
stay unlocked. The default is 20 seconds The door will relock
when the unlock time has expired and the door has closed.
Both of these times can be set to allow a longer access time for a
handicapped person.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.27

Access control applications

Maglock peripherals
Description of the application
Maglocks require maglock peripherals due to NFPA codes. In
general, these devices are intended to ensure that an egress door
secured with a maglock can always be opened in an emergency.
Figure 3-9 shows the CRC using a maglock and required
peripherals.
Maglock application requires a passive infrared motion detector
(PIR) to be mounted above the door. Also required is a request to
exit (REX) switch to be mounted within five feet of the door and
40 to 48 inches above the ground. The PIR is connected on the
input circuit of the CRC. The REX is connected directly to the
maglock so that when activated it unlocks the door
independently of the CRC.
The CRC is designed so that on detection of a fault on the input
circuit of the PIR, the door will unlock. The PIR detects an
approaching body and unlocks the door. Similarly, the REX
switch unlocks the door when it is pressed. The REX switch
must unlock the door for a minimum of 30 seconds.

CRC

Passive
infrared
detector

Maglock

Other factors

Request to
exit switch

Power supply
X

Hardware configuration

SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-9: Maglock and peripherals

3.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Hardware configuration
The maglock peripherals consist of the following:

Passive infrared motion detector (PIR)

Request to exit (REX) switch

The PIR is connected via the CRC input circuit. The REX is
connected directly to the maglock instead of the CRC input
circuit to meet NFPA requirements.

SDU programming
When programming the system for this application youll need
to configure the CRC, defining the device type. Youll also need
to define the input circuits. For this application define the input
circuit for the PIR as follows:

Device type = Security interior

Application = Request to exit motion detector.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.29

Access control applications

Multiple card readers

Description of the application
Several access control applications require the use of multiple
card readers. For example:

Visitor and escort readers

High and low position readers

The CRC lets you use multiple card readers of the same
technology or of mixed technologies. It can support up to four
card readers, provided that the total current draw of the readers
does not exceed the limits specified on the CRC installation
sheet.
A visitor and escort application using multiple card readers is
shown in Figure 3-10, below. In this application, both the escort
and visitor must badge in to gain access.
The escort has a permanent, plastic card, and uses the proximity
card reader. The visitor is issued an inexpensive paper bar code
card, and uses the bar code reader.

CRC

Proximity
card
reader

Bar code
card
reader

Proximity
card
reader

Bar code
card
reader

Inside card readers

Outside card readers

Other factors
Power supply
X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-10: Multiple card readers

3.30

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Card reader
This application works best with card readers that support dual
LED control. The CRC uses the second LED (or LED state) to
signal the visitor that the escort must badge in before access is
granted.

Hardware configuration
The proximity card reader and barcode card reader are connected
to the same terminals of the CRC.

SDU programming
When an escorted visitor tries to enter a controlled area without
an employee, the CRC generates an access denied escort event.
You can select a predefined command list that the CPU executes
in response to this event.

ACDB operation
Like employees, visitors must be assigned an access level using
the ACDB. The site security officer can elect to assign the same
access level to all visitor cards, or assign different access levels
to ranges of visitor cards.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.31

Access control applications

Muster
Description of the application
The muster application can be used to determine who has exited
the building in the event of an evacuation.
During normal operations, staff badge in and out using the inside
and outside readers. Note that muster reporting will only work if
all employees badge in and out.
During an evacuation, everyone exits the building immediately
and goes to one of the predetermined muster stations. At the
muster station personnel badge in using a reader that is attached
to a CRC designated as a muster station.
After everyone has badged in at the muster station security staff
use the ACDB program to create a muster report. The report lists
staff who badged into the building but did not badge out at a
muster station.
Figure 3-11 shows a typical muster application. CRCs 2, 3, 5,
and 6 are normal access control CRCs. CRCs 1 and 4 are muster
station CRCs.
The ACDB computer must be located in a safe area so security
staff can create the muster report after the evacuation. This
computer can connect to the access control system either via
telephone lines and a 3-MODCOM, or by direct connection to
the EST3 control panel.
Note: Links between the ACDB computer and the control panel
should be tested regularly to ensure correct operation.

Staff must be made aware of the importance of badging in and

out at all times. Failure to do so can result in a false muster
report, indicating that someone is still in the building. This in
turn can result in rescue personnel risking danger to search for
someone who is not actually in the building.

3.32

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Muster station
Card reader

Entrance
CRC 2

Entrance

CR outside
CR inside

CR outside
CR inside

CRC 3

CRC 1
SAC bus
Control panel
3-SAC
3-PPS/M
MODCOM

CR inside
CR outside

CRC 4

CRC 6

CRC 5

CR inside
CR outside

Emergency
exit

Emergency
exit

Telephone line

Other factors

Muster report
station

Card reader

X Power supply
X Hardware configuration

Muster station

ACDB

X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-11: Muster application

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.33

Access control applications

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module
3-MODCOM Modem Communication module
or
3-RS232 Card option installed in the CPU

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data
lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.
The 3-MODCOM module supports modem communication
between the control panel and the ACDB program via telephone
lines. Alternately, the 3-RS232 Card supports RS-232
communications on a cable connected directly to the CPU.
All CRCs controlled by a muster station must be on the same
3-SAC card as the muster station. Badging out at a muster station
badges the person out of all partitions for that 3-SAC card.
Therefore, a single muster station can serve multiple partitions,
provided that they are on the same 3-SAC card.
The system must have at least one muster CRC per 3-SAC
module. The system cannot exchange muster information
between 3-SAC modules, so each must be handled separately for
muster purposes.
A CRC used for a muster station requires the specified dummy
load on the lock terminals to maintain supervision. (Refer to the
CRC installation sheet for correct resistor values.)
The card reader used for the muster station must be wired as an
outside reader.

SDU programming
Each CRC used in a muster application requires specific
configuration settings. These are made in the SDU program, on
the CRC Configuration tab.
If the CRC is used in a partition that has muster control, check
the Muster Support box.
For the CRC designated as the muster station, check the Muster
Station box, but leave the Muster Support box clear.
In the SDU, you can also assign a predefined command list to
the Access Granted Muster event.

3.34

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Power for continuous locks

Description of the application
By continuous locks, we mean locks that operate, on average,
more than 30 seconds in every minute. Normally, power for the
lock is taken from the CRC battery. However, for continuous
locks there is not enough recharge time for the CRC battery to
keep up with the drain. Consequently, the CRC must be
configured so that an external power supply operates the lock.
The CRC can be powered by the 3-PPS/M, by a CRCXF (CRC
Transformer), or by a remote 24 Vdc power supply. Any of these
supplies is suitable for powering continuous locks. (See the
topics Power from an AC source and Power from a remote
source for more information about these options.)
A typical application using continuous locks is shown in Figure
3-12, below.

Control panel

3-PPS/M

3-SAC

24 Vdc
SAC bus
24 Vdc remote
power supply or
CRCXF
transformer

CRC

Other factors
X Power supply

Card
reader

Strike or
maglock

X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-12: CRC controlling a continuous lock

The figure shows the power coming from the 3-PPS/M in the
control panel. This power supply could be used to operate the

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.35

Access control applications

lock, but use of a CRCXF or remote 24 Vdc supply is

recommended to minimize the load on the panel power supply.
During open schedules, or when an authorized card is read at a
card reader, the CRC provides power from the 3-PPS/M to the
door strike to unlock the door. For maglocks, the CRC provides
power from the 3-PPS/M (or CRCXF or 24 Vdc power supply)
to activate the lock during closed schedules, or between
authorized card accesses.

Power supply
Use power and load calculations to determine the need for
remote power supplies or transformers. Refer to the CRC
Technical Reference Manual for calculation guidelines.
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the
CRC. Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings.
Configure the input power as DC when using power from the
control panel or a remote supply. Configure input power as AC
when using a transformer.
For this application, configure the output power as continuous.

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a
cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.

SDU programming
When configuring the system for this application, youll need to
configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the
SDU. For this application the Lock Type can be either Strike or
Maglock as required to match the lock actually used.

3.36

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Power for intermittent locks

Description of the application
By intermittent locks, we mean locks that operate, on average,
less than 30 seconds in every minute. In these applications, the
CRC battery can provide the power needed to operate the lock.
The CRC can be powered by the 3-PPS/M. It uses this power
source to charge an internal 1.2 Ah sealed lead acid battery. The
battery then provides the power needed to operate the door lock.
Because the battery powers the door strike, this configuration
cannot be used for maglocks or strikes that are active more than
30 seconds in a minute. In these conditions the battery would not
have enough time to charge and keep up with the drain. For
heavy or continuous duty applications, refer to the topic Power
for continuous locks presented in this chapter.
A typical application using CRC battery power is shown in
Figure 3-13, below.

Control panel

3-PPS/M

3-SAC

24 Vdc
SAC bus

CRC

Other factors
X Power supply

Card
reader

X Hardware configuration

Strike

X SDU programming
X

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-13: CRC controlling an intermittent strike

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.37

Access control applications

The figure shows the charging power coming from the 3-PPS/M
in the control panel. The access control system requires a 24 Vdc
power supply to power the CRC and to charge its battery. The
3-SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus.
When an authorized card is read at a card reader, the CRC
provides power from its internal battery to the door strike and
unlocks the door.

Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the
CRC. Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings.
Configure the input power as DC. Configure the output power as
intermittent.

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a
cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.

SDU programming
When configuring the system for this application, youll need to
configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the
SDU. For this application set the Lock Type to Strike.

ACDB operation
Note that a CRC configured and programmed for intermittent
lock use cannot support an open schedule (a period when the
lock is kept open). Such a schedule would quickly drain the CRC
battery and the lock would close.
You should document the CRC configuration and include this in
your project plans. Make a copy of this documentation available
to the site security staff who will use the ADCB to create and
assign schedules.

3.38

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Power from an AC source

Description of the application
By AC power, we mean that the CRC provides the power to
operate the electric door strike or maglock by using a 16.5 Vac
transformer (model CRCXF). This supply can provide
continuous power to the door strike or maglock, and also power
the CRC.
Using an AC source:

Limits power drawn from the control panel

Supports continuous duty locks
Supports schedules with unlock periods

Note: Be sure to check the installation sheet for the CRC and
CRCXMCard Reader Controller Installation Sheet (P/N
387625) for a list of applications that prohibit the use of the
CRCXF.

A typical CRC using AC power is shown in Figure 3-14.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.39

Access control applications

Control panel
3-PPS/M
3-SAC

SAC bus

24 Vdc connects to
CRC terminals, but
bypasses CRC
internally
Passive
infrared
detector

CRCXF
Transformer

CRC

Card
reader

Maglock
or strike
Other factors
X

Power supply

Hardware configuration

SDU programming

Request to
exit button

ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-14: CRC using AC power

The figure above shows the CRC power coming from the 16.5
Vac transformer. The 3-PPS/M power supply coming from the
control panel simply passes through the CRC. The 3-SAC
connects to the CRC through the SAC bus.
This wiring is shown in Figure 3-15.

3.40

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Control panel

CRCXF
Transformer
(16.5 Vac)

Power supply
CRC

CRC

CRC

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Figure 3-15: Wiring details for transformer supply

Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the
CRC. Configure the input power as AC. Configure the output
power as continuous.
If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF,
that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must
have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit
ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data
lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires. In this case
the power from the 3-PPS/M is connected to the CRC terminals,
but internally bypassed.
The 16.5 Vac transformer should be plugged into a continuously
energized AC socket, not one controlled by a switch.

SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, youll need
to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the
SDU. This can be either a strike or maglock.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.41

Access control applications

Power from a remote source

Description of the application
By remote power, we mean that the CRC provides the power to
operate the electronic door strike or maglock by using a remote
DC power supply. This additional power can provide continuous
power to the door strike or maglock.
A typical CRC using remote power is shown in Figure 3-16. The
additional power is needed because the CRC battery can not
keep up with the power needs of maglocks or strikes with an
active duty cycle greater than 30 seconds in a minute. In these
conditions the battery does not have enough time to charge and
keep up with the drain.
The figure shows power coming from the additional remote
power supply to power the CRC and maglock. The supply is
supervised by the Signature data circuit derived from the 3SSDC(1) module. The 3-SAC connects to the CRC through the
SAC bus.

3.42

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Control panel
3-PPS/M
SAC bus
3-SAC
+24 Vdc bypasses CRC

Signature
Controller

Passive
infrared
detector
Remote
power
supply
24 Vdc

CRC

Card
reader

Maglock
or strike

SIGA loop monitors remote

power supply

Request to
exit button

Other factors
X Power supply
X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-16: CRC using remote power

The negative side of the 3-PPS/M power supply coming from the
control panel connects to the CRC (and to all other CRCs). The
positive side is broken and the remote power supply picks up the
load. This wiring is shown in Figure 3-17.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.43

Access control applications

Control panel

Remote
power supply
24 Vdc

Power supply
CRC

CRC

CRC

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

Figure 3-17: Wiring for remote power supply

Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the
CRC. Configure the input power as DC. Configure the output
power as continuous.
Note that additional power supplies must be listed for fire alarm
applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and
must have a circuit ground that is isolated from earth ground.

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3-SSDC(1) Single Signature Controller module

3-SAC Security Access Control module
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The 3-SSDC(1) module supports the SIGA loop, which

supervises the remote power supply
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data
lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires. In this case
the power from the 3-PPS/M is simply passed through the CRC.
The remote power supply is supervised by the 3-SSDC(1)
module via the Signature loop. The remote power supply must
share a common ground with the 3-PPS/M.

SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, youll need
to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the
SDU. This can be either a strike or maglock.

3.44

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Remote controls
Description of the application
In any access control system, a card reader and CRC can be used
to operate devices that are completely remote from the CRC. In
such cases the CRC simply creates an access event and passes it
to the 3-SAC for processing by the CPU. Any device that can be
controlled by an EST3 panel can be operated in response to an
access event.
As a typical example, Figure 3-18 shows how the entrance
devices to a secured parking area could be operated from a
remote card reader. Note that any type of CRC input device
could be used in place of a card reader.

Control panel
3-SAC
CPU

Command lists

Signature
controller

SAC bus
Card
reader

CRC

Signature
relay

Gate opener

Signature
relay

VCR

Signature
relay

Spotlight

Signature data circuit

Other factors
X Power supply
Hardware configuration

CRCXF

X SDU programming
ACDB/KDC operation

Figure 3-18: Remote control of a parking garage entrance

When the cardholder badges in, the access event is sent from the
CRC to the 3-SAC and then to the CPU. At the CPU, the access
event activates a predefined command list.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.45

Access control applications

The command list operates the Signature relays on the Signature

data circuit supported by the Signature controller module. These
relays activate the gate opener, a spotlight, and a VCR image
recording system.
An inside card reader and could be used to control exits from the
area, but it would be more appropriate to use a motion detector,
since egress from the area is not controlled.

Power supply
A CRCXFCRC Transformer power supply is shown,
assuming that the CRC is be located at some distance from the
electrical room and control panel.
If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF,
that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must
have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit
ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.

SDU programming
The SDU programmer must create a command list that specifies
activation of the correct relays and devices, the delays required,
and the deactivation of the devices.
Since there is no restoration phase of access events, the
command list should include commands that turn off the devices.

3.46

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

Two-person rule
Description of the application
A two-person rule ensures that no staff member can be in a
controlled area alone. A CRC operating under two-person rule
prevents the entrance of a single person into the controlled area.
When two people are present in the area, one cannot exit without
the other.
The controlled area can have a single entrance or multiple
entrances. The network coordinates user information between the
CRCs that serve a common area.
A typical two-person rule application is shown in Figure 3-19,
below.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.47

Access control applications

Control panel
3-SAC
SAC bus

3-PPS/M

Entrance 1

CR outside

CRC 1

CR inside

Controlled room

CR inside
CR outside

CRC 2
Entrance 2

Other factors
X Power supply
X Hardware configuration
X SDU programming
X ACDB/KDC programming

Figure 3-19: Two-person rule

Card reader
This application works best with card readers that support dual
LED control. The CRC uses the second LED (or LED state) to
signal the cardholder that a second person must badge in or out
of the controlled area.

Hardware configuration
The control panel must contain the following rail modules:

3.48

3-SAC Security Access Control module

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Access control applications

The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is
normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data
lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.

SDU programming
If the CRC is to be used for two-person rule it must be
configured in the SDU. On the CRC Configuration tab, the 2
Person Rule box must be checked.
You can also assign a predefined command list to the Access
Denied 2 Person Timeout event. This setting is found on the
CRC Command Lists tab.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

3.49

Access control applications

3.50

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 4

Centralized audio applications

Summary

EST3 supports centralized audio. This chapter introduces you to

the equipment required, and discusses special installation and
backup considerations for centralized audio applications.
Refer to the manual entitled EST3 Installation Sheets for specific
component settings and terminal connections.
Content
Equipment required 4.2
ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4.3
Overview 4.3
Equipment racks 4.3
ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.6
Battery backup 4.7
Audio amplifiers 4.8
URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10
Application 4.10
Installation 4.11
Terminal connections 4.11
Operation 4.11
ATP installation 4.13
ATP wiring 4.14
ATP terminal connections 4.14
ATP jumper settings 4.15
3-ATPINT terminal connections 4.15
3-ATPINT jumper settings 4.16
ATP external battery charger 4.20
Amplifier backup 4.22
Branch speaker wiring 4.25
Troubleshooting 4.27

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.1

Centralized audio applications

Equipment required
The EST3 system requires one 3-ZA20 amplifier for each audio
channel to be operated simultaneously. The output of each
amplifier is reduced from 25 Vrms to the appropriate input level
(1 Vrms) using the 3-ATPINT interface, and then fed into the
input of the banked amplifiers.
The wiring between the output of each 3-ZA20 and its associated
amplifier bank input should be twisted, shielded pair, and can be
configured for Class A or Class B integrity monitoring.
The output of the banked amplifiers (the audio riser) is directed
to the appropriate areas using Signature Series modules. The
SIGA-CC1 module, Figure 4-16, is used for single channel
systems and the SIGA-CC2 module, Figure 4-17, is used for two
channel systems.
EST3 audio system programming requires that the Signature
modules controlling the audio signals be programmed in addition
to the programming required for the 3-ZAxx amplifier(s)
supplying the audio signal.
Note: Remember to follow power-limited or nonpower-limited
wiring practices as determined by the amplifier providing the
audio signal.

4.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet

Overview
The Amplifier Terminal Panel (ATP), the 3-ATPINT Interface,
RKU series enclosures, and Dukane 125 W or 250 W audio
power amplifiers are the basic components of the Amplifier
Terminal Panel Cabinet (ATPC). Appropriately sized standby
batteries, and in some situations an external battery charger,
round out the equipment required in the ATPC. The ATPC can
be located up to 3,000 ft (914 m) from the 3-ZAxx amplifiers
supplying the audio signals.

Equipment racks
RKU-Series Equipment Racks are designed to support standard
19 in (48.26 cm) wide rack-mount components. These UL listed
enclosures are constructed of 16 gauge steel, and finished in
either white or black enamel.
Interior-facing louvers on the two side panels and the back door
provide ventilation for installed equipment, while maintaining a
flush outside surface for side-by-side stacking of multiple racks.
Six conduit knockouts for 1/2 in or 3/4 in conduit are available
on the top end panel (three on top, three on the flange), and six
on the bottom end panel (three on the bottom and three on the
flange). Three 2.875 in (7.3 cm) diameter cable access holes are
located on the bottom end panel for routing wiring to cabinet
components. The equipment mounting rails on the front of the
rack are recessed 0.625 in (1.59 cm).
The louvered back door attaches to the cabinet with spring
hinges allowing easy field access and door removal. A key lock
is provided on the door for added security. Multiple racks can be
installed side by side where additional cabinet capacity is
required.
The RKU series of 19 in (48.3 cm) equipment racks is used to
house the banked amplifiers and associated equipment. Five
sizes of racks are available to meet all requirements. These are
listed in Table 4, below.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.3

Centralized audio applications

Table 4-1: RKU enclosure specifications

Model

Width

Height

Depth

Rack Space

RKU-36(B)

22.31 in
(56.7 cm)

41.06 in
(104.3 cm)

18.50 in
(47.0 cm)

36.75 in
(93.3 cm)

RKU-42(B)

22.31 in
(56.7 cm)

46.31in
(117.6 cm)

18.50 in
(47.0 cm)

42.00 in
(106.7 cm)

RKU-61(B)

22.31 in
(56.7 cm)

65.56 in
(166.5 cm)

18.50 in
(47.0 cm)

61.25 In
(155.6 cm)

RKU-70(B)

22.31 in
(56.7 cm)

74.31in
(188.7 cm)

18.50 in
(47.0 cm)

70.00 in
(177.8 cm)

RKU-77(B)

22.31 in
(56.7 cm)

81.31 in
(206.5 cm)

18.50 in
(47.0 cm)

77.00 in
(195.6 cm)

4.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Figure 4-1: RKU Equipment Rack

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.5

Centralized audio applications

ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel

Figure 4-2: 3-ATP, front view

The Amplifier Terminal Panel, is a 5-1/4 inches (13.34 cm) high x

19 inches (48.3 cm) wide unit that senses loss of AC power or
brownout conditions affecting the amplifiers. It also provides
battery backup to the amplifiers if the audio system is active when
the power failure or brownout occurs. The ATP must have a 3ATPINT interface Card installed in order to work with the EST3
system.
+

S
PRE-AMP 1

PREAMP 1
70V 25V

IN

OUT RISER

OUT PRE-AMP

IN

OUT RISER

OUT PRE-AMP

1 P1
PREAMP 2
70V 25V
1 P2

PRE-AMP 2

S
[3atpint3.c dr]

Figure 4-3: 3-ATPINT Interface Card

The ATP with 3-ATPINT installed, is mounted in an RKU rack

and provides termination for the power amplifiers audio power
and control signals. The panel has an integral battery charger
capable of charging a maximum of 40 Ah sealed, lead-acid
batteries. The charger is fully supervised and provides a
silenceable trouble buzzer and trouble contacts. One ATP is
required for every two amplifiers.
When a brownout condition is sensed at the ATP, the trouble
contacts and AC fail contacts are closed, and an EST3 supervisory
zone reports the condition to the EST3 system. The EST3 system
is designed to provide +24 Vdc to the ATPs audio activity input
via control relay, enabling backup power only when both primary

4.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

power to the amplifiers has failed and the EST3 audio is active
during an alarm condition.

Battery backup
To charge the batteries, you will use either the ATPs integral
battery charger or an external LaMarche model A33-10-24 battery
charger.
The internal battery charger is capable of charging 40 Ah batteries.
Caution: Do not connect the battery chargers of multiple ATPs

in parallel to increase charger current.

When multiple ATPs share a common battery, or when the
amplifier backup is to be supplied from a single battery source, a
LaMarche model A33-10-24 external battery charger must be
used. The Amplifier Terminal Panel switches battery power to the
amplifiers.
When calculating the battery size required to support the
amplifiers, the alarm current must be known. Each 250 W
amplifier connected to the system draws 20 amperes at 24 Vdc at
full load; 125 W amplifiers draw 10 amperes at 24 Vdc at full
load.
The amplifiers draw no current in the standby mode. NFPA 72
specifies that designing the system to provide 15 minutes of the
evacuation alarm at full load is the equivalent of 2 hours of
emergency operation. The local authority having jurisdiction or
local codes can modify the amount of time for which standby
power must be provided.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.7

Centralized audio applications

Audio amplifiers
Two Dukane amplifiers are available. Model 1B3125 is rated at
125 watts output. Model 1B3250 is rated at 250 watts output.
Both amplifiers operate from 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, as well as 24
Vdc battery backup. The amplifiers are mounted in an Amplifier
Terminal Panel Cabinet.
Note: The Model 1B3250 amplifier should be loaded to no more
than 72% of rated capacity. The amp is derated by 28% to allow
for continuous operation and line loss averages.

Two F ifty

THERMAL
OVERLOAD

POWER

[C1B3250X.CDR]

Figure 4-4: Dukane 250-watt Amplifier, Front View

Table 4-2: 1B3125 Amplifier specifications

Rated output power

125 W

Max. signal input

1 Vrms

Input impedance

75 k

Output voltage

25 or 70 Vrms

Primary power

120 Vac, 60 Hz

Battery power

24 Vdc

AC power consumption
standby
full load

27 W
360 W

DC power consumption
standby
full load

0 W (when using the ATP)

11.5 A

Dimensions (HWD)

5.25 x 19.0 x 6.625 in

(13.3 x 48.3 x 16.8 cm)

Weight

22.5 lb (10.1 kg)

Table 4-3: 1B3250 Amplifier specifications

4.8

Rated output power

250 W (180 W max. loaded)

Max. signal input

1 Vrms

Input impedance

75 k

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Table 4-3: 1B3250 Amplifier specifications

Output voltage

25 or 70 Vrms

Primary power

120 Vac, 60 Hz

Battery power

24 Vdc

AC power consumption
standby
full load

48 W
700 W

DC power consumption
standby
full load

0 W (when using the ATP)

20 A

Dimensions (HWD)

8.5 x 19 x 15 in
(21.6 x 48.3 x 38.1 cm)

Weight

55 lb (24.9 kg)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.9

Centralized audio applications

URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module

The Universal Riser Supervisory Module (URSM) provides open
and short circuit, and amplifier supervision of two risers, audio
(25 or 70 Vrms), and/or firefighter telephone riser. A form C dry
relay contact is provided for each riser circuits trouble
annunciation. Ground fault detection is also provided for the
risers using a GFD Ground Fault Detector.

Figure 4-5: URSM

Application
The URSM is required on 70 Vrms audio system risers, and 25
Vrms audio systems. The URSM should be located in an
equipment cabinet convenient to the end of the risers, which has
24 Vdc power available. URSM trouble contacts should be
monitored with a SIGA-CT2 module to signal riser trouble
information back to the network.
The URSM riser inputs should be connected to a GFD, which
provides ground fault monitoring. The GFD should be monitored
with a SIGA-CT1 module to signal riser ground fault conditions
back to the network. The GFD and SIGA-CT1 must be installed
in the same enclosure and should be located adjacent to the fire
alarm control panel.
Table 4-4: URSM specifications

4.10

Voltage

24 Vdc

Standby Current

40 mA

Trouble Contact Rating

30 Vdc @ 2A

Trouble Detection Levels

25 Vrms audio
70 Vrms audio
Firefighters phone

10 Vrms
23 Vrms
2.7 Vrms

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Installation
The URSM requires one-half of a standard mounting footprint
and should be installed where the power pigtails can reach the
power supply.
The GFD and CT1 must be installed in the same enclosure,
located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. Jumper JP1 on
the GFD should be set to the 2-3 position.

Terminal connections
Refer to Figure 4-6.
Black pigtail = (-)24 Vdc power in
Red pigtail = (+)24 Vdc power in
TB11 to 3 = Channel 2, trouble relay contacts
TB14 to 6 = Channel 1, trouble relay contacts
TB17 = Channel 2, 70 Vrms audio riser input
TB18 = Channel 2, 25 Vrms audio riser input
TB19 = Firefighters Telephone riser input, Ch 2
TB110 = Channel 2, Riser input, common
TB111 = Channel 1, 70 Vrms audio riser input
TB112 = Channel 1, 25 Vrms audio riser input
TB113 = Firefighters Telephone riser input, Ch 1
TB114 = Channel 1, Riser input, common

Operation
The trouble relay will activate 4560 seconds after a circuit
short, circuit open, or amplifier failure is detected.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.11

Centralized audio applications

++
16 15 14 13

IN
OUT
Circuit pair 1

GFD

+ +
3-2-1
JP1

IN
OUT
Circuit pair 2

LED1 LED2

Earth
Power
GND
8

12 11 10

TB2

Trouble/GF Contacts
NC COM NO

8 7

SIGA-CT1

To earth
ground
Polarity is not
important
From UL/ULC
listed 24 VDC
fire alarm panel

4 3 2 1
UL/ULC listed
47 K ohm EOL

TB1

Data in (+)
From signature ()
controller or
previous device

(+) Data out

() To next device
Audio risers from
banked apmplifiers

UL/ULC listed
47 K ohm EOL

[2] [3]

URSM
G

10

11

12

13

14

CONT 5A RES.240AC

URSM
130102

1725S DC 24V
A410-367396-13
JAPAN 692NA

TB1

CONT 5A RES.240AC

CHANNEL 2
TROUBLE

CHANNEL 1
TROUBLE

1725S DC 24V
A410-367396-13
JAPAN 692NA

TELEPHONE
25V AUDIO
70V AUDIO
CHANNEL 2

[1] [2]
TB2

[3] Nonpower-limited
4. The GFD and CT1 must
be installed in the same
enclosure
5. Jumper J1 on the GFD
should be set to the
2-3 position

SIGA-CT2

Black
Red

4 3 2 1
TB1

[2]

[1] [2]
Data in

Wiring notes
[1] Supervised
[2] Power limited

8 7 6 5

TELEPHONE
25V AUDIO
70V AUDIO
CHANNEL 1

(+)

(+)

()

()

Data out

To next device

Figure 4-6: URSM wiring

4.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

ATP and 3-ATPINT installation

ATP installation
Refer to Figure 4-7.
To install the ATP:

1. Remove the cover plate from the left side of the ATP. The
cover plate is held in place by four screws.
2. Install four short spacers [5] in the flanges of the card cage,
and secure with nuts [6].
3. Mount the 3-ATPINT board [4] on the four short spacers [5]
and secure with four long spacers [3].
4. Install the new cover plate [2] on the long spacers with the
screws [1] provided.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

[3atpint2.cdr]

Figure 4-7: 3-ATPINT installation, bottom view

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.13

Centralized audio applications

ATP wiring
Do Not Use
+

AMPLIFIER TERMINAL PANEL (ATP) P/N 240068

+

TB1

S +

IN

OUT
PREAMP # 1

IN

OUT RISER

OUT PRE-AMP

Removable 3-AT
Cover
PINT

P1

IN

OUT RISER

S +

OUT
IN
PWR AMP # 1

WARNING

TB4

BATT.
OUT

FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION

AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
TYPE 8 RATING FUSE.

120 VAC OUT

POWER PANEL ACTIVITY
FAIL TRBL

OUT PRE-AMP

WARNING
PRE-AMP 2
IMPROPE
R
CONNECT
ION
OF T-ERMINALS
+
S
+
S +
S
WILL RESULTIN A FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY

OUT

S +

TB3

PREAMP 2
70V 25V
1 P2

S +

AMP # 1

PRE-AMP 1
PREAMP 1
70V 25V

S +

IN

TB2
+

PREAMP # 2
OUT
S +

S +

N
G

FUSE
TB5

PWR AMP # 2
IN
OUT
S +

3AB-20A

BATT. IN
24 VDC
40AH MAX.

AMP # 2

OUT

120VAC
60HZ
10A MAX.

S +

BATT.
OUT
S +

+
[3atpint1.c dr]

Do Not Use
Figure 4-8: ATP with 3-ATPINT installed, rear view

ATP terminal connections

AMP POWER 1 = Type NEMA 515p receptacle to plug in one
amplifier. Output is rated at 120 Vac, 5 A max.
AMP POWER 2 = Type NEMA 515p receptacle to plug in one
amplifier. Output is rated at 120Vac 5 A max.
BATT IN - These terminals are for connection of gel cell batteries.
When the internal battery charger is enabled (J3 on the APSB
terminal board installed) a maximum of 40 Ah of gel cell batteries
can be charged.
POWER FAIL - Normally open that activates when primary
power to the amplifiers is either lost or in brownout condition.
This contact is to be supervised by Signature series input module
configured as a supervisory input.
PANEL TROUBLE - Normally open relay contacts that close
when any of the following power problems are sensed:

Loss of 24 Vdc power

Failure of the battery charger circuit (if enabled)
Any blown fuse or circuit breaker
Ground fault, if enabled

ACTIVITY = 24 Vdc should be provided to these terminals

through SIGA-CR contacts when either an alarm is present in the
system or when the system user activates the paging system.
When this input is active and the amplifier is in power fail, power
relay contacts will transfer and provide battery power to the
terminals marked BATT OUT. Each battery output terminal is
capable of providing 20 A of battery current.

4.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

In addition to the terminals listed above, two groups of terminals

are provided for connection of audio signals, one for each channel
WARNING: Do

not use the preamp in and out terminals on the

main body of the ATP if the 3-ATPINT Interface is installed.
Route all preamp wiring to the 3-ATPINT.
The following terminals are provided on the ATP for audio
channel 1 and channel 2.
PREAMP IN = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal
connections.
PREAMP OUT = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal
connections.
PREAMP OUT = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal
connections.
AMP IN = From the 70 V or the 25 V output of the power
amplifier.
AMP OUT = to be connected to the Signature Series control
modules and terminated with a URSM Universal Riser
Supervisory Module. The URSM must be monitored by a
Signature Series input module configured as a supervisory circuit.
Each riser cannot supply a load greater than 180 W.

ATP jumper settings

Refer to Figure 4-9.
Table 4-5: 3-ATP Jumper Settings
Function

Jumper Setting

Ground fault detection

J1 = enable

No ground fault detection

J1 = disable

Internal battery charger operable

J2 = in

Internal battery charger disabled

J3 = in

3-ATPINT terminal connections

Refer to Figure 4-9.
IN RISER = To audio source amplifier 25 or 70 Vrms output, or
previous 3-ATPINT riser output.
OUT RISER = 25 or 70 Vrms output to next 3-ATPINT IN
RISER or EOL resistor.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.15

Centralized audio applications

OUT PRE-AMP = Low level audio to audio power amplifier

input.

3-ATPINT jumper settings

Refer to Figure 4-9.
Table 4-6: 3-ATPINT jumper settings

4.16

Input / Voltage

Jumper setting

Pre-Amp #1, 70 Vrms

P1 = 1/2

Pre-Amp #1, 25 Vrms

P1 = 2/3

Pre-Amp #2, 70 Vrms

P2 = 1/2

Pre-Amp #2, 25 Vrms

P1 = 2/3

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

15K EOL

15K EOL

10

To TB1 on Audio Amplifier

15K EOL

10

To TB1 on Audio Amplifier

15K EOL

10

To TB1 on Audio Amplifier

10

To TB1 on Audio Amplifier

TB1

AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
MODULE

AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
MODULE

AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
MODULE

AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
MODULE

(Riser 1)

(Riser 2)

(Riser 3)

To TB2 on Audio Amplifier

To TB2 on Audio Amplifier

To TB2 on Audio Amplifier

(BACKUP)
TB2

To TB2 on Audio Amplifier

10

10

10

10

Shield,
if used

Field wiring identical

to riser #1

Field wiring identical

to riser #1

[3AMPCON1.CDR]

Shield,
if used

Class A circuits Only

Audio Riser
Output
2 4

UL/ULC Listed 15K EOL

ON LAST ATP ONLY

From Power
Amp Output

(For Class B circuits Only)

To Power
Amp Audio
Input

2 3

Do Not Use

2 3
+

AMPLIFIER TERMINAL PANEL (ATP) P/N 240068

+

TB1

S +

IN

OUT
PREAMP # 1

IN

OUT RISER

OUT PRE-AMP

S +

OUT
IN
PWR AMP # 1

WARNING

TB4

BATT.
OUT

FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION

AGAINSTTHE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
TYPE 8 RATING FUSE.

IN

OUT RISER

POWER PANEL ACTIVITY

FAIL TRBL

OUT PRE-AMP

IN
+

Input #2 wired identical to Input #1

PREAMP # 2
OUT
S +

S +

PWR AMP # 2
IN
OUT
S +

3AB-20A
FUSE
TB5

AMP # 2

OUT

BATT. IN
24 VDC
40AH MAX.

PRE-AMP 2

IMPROPER CONNECTION OF TERMINALS

+
S
+
S +
S
[3atpint3.cdr]
WILL RESULT IN A FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY
TB2

120VAC
60HZ
10A MAX.

120 VAC OUT

PREAMP 2
70V 25V
1 P2

OUT

S +

TB3

1 P1

S +

AMP # 1

PRE-AMP 1
PREAMP 1
70V 25V

S +

S +

BATT.
OUT

S +
[3AMPCON1.CDR]

Do Not Use

Wiring Notes

JUMPER SETTINGS
P1 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #1 Input 70 VRMS
P1 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #1 Input 25 VRMS
P2 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #2 Input 70 VRMS
P2 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #2 Input 25 VRMS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5

Circuit polarity shown in supervisory condition.

Supervised circuit.
Power limited circuit.
Non-Power limited circuit.
Back up amplifier size must equal the wattage of the largest
amplifier to be backed up.
6. Set J1 & J2 to match source amplifier output voltage.
7. Additional ATPs may be connected to the same audio source by
connecting the ATP pre-amp output to the pre-amp input of the
next ATP.

Figure 4-9: ATP with 3-ATPINT wiring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.17

Centralized audio applications

FUSE 25A

LEVEL ADJUST

70.7 V
25 V
25 V
CT
8 OHM
OUTPUT
COM

BRIDGING
INPUT
COM

FUSE 6.25A SB

EARTH

24 VDC

120VAC
60HZ

N/C

TO ATP
POWER RECEPTACLE

AUDIO
RISER
OUT

Do Not Use
+

AMPLIFIER TERMINAL PANEL (ATP) P/N 240068

+

TB1

S +
IN

OUT
PREAMP # 1

OUT RISER

IN

OUT PRE-AMP

3-ATPINT

PREAMP 2
70V 25V
1 P2

IN

OUT RISER

OUT

S +

S +

OUT
IN
PWR AMP # 1

WARNING

BATT.
OUT

POWER PANEL ACTIVITY

FAIL TRBL

OUT PRE-AMP

120VAC
60HZ
10A MAX.

3AB-20A

IN

TB2
+

PREAMP # 2
OUT
S +

S +

Do Not Use

TB5

PWR AMP # 2
IN
OUT
S +

BATT. IN
24 VDC
40AH MAX.

AMP # 2

OUT

FUSE

120 VAC OUT

PRE-AMP 2

TB4

FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION

AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE,
REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
TYPE 8 RATING FUSE.

TB3

1 P1

S +

AMP # 1

PRE-AMP 1
PREAMP 1
70V 25V

S +

S +

BATT.
OUT
S +

+
[3ATPINT6.CDR]

Figure 4-10: Wiring from Dukane amplifier to ATP

4.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Figure 4-11: Power supply terminal card, with 3-ATPINT, cover removed

The output of the amplifier must be set for the proper value by
adjusting the INPUT LEVEL adjustment on the back of the
amplifier. With a 1,000 Hz tone generated by the 3-ACPor 3ZA20, the amplifier must be adjusted for 70 Vrms output using
the appropriate RMS voltmeter.
FUSE 25A

LEVEL ADJUST

70.7 V
25 V
25 V
CT
8 OHM
OUTPUT
COM

BRIDGING
INPUT
COM

FUSE 6.25A SB

EARTH
24 VDC

120VAC
60HZ

N/C

Figure 4-12: Dukane amplifier, rear view

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.19

Centralized audio applications

ATP external battery charger

When multiple ATPs are connected to a common battery set,
disable the ATP internal battery charger, by installing J3 and
removing J2 on the APSB terminal board. This is located in the
ATP. (see Figure 4-11). Use a La Marche model A33-10-24
external battery charger, which can charge up to 160-Ah batteries,
as shown in Figure 4-13.

4.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

UL/ULC Listed
47 K Ohm EOL

ATP

BATTERY
INPUT

120 VAC

J3
CHARGER
DISABLE

PANEL
TROUBLE

ATP

BATTERY
INPUT

120 VAC

J3
CHARGER
DISABLE

PANEL
TROUBLE

120 VAC

BATTERY
CHARGER
AA33-10-24

LOAD

BATTERY TRBL
[3ATPXBCW.CDR]

24 VDC 160 AH MAX.

1

1 Supervised

2 Power Limited

8 7

3 Not Power Limited

NOTE: THE A33-10-24

MUSTBE INSTALLED IN
THE SAME ENCLOSURE
AS THE ATP.

SIGA-CT1
Single Input Module
(Personality Code 3)
4

3 2 1

DATA IN (+)

DATA OUT(+)

DATA IN (-)
From Signature Controller
or Previous Device

DATA OUT(-)
To Next Device

Figure 4-13: ATP external battery charger wiring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.21

Centralized audio applications

Amplifier backup
Various methods are available to provide a spare amplifier in the
event that a primary amplifier fails. Depending upon the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction, a single backup amplifier can be
required for each primary amplifier or a single backup per bank of
amplifiers.

4.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

SIGA-CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES
(Personality Code 3)
DEFINED AS MONITOR DEVICE TYPE
'AMP1_FAIL' 'AMP2_FAIL'
MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE
TO NETWORK CONTROLLER

'AMP3_FAIL'

7 6 5

7 6 5

7 6 5

3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

URSM

URSM

URSM

3 AUDIO RISER,180 WATT MAXIMUM PER RISER

1
RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE

ARA-1 RELAY

EOL

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 1 FAILURE

PRE-AMP OUT IN
OUT 1
AMP 1
IN
RISER 1
OUT
3-ATPINT

7 6 5

3 2 1

'AMP1_BKUP'

ATP 1

AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 1
AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 2

IN
ACT
RISER 2
OUT PRE-AMP AMP 2
OUT 2
OUT IN

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

ARA-1 RELAY

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 2 FAILURE

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

+24VDC
4

7 6 5

3 2 1

'AMP2_BKUP'

7 6 5

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

3 2 1

'ATP1_ACT'

ARA-1 RELAY

PRE-AMP OUT IN
OUT 3
AMP 3
IN
RISER 1
OUT
3-ATPINT

ATP 2

IN
ACT
RISER 2
OUT PRE-AMP AMP 4
OUT 4
OUT IN

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 3 FAILURE
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

'AMP3_BKUP'
AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 3

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 4

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

+24VDC

'ATP2_ACT'
BACKUP RISER

FROM 3-ZAxx

'AMP1_PRI'

1 Supervised

2 Power Limited
3 Not Power Limited
(3ATPINT5.CDR)

Figure 4-14: Amplifier bank with spare amplifier

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.23

Centralized audio applications

SIGA-CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES
(Personality Code 3)
DEFINED AS MONITOR DEVICE TYPE
'AMP1_FAIL' 'AMP2_FAIL' 'AMP3_FAIL' 'AMP4_FAIL'
MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE
TO NETWORK CONTROLLER

7 6 5

7 6 5

7 6 5

7 6 5

3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

URSM
CH1

URSM
CH2

URSM
CH1

URSM
CH2

3 AUDIO RISER,180 WATT MAXIMUM PER RISER

RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE

ARA-1 RELAY

PRE-AMP OUT IN
OUT 1
AMP 1

EOL
EOL

IN
RISER 1
OUT
3-ATPINT

ATP 1

IN
ACT
RISER 2
OUT PRE-AMP AMP 2
OUT 2
OUT IN

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 1 FAILURE
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

'AMP1_BKUP'
AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 1

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 2

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

+24VDC
'ATP1_ACT'
ARA-1 RELAY

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 2 FAILURE

7 6 5

3 2 1

'AMP2_BKUP'
ARA-1 RELAY

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 3 FAILURE

PRE-AMP OUT IN
OUT 3
AMP 3

IN
RISER 1
OUT
3-ATPINT

ATP 2

IN
ACT
RISER 2
OUT PRE-AMP AMP 4
OUT 4
OUT IN

'AMP3_BKUP'
AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 3

7 6 5

3 2 1

AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER 4
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

+24VDC

'ATP2_ACT'
ARA-1 RELAY

RELAY ACTIVATES ON
AMP 4 FAILURE

BACKUP RISER

'AMP4_BKUP'

ATP 3

IN
ACT
RISER 2
OUT PRE-AMP AMP 6
OUT 6
OUT IN

ARA-1 RELAY

7 6 5

3 2 1

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

PRE-AMP OUT IN
OUT 5
AMP 5

IN
RISER 1
OUT
3-ATPINT

AUDIO POWER
SPARE AMP

SIGA-CR DEFINED AS
NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

+24VDC

'ATP3_ACT'
RELAY ACTIVATES IF
AMP 2 OR AMP 4 FAILS

1 Supervised

2 Power Limited
8

7 6 5

3 2 1

3 Not Power Limited

'AMP24_BKUP'
(3ATPINT4.CDR)
FROM 3-ZAxx #1

'AMP1_PRI'

FROM 3-ZAxx #2

'AMP2_PRI'

Figure 4-15: One spare amplifier in dual channel system

4.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Branch speaker wiring

Signature modules are used to connect individual floor branch
speaker circuits to the main riser. Single channel branch speaker
circuits can be wired as Class A (Style Z) using the SIGA-UM
module. Class B (Style Y) circuit configuration can be
accomplished using either the SIGA-UM or SIGA-CC2 modules.
The branch speaker circuits of two channels can be wired as
Class B (style Y) circuits using the SIGA-CC2 module.

Typical
Speaker
Circuit:
Style Y (Class B)

TB3
10 9

TB2

TB1

UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL

[3bwire1.cdr]

4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5

RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or

URSM Suprvisory
RISER OUT (-)
Module

From ATP
RISER IN (+)
RISER IN (-)
DATA IN (+)
DATA IN (-)
From Signature Controller
or Previous Device

DATA OUT (+)

DATA OUT (-)

To Next Device

Figure 4-16: Single channel Class B wiring, SIGA-CC1 Module

From ATP

UL/ULC
Listed
47K EOL

Typical
Speaker
Circuit:

CH2 (INPUT 2)
RISER IN (+)
CH2 (INPUT 2)
RISER IN (-)

Style Y (Class B)
CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER OUT (-) To Next Device or

URSM Supervisory

CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER OUT (+) Module

TB4

TB3

8 7

TB2

6 5

10 9

4 3

2 1

TB1

[3bwire2.cdr]

14 13 12 11

CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or

From ATP
CH1 (INPUT 1)
RISER IN (+)
CH1 (INPUT 1)
RISER IN (-)

URSM Supervisory

CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (-) Module

DATA IN (+)

DATA OUT (+)

DATA IN (-)
From Signature Controller
or Previous Device

DATA OUT (-)

To Next Device

Figure 4-17: Two channel Class B wiring, SIGA-CC2 Module

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.25

Centralized audio applications

Typical
Speaker
Circuit:

Style Y (Class B)

Style Z (Class A)
Only

+
TB3

JP1
16 15 14 13

8 7

TB2
From ATP
CH1 (INPUT 1)
RISER IN (+)
CH1 (INPUT 1)
RISER IN (-)

6 5

12 11 10 9

4 3

2 1

TB1

[3bwire3.cdr]

TB4

UL/ULC
Listed
47K EOL
(Class B Only)

CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or

URSM Supervisory
CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (-) Module

DATA IN (+)

DATA OUT (+)

DATA IN (-)
From Signature Controller
or Previous Device

DATA OUT (-)

To Next Device

Figure 4-18: Single channel Class A wiring, SIGA-UM Module

4.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Centralized audio applications

Troubleshooting
The ATP senses loss of AC power or brownout conditions
affecting the amplifiers. It also provides battery backup to the
amplifiers if the audio system is active when the power failure or
brownout occurs. The ATP must have a 3-ATPINT interface Card
installed in order to work with the EST3 system.
The ATP enters a trouble state if any of the following events
occur:

ATP brownout or loss of AC power

Low battery charge or missing battery (with J2 enabled)
Ground fault (if ground fault detection J1 is enabled)
Fuse failure

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

4.27

Centralized audio applications

4.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 5

Installation
Summary

This chapter provides installation information for system

components and applications that supplements the instructions
provided on individual component installation sheets.
Content
Installation overview 5.3
Electrostatic discharge precaution 5.3
Energized system precaution 5.3
Circuit compatibility 5.3
Recommended cable manufacturers 5.4
UL 864 NAC signal synchronization 5.6
Requirements 5.6
Typical circuits 5.8
Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5.16
System installation sequence 5.18
Preliminary field wiring testing 5.19
Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks 5.22
ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5.23
Local rail module installation 5.24
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5.26
Features 5.26
Functions 5.27
Equipment 5.28
Configuration options 5.29
Failover operation 5.30
Compatibility 5.32
Transmission protocols 5.32
Transmission process 5.33
Programming considerations 5.35
Installation 5.36
3-SAC Security Access Control module 5.40
Product description 5.40
SAC bus 5.40
Recommended cabling 5.40
Additional power supply wiring 5.40
3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC-3 5.41
AC power and DC battery wiring 5.42
Connecting auxiliary/booster power supplies 5.44
Installation 5.44
Configuration 5.44
Connecting the PT-1S impact printer 5.46
System printer power supply 5.48
Adjusting amplifier output levels 5.49
What you will need 5.49
Adjustment procedure 5.49

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.1

Installation
Design considerations 5.49
Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5.50
What you will need 5.50
Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input 5.50
Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote
Diagnostics Utility 5.53
Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5.55

5.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Installation overview
Electrostatic discharge precaution

Observe static sensitive

material handling practices.
The components used in this system are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). When handling electronic assemblies, you
must take precautions to avoid the build up of static charges on
your body and on the equipment.

Do not open the anti-static packaging until you are ready to

install the electronics.
Wear a grounded wrist strap to bleed off any static charge
which may have built up on your body.

Energized system precaution

Caution: Never install or remove a module or cabinet

component with power applied to the cabinet.

Circuit compatibility
The following circuit compatibility matrix indicates which
circuit types may occupy the same conduit or be bundled
together, where permitted by code.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.3

Installation

Recommended cable manufacturers

Atlas Wire and Cable Corp.
133 S. Van Norman Road
Montebello, CA 90640
(213) 723-2401
West Penn Wire Corp.
2833 West Chestnut Street
P.O. Box 762
Washington, PA 15301
(412) 222-7060
Belden Wire and Cable Corp.
P.O. Box 1980
Richmond, IN 47375
(317) 983-5200
BSCC
233 Florence Street
Leominster, MA 01453
Telephone: (508) 537-9138
Fax: (508) 537-8392
Remee Products, Inc.
186 North Main Street
Florida, NY 10921

5.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Table 5-1: Recommended cable manufacturers part numbers

#14 (1.50 mm2) Twisted Pair

#18 (0.75 mm2) Twisted Pair

MFG

Type

Shielded

Unshielded

Shielded

ATLAS

FPL

218-14-1-1TP

218-14-1-1STP

218-16-1-1STP

218-16-1-1STP

218-18-1-1TP

218-18-1-1STP

FPLP

__

1762-14-1-2J

1761-16-1-2J

1762-16-1-2J

1761-18-1-2J

1762-18-1-2J

BELDEN

Unshielded

#16 (1.00 mm2) Twisted Pair

Unshielded

Shielded

FPL

9580

9581

9572

9575

9571

9574

FPLP

__

83752

__

__

__

__

FPL

__

231402

__

241602

__

241802

FPLP

341402

__

341602

351602

341802

351802

REMEE

FPLP

NY514UH

NY514SH

NY516UH

NY516SH

NY518UH

NY518SH

WEST PENN

FPL

994

995

990

991

D9780

D975

FPLP

60993

60992

60991

60990

60980

60975

BSCC

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.5

Installation

UL 864 NAC signal synchronization

Requirements
Table 5-2 lists the installation requirements for systems that must
meet UL 864 NAC signal synchronization requirements.
Table 5-2: Installation requirements for UL 864 signal synchronization
Circuit

Installation requirements

3-ASU audio riser

The 3-ASU audio subsystem uses a single signal source, so

audible NACs on the 3-ASU network audio riser are
synchronized network-wide.

3-AADC(1)

Signals are synchronized for a NAC when you use a riser

selection module, a Genesis Signal Master synchronization
module, and Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification
appliances. Separate NACs on the loop are not synchronized.
Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or
steady output as desired.

3-IDC8/4

Signals are synchronized for a NAC when you use a Genesis

Signal Master synchronization module and Genesis or Enhanced
Integrity notification appliances. Separate NACs on the module
are not synchronized.
To silence audible appliances separately, use two NAC channels
from the 3-IDC8/4 to provide separate audible and visible power
to the NAC. In this configuration, the signal silence function
operates as defined in your project. See Figure 5-1 for typical
wiring.
Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or
steady output as desired.

3-SSDC(1)

Signals are synchronized for all NACs on the Signature data

circuit when you use SIGA-CC1S or SIGA-MCC1S modules and
Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances. See
Figure 5-3.
The system does not synchronize Signature data circuits on
separate 3-SSDC(1) modules in one panel or between panels.
Signals are synchronized for a NAC on the Signature data circuit
when you use SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-MCC1 addressable NAC
modules, a Genesis Signal Master synchronization module, and
Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances. [1]
Separate NACs on the Signature data circuit are not
synchronized. See Figure 5-4.
Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or
steady output as desired.

3-SDDC(1)

5.6

Synchronization is not supported between two daughter cards on

the same 3-SDDC(1) module. NACs on the individual daughter
cards are synchronized as described above for the 3-SSDC(1).

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Table 5-2: Installation requirements for UL 864 signal synchronization

Circuit

Installation requirements

SIGA-CC1, SIGA-MCC1,
SIGA-CC1S, and SIGAMCC1S

Signature CC1 modules do not generate temporal signals, they

simply turn the NAC circuit on or off. You must configure the
notification appliances for temporal or steady output as desired.

G1M and G1M-RM

The G1M and G1M-RM Genesis Signal Master modules can be

used to synchronize NACs consisting of Genesis appliances.
They can also be used to synchronize mixed NACs consisting of
Genesis and Enhanced Integrity appliances, but the first
appliance must be a Genesis device, and the Genesis Signal
Master module must be mounted on this device.
G1M and G1M-RM Genesis Signal Master modules cannot be
used to synchronize NACs consisting of Enhanced Integrity
appliances.

[1] You can also use SIGA-UM and SIGA-MAB modules configured as Class B addressable
NAC modules (personality code 16.)
2.

If notification appliances are used on the data line for more than one zone, each zone must
have isolation so that a break, ground, or wire-to-wire fault shall not affect more than one
zone.

3.

If the riser is used for more than one notification zone, install in accordance with the
survivability from attack by fire requirements in NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.7

Installation

Typical circuits
The circuit diagrams that follow use the term zone to indicate
notification zones as defined in UL 864.
Notification zone: An area covered by notification appliances
that are activated simultaneously.
Figure 5-1 shows a typical application of the 3-IDC8/4 module
to support two notification zones. In this example, power is
being supplied from the EST3 rail, and the jumpers (JP1 through
JP4) are set accordingly.
It is also possible to create a similar application that uses
external power, supplied to NAC 1/2 IN and NAC 5/6 IN. Refer
to the 3-IDC8/4 installation sheet for wiring details and the
required jumper settings.
In Figure 5-1, both zones are configured with separate NAC
circuits for audible and visible appliances. NAC 1 and NAC 5
are programmed as visible device types, and NAC 2 and NAC 6
as audible device types. This means that the signal silence
function can be configured to silence only the horns.
Separating the visible and audible devices is optional and may
not be required for your project. Refer to the Genesis Signal
Master installation sheet for additional configurations and wiring
details.

5.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

NAC 1
Device type: Visible
Label: Zone_1_Strobes

9 10

NAC 1/2
IN

IDC 4

IDC 3

NAC 2

NAC 1

NAC 2
Device type: Audible
Label: Zone_1_Horns

ZONE1
Temporal horn/strobe
and G1M module
Normal

Active

JP1 JP2
1
2
3

Temporal
horn/strobe

1
2
3

10 k
EOLR

10 k
EOLR

ZONE 2
Temporal horn/strobe
and G1M module
1
2
3

Normal

1
2
3

Active
S

10 k
EOLR

10 k
EOLR

NAC 5/6
IN

IDC 8

IDC 7

NAC 6

NAC 5

JP3 JP4

Temporal
horn/strobe

NAC 5
Device type: Visible
Label: Zone_2_Strobes
NAC 6
Device type: Audible
Label: Zone_2_Horns

Figure 5-1: Typical 3-IDC8/4 card NAC wiring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.9

Installation

Figure 5-2 shows a Signature circuit, wired as Class A, and using

isolation modules or bases for each IDC and NAC.
Sync
module

IM

IPHS

SIGA B+
SIGA B
SIGA A+
SIGA A

CC1

CR

270

IM

IPHS

Notification
zone 1

IPHS

Isolater
base

AUX riser

Sync
module

Class A
(required)

Temporal
horn/strobe

CC1

Temporal
horn/strobe

CR

270

Notification
zone 2

IPHS

Isolater
base

AUX riser

Figure 5-2: Signature wiring for notification circuit signal synchronization

Figure 5-3 Shows two NACs on a Signature data circuit. Each

NAC is controlled by a SIGA-CC1S module, one for audible
appliances, and one for visible appliances.
As in Figure 5-1, this configuration allows the audible appliances
to be silenced independently of the visible appliances. This
operation is optional, and may or may not be required for your
project.
The SIGA-CC1S modules provide signal synchronization for
both NACs.

5.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

AUX riser from

previous device

From
previous device

8 7 6 5

4 3

To
next device
AUX riser to next
device or riser monitor

Model: CC1S
Device type: Visible
Personality: (25) Auto sync output
Label: Zone_1_Strobes

Data out ()

Single Input Signal module

Strobe

Strobe

Data out (+)

10 9

Active

Normal

Temporal
horn

Data in ()

8 7 6 5

10 9

Data in (+)

Model: CC1S
Device type: Audible
Personality: (25) Auto sync output
Label: Zone_1_Horns

Single Input Signal module

Active

Normal

Temporal
horn

47 k
EOLR

47 k
EOLR

Installation

Figure 5-3: Typical SIGA-CC1S NAC wiring

5.11

Installation

Figure 5-4 shows a single SIGA-CC1 switching an NAC on or

off. The G1M module provides signal synchronization for the
temporal horn/strobe appliances.
As in earlier examples, this circuit allows for independent
silencing of the audible appliances. This operation is provided by
the SIGA-CR module, which opens or closes the circuit between
S+ and H+ on the G1M module. In this case, however, you must
program the operation of the SIGA-CR. The project settings for
signal silence operation will not determine the operation of the
audible appliances in this NAC.
Note also, that this application could be implemented with a
SIGA-CC1S module. The SIGA-CC1S provides signal
synchronization compatible with the operation of the G1M
module.
The advantage to using a SIGA-CC1S module is that the NAC
would then be synchronized with other NACs on the Signature
data circuit.

5.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

AUX riser from
previous device

From
previous device

AUX riser to next

device or riser monitor

4 3

Temporal
horn/strobe

To
next device

Model: CR
Device type: Dry contact
Personality: (8) Dry contact
Label: Zone_1_NAC_Silence

Data out ()

Relay module

Data out (+)

4 3

8 7 6

Data in ()

8 7 6 5

10 9

Temporal horn/strobe
and G1M module

Data in (+)

Model: CC1
Device type: Visible
Personality: (5) Riser selector
Label: Zone_1_NAC

Single Input Signal module

Active

Normal

47 k
EOLR

Installation

Figure 5-4: Typical SIGA-CC1 NAC wiring

5.13

Installation

Figure 5-5 shows an auxiliary/booster power supply being used

to power the NAC, to provide synchronization, and to provide
horn silence capability. Because the auxiliary/booster supply has
the ability to silence the horn circuit, this application can be
created using only the Signature loop wiring.
The SIGA-CT1 module monitors the power supply for AC
failure. The SIGA-CR module signals the power supply to turn
the horns on or off. The SIGA-CC1 module signals the power
supply when the system goes into alarm, turning the NAC on.
Note that the power supply can only synchronize the notification
appliances to which it is connected. If you need to synchronize
several similar NACs on the same Signature loop, you can use a
SIGA-CC1S module in place of the SIGA-CC1.

5.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

From
previous
device

Data In (+)
Data In ()

8 7 6

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

Model: CR
Device type:
NSCommonAlarmOutput
Personality: (8) Dry Contact
Text 1: REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2: HORN_SILENCE

Not supervised

8 7

47 k
EOLR
[3]

47 k
EOLR
[3]

Model: CT1
Device type: AC Power
Personality: (3) Active B
Text 1: REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2: AC_FAILURE

NC

COM

NO

OUT

Sense 2 COM

IN

OUT

Sense 1 COM

IN

200 mA +
AUX

Auxiliary/booster
supply [4]

RED

WHT

24

C.

8 7 6 5

PAM-1
[2]

BLU

ORG

N.O.

0V

Active

Normal

4 3 2 1

10 9

Data Out (+)

Data Out ()

To
next
device

Model: CC1 or CC1S [5]

Device type: Visible
Personality: (5) Riser Selector
Text 1: REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2: HRNS_&_STROBES

[5] Use a CC1S if you want to maintain

signal synchronization across multiple
auxiliary/booster supplies on the same
Signature loop.

[4] Configure Sense 1 and Sense 2

operation for Genesis Master mode and
NAC operation for Continuous. See the
auxiliary/booster supply documentation
for details.

[3] Use part number EOL-47

[2] Install a PAM-1 or equivalent listed relay

only when you are required to supervise
the 200 mA AUX circuit wiring

1. All wiring is supervised and powerlimited unless otherwise noted

Notes

Installation

Figure 5-5: Using an auxiliary/booster supply to provide horn silence capability with two wires

5.15

Installation

Creating an initial startup version of the project database

Creating an initial startup version of the project database is
useful for:

Assigning panel addresses when you bring up a system for

the first time

Verifying the correct installation of the rail modules and

control/display modules

Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU and amplifier modules

installed in a cabinet

Follow these suggestions when creating an initial startup version

of the project database:
Only include the hardware configuration for each cabinet in the
system. Do not include any device loops in the database. These
should be installed after verifying the cabinet configuration. It is
also not necessary to configure any rail modules.
The easiest way to create an initial startup version of the project
database is to save the project under a different name using the
Save As command. Save the project as a different version after
you have defined the cabinet chassis configuration and added all
the rail modules for all the cabinets in the system. Using this
method eliminates doubling your workload by having to edit two
databases as you add cabinets to the system.
If the cabinet contains amplifiers and a 3-ASU, include the
following features in the initial startup version of the project
database:

Program a control/display module toggle switch to send a

0.7 Vrms, 1 kHz tone to the amplifiers. Label the switch
1KHZ_TONE and add the following rule to the rules file:
[AMPLIFIER_SETUP]
SW '1KHZ_TONE':
AMPON '*' TO 'Ch_Gen*',
MSGON '1KHZ_TONE' TO 'Ch_Gen*';

Record a message in the 3-ASU database labeled

1KHZ_TONE. Import the Steady tone at 1kHz.wav file from
the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD-ROM into this
record.

Note: For firmware versions earlier than 1.5, copy the Steady
tone at 1kHz.wav file from the \Library\Sounds\FCCA directory
on the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD-ROM to a directory
on your hard drive that doesnt contain any other files. You can
import the file from this directory.

5.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

If a CDR-3 Zone Coder is installed and connected to the AUX

input on a 3-ASU, include the following features in the initial
startup version of the project database:

Program a control/display module toggle switch that is to

turn on the amplifiers and select the Auxiliary channel.
Label the switch AUX_INPUT_ADJUST and add the
following rule to the rules file:
[3-ASU_AUX_INPUT_SETUP]
SW 'AUX_INPUT_ADJ':
AMPON '*' TO 'Ch_Aux*';

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.17

Installation

System installation sequence

Follow these general instructions when installing a panel as part
of an EST3 system. Refer to the installation sheets that came
with the product for specific instructions. The EST3 Installation
Sheets book contains copies of the installation sheets.
1. Install the equipment enclosure backbox at the required
location and pull all the required conductors through the
conduit into the backbox.
2. Verify the field wiring. Refer to Table 5-3.
3. Install the chassis assemblies that go into the panel.
4. Install the primary and booster power supplies.
5. Install all rail modules and control / display modules in their
required locations.
6. Apply power to the panel. Refer to the topic Cabinet powerup procedure in Chapter 6.
7. Download an initial startup version of the CPU database, and
clear panel troubles. See the topic Creating an initial startup
version of the project database, later in this chapter.
8. Connect field wiring and clear any field wiring problems.
9. Download the final applications program. Refer to Chapter
6, Power-up and testing.
10. Disconnect the SDU from the panel.
11. Verify proper operation. Refer to the topic Detector, input
module, and output module testing in Chapter 6.
12. Fill out a Certificate of Completion for the system. Example
forms are included in Chapter 5.

5.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Preliminary field wiring testing

We recommend that you test all circuits before they are
connected to the control equipment. Table 5-3 indicates the
recommended tests and acceptable test results.
Note: Individual devices are not checked as part of these tests.
All equipment installed on field circuits must be individually
tested to ensure proper operation when the system running.
Table 5-3: Field wiring tests
Circuit type

Test

DC notification appliance
circuit

1. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit

resistance should be infinite if no devices are installed on the
circuit. The circuit resistance should be approximately 15 k
when the polarized notification appliances and the end-of-line
resistor are correctly installed.
2. Reverse the meter leads. The circuit resistance between
conductors should read approximately 10 to 20 . If the
resistance reading is still approximately the same value
when the meter leads are reversed, one or more polarized
devices are installed incorrectly.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The resistance should be infinite.

Audio notification appliance

circuit

1. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit

resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are installed on the circuit. The circuit resistance
should be approximately 15 k when the polarized
notification appliances and the end-of-line resistor are
correctly installed.
2. Reverse the meter leads. The circuit resistance between
conductors should still read approximately 15 k.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

Signature data circuits

1. With field wiring disconnected, verify the continuity of each

conductor. Each conductor should measure less than 38 .
2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance
between conductors should be between approximately 18
k (250 devices) and 4.5 M (1 device) when devices are
installed.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.19

Installation

Table 5-3: Field wiring tests

Circuit type

Test

Addressable analog circuits

1. Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor

should measure less than 50 .
2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are connected to the circuit.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

Traditional initiating device

circuits

1. Verify the continuity of each conductor.

2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance
between conductors should be approximately 4.7 k when
devices are installed.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

Telephone riser circuit

1. Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor

should measure between 0 and 25 .
2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are installed on the circuit. The circuit resistance
between conductors should be approximately 15 k with
SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Modules and the end-of-line
resistor correctly installed.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

RS-485 communication circuits EST3 uses RS485 circuits for the:

Network data riser

Network audio riser
SAC bus

1. Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor

should measure between 0 and 50 .
2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite if no
devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance
between conductors should be approximately 50 when
devices are installed.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

5.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Table 5-3: Field wiring tests

Circuit type

Test

RS-232 Communication
Circuits

With both ends of the circuit disconnected:

1. Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor
should measure between 0 and 25 .
2. Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit
resistance between conductors should be infinite.
3. Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth
ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and
earth ground should be infinite.

Earth Ground

1. Measure the resistance between the earth ground terminal

and a convenient water pipe or electrical conduit. The circuit
resistance should be less than 0.1

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.21

Installation

Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks

Each 3-CHAS7 chassis or 3-ASU(/FT) Audio Source Unit
requires 12 inches (30.48 cm) of vertical rack space. 3/4 inch
(1.9 cm) blank plates are required at the top of the upper chassis
and the bottom of the lower chassis. A 1-1/2 inch (3.81 cm)
blank plate is required between each chassis.
3/4 In (1.9 cm) BLANK PLATE

Chassis 1

12 In
(30.48 cm)

1 1/2 In (3.81 cm) BLANK PLATE

Chassis 2

12 In
(30.48 cm)

1 1/2 In (3.81 cm) BLANK PLATE

Chassis 3

12 In
(30.48 cm)

3/4 In (1.9 cm) BLANK PLATE

[RACKSPAC.CDR]

Figure 5-6: Rack-mounted chassis

5.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets

EST3 supports several UL1635 certification installations. Each
of these requires that an ATCK Attack Kit be attached to an
RCC7R series control panel cabinet. The kit provides a twominute attack delay time.
The ATCK kit lets you replace the standard, hinged outer door
with a box cover that has no window. The cover attaches to the
backbox sides using sheet metal screws and four locks.
The kit also includes special knockout locks that secure the
unused knockout holes.
Follow the instructions shipped with the kit. In general, youll
need to:
1. Discard the standard door included with the cabinet.
2. For older cabinets, use the ATCK cover as a template to
mark and drill screw holes. (New cabinets include the
correct screw holes.)
3. Remove any unused knockouts and insert knockout locks.
4. Use the screws provided to attach the new cover.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.23

Installation

Local rail module installation

Please refer to the installation sheet that came with the product
for installation instructions.
Equipment locations within a chassis are referred to as rail slots.
Figure 5-7 indicates the rail slot numbers for the various cabinet
sizes available in the EST3 product line. The CPU module must
always occupy rail slots 1 and 2. The primary power supply
monitor module should occupy rail slot 3.

Figure 5-7: Local rail module slot identification

A 3-ASU Audio Source Unit occupies the first three slots on its
chassis, and is identified using the lowest slot number of the
three. When a Firefighters Telephone Control Unit is supplied as
part of the 3-ASU/FT, the telephone control unit occupies the
last four slots on the chassis, and is identified as the fourth slot
number (11 or 18) on the chassis.
Connect the DC power cable (P/N 250187) to connector P2 on
the power supply. For the 3-PPS Primary Power Supply, connect
the 16-pin data ribbon cable (P/N 250188); (Booster = P/N
250189) to connector P3 on the power supply. For 3-BPS

5.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Booster Power Supplies, connect a 14-pin data ribbon cable (P/N

250189) to connector P3 on the power supply. Route both cables
up through the rails for later connection to the power
supply/booster monitor module.

Install any local rail module option cards required by your

application. Option cards should be firmly seated in their
connectors, and then secured to the rail module by pressing
the snap rivet fastener.

If a control/display module is required by your application,

place the display in the recess on the front of the module.
Secure the display with the four supplied plastic rivets.
Install the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) between the
displays connector and the modules display connector. If
no display is required, insert the blank plate supplied with
the module.

Locate the required rail slot positions on the rail chassis.

Remember, the module location must match the location
entered in the System Definition Utility program.

Position the module so that any option card(s) rests in the

card guides slot. Push the module toward the rails, sliding
the daughter card into the slot.

When the four alignment pins match up with the guide holes
in the module, push the module in to firmly seat the module
on the rail connectors.

Push in the snap rivets to lock the module on to the rail.

Plug in terminal strips can be removed from LRMs to

facilitate field wiring.

Close the module display door. Latch the door by sliding the
upper latch down and the lower latch up.

Note: If there are empty rail spaces in a cabinet, you should

consider installing 3-LRMF blank modules to fill up the spaces.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.25

Installation

3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module

Features
The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator is a local rail module
that supports telephone line communication. It combines the
functions of a dialer and modem in a single module.
The module has two eight-position modular jacks for connecting
to telephone lines. It includes two red LEDs (DS1 and DS2) to
annunciate line ringing and data exchange. The module accepts a
control / display layer and has provision for a future expansion
module.
A nonvolatile, flash memory chip stores customization data that
includes account information, user identifiers, telephone
numbers, and other dialing details.
The 3-MODCOMP is identical to the 3-MODCOM, but supports
remote paging using the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol
(TAP). The 3-MODCOMP remote paging feature is
supplemental and is not supervised.
Both versions of the module are equipped with a modem that is
Bell 103 and V.32bis compliant. The modem includes support
for these protocols:

Contact ID
SIA DCS
SIA P2 (3/1 pulse format)
SIA P3 (4/2 pulse format)
TAP (3-MODCOMP only)

Several 3-MODCOMs (up to ten) can be installed in a network

for increased reliability. These can be configured to provide
dynamic failover operation.
You can program the 3-MODCOM in any of the following
configurations:

One-line dialer
Two-line dialer
Modem
Modem and one-line dialer
Modem and two-line dialer

The dialer circuit is compatible with pulse dialing or touch-tone

(DTMF) dialing. The module can be configured to detect and
answer any of these ring types:

5.26

Any ring
Normal ring
Distinct ring 2 (type II)
Distinct ring 3 (type III)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation
Note: Only Line 1 can be used to receive incoming calls.

Using the 3-MODCOM, messages can be sent to a central

monitoring station (CMS) or received from remote computers.
When reporting to a CMS, alarm, trouble, and supervisory status
data are transmitted as they occur. Each message identifies the
point (or device or circuit) that is involved.
The 3-MODCOM can receive data from two programs: the
Access Control Database program (ACDB) or the Keypad
Display Configuration program (KDC).
ACDB and KDC information is downloaded on demand from
remote computers. This lets the end users create and maintain
their own security and access control databases.

Functions
Configuration

You create the required configuration data using the 3-SDU and
download this data to the module using standard programming
procedures. The data is stored in the nonvolatile memory of the
3-MODCOM.
Configuration data determines the setup of the 3-MODCOM,
defines the line properties, the receiver attributes, and the
account parameters. This data includes transmission details, such
as telephone numbers and dialing options.
Some reference data relating to user access control and security
systems is downloaded from the ACDB or KDC programs and
stored in the 3-MODCOM.
Point transmission

Using enhanced communication protocols, the 3-MODCOM

module is capable of transmitting data that identifies the specific
device (or circuit) and event status, as reported by the CPU. This
capability is known as point transmission because each and
every device (or circuit) that goes into alarm or trouble, or is
restored, can be reported by order of occurrence and priority.
Receiving user data

In addition to transmitting device data, the 3-MODCOM module

can receive user data from remote computers. In this mode, the
module receives access control or security database information
from one or more end users. This data establishes the operating
characteristics of the users security and access control system as
well as the various access options and PIN numbers. All
downloaded data is received over the telephone lines.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.27

Installation

The remote programs, ACDB and KDC, use passwords defined

during 3-SDU programming to gain access to the 3-MODCOM.
At the start of the downloading process, a connection is
established between the modem portion of the 3-MODCOM
module and the ACDB or KDC program. Connection is over the
telephone network.
The 3-MODCOM module receives data and transfers it to the
CPU. The data is then routed via the 3-SAC to the CRC and
KPDISP modules on the SAC bus. The data is stored in the
nonvolatile flash memory chips of these devices.
Monitoring and diagnostics

Each line has a voltage monitor for detecting loss of telephone

line during on-hook condition, and a current monitor for
detecting the loss of telephone line and telephone line usage
during off-hook conditions. Optical coupler circuits are used for
these monitors.
Two red LEDs (DS1 and DS2) annunciate line ringing, in use,
and fault conditions. States and explanations for DS1 and DS2
are given in the Service and troubleshooting chapter.

Equipment
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator

The 3-MODCOM connects the EST3 system to the switched

telephone network. The 3-MODCOM module is a single rail
module with two eight-position modular jacks for connecting
two loop-start lines. The 3-MODCOM module provides a
control / display layer and space for a future expansion insert
card.
The 3-MODCOM can support 255 accounts. It can communicate
with 80 receivers in any of the following protocols:

Contact ID
SIA DCS
SIA P2 (3/1 Pulse Format)
SIA P3 (4/2 Pulse Format)

The 3-MODCOM is supplied with two seven-foot cables (P/N

360137). These are eight-conductor, flat telephone cables, with
eight-position modular plugs on both ends. One end of the cable
plugs into the 3-MODCOM. The other end plugs into an RJ-31X
jack.
You must obtain the RJ-31X jack locally, and wire it to the
telephone lines as indicated on the 3-MODCOM installation
sheet.

5.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation
3-MODCOMP Modem Communicator with Paging

The 3-MODCOMP is identical to the 3-MODCOM except for

the inclusion of the TAP paging protocol. The end user must
subscribe to a TAP-compatible alphanumeric paging service.
Depending on the paging service provider, the TAP message can
be broadcast via radio to a pager, converted to an e-mail, or
faxed to an end user.
The module is supplied with two seven-foot cables (P/N 360137)
for connecting the 3-MODCOMP to an RJ-31 jack. You must
obtain the RJ-31X jack locally, and wire it to the telephone lines
as indicated on the 3-MODCOM installation sheet.
RJ-31X jack telephone company jack

An RJ-31X jack must be used to connect each line of the

3-MODCOM to the switched telephone network. One jack is
required for each telephone line.
The jack is an eight-position jack with a special jumper between
terminals 1 and 4 and 5 and 8. This jumper is in effect when the
plug is removed from the jack.
Removing the plug re-establishes connection to the premises
telephones. Inserting the plug opens the jumper and connects the
3-MODCOM, which provides a series connection to the
telephones.
Refer to the 3-MODCOM installation sheet for a diagram of the
jack wiring.
Note: Failure to use an RJ-31X jack violates FCC and NFPA

regulations. A telephone connected directly to the incoming

telephone line without the proper use of the RJ-31X jack will
cause a telephone company trouble when used and possibly
prevent the dialer from getting through to the CMS receiver in an
emergency.

Configuration options
3-MODCOM and 3-MODCOMP can be configured as:

One-line dialer
Two-line dialer
Modem
Modem and one-line dialer
Modem and two-line dialer

For UL listed or FM approved installations, you must configure

the 3-MODCOM as a two-line dialer, and both lines must have
supervision (line-cut detection) selected.
The 3-MODCOM operates in accordance with programmed
instructions. Details of items such as telephone numbers, dialing

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.29

Installation

details, activation of a dialer test signal, etc., are all a part of the
information that is downloaded into the nonvolatile memory of
the 3-MODCOM by the SDU.
The 3-MODCOM electronically dials receivers in the central
monitoring station (CMS) using either pulse or tone dialing, as
specified during configuration. The module dials the stored CMS
telephone number using the same digits that would be used if a
person were dialing from the premises with an ordinary
telephone.
Each time the 3-MODCOM sends test messages to the CMS, it
indicates whether the system is in a normal or abnormal state.
You can select which system states (such as alarm, trouble, or
monitor) represent an abnormal condition. This prevents the 3MODCOM from reporting an abnormal condition when the
system is in a state that occurs frequently as part of normal
system operation.
There are provisions for programming a periodic test
transmission to the CMS station on a one-minute to 45-day basis.
A daily test signal is primarily intended for certified installations,
and is mandatory for all fire alarm installations.
The 3-MODCOM sends messages in order of their priority.
Messages may include device and user ID information regarding
events, such as openings, closings, alarms, and tamper or trouble
events. The module waits for acknowledgement that each
message sent has been received. .Where necessary, the 3MODCOM can be configured to begin dialing without waiting
for a dial tone. This option is used in areas where the telephone
line has an absent or erratic dial tone.

Failover operation
You can create dynamic failover operation for 3-MODCOMs.
By dynamic failover we mean that in the event of a
communication failure or device trouble, the system switches
from accounts on one 3-MODCOM to matching accounts on
another 3-MODCOM.
Failover operation results in a system that is resistant to trouble
arising from telephone lines, 3-MODCOMs, or the CPU module.
The operation can be limited to a single panel, or can span two or
more panels anywhere in a network.
In systems with a single 3-MODCOM you can include a second
3-MODCOM that acts as a redundant unit. In systems with two
or more 3-MODCOMs, you can program the system so that the
units back up each other, while still handling their normal traffic.
Failover operates by enabling and disabling various accounts
defined for the project. On detection of a fault or trouble, project

5.30

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

rules disable accounts on the failed 3-MODCOM and enable

matching accounts on the backup 3-MODCOM.
When a 3-MODCOM acts as a backup it still provides line
supervision. Only the backup accounts are disabled. Further,
backup units should conduct their own dialer tests, using unique
accounts that identify the 3-MODCOM. Even when not in use, a
backup unit should generate a trouble event if it cannot contact
the assigned receiver.
Because of the way rules are processed, when the primary
3-MODCOM comes out of trouble, the accounts are
automatically switched back to their normal state. Messages
already queued for transmission in the backup unit will still be
sent, even after backup accounts are disabled. Only new
messages will be routed differently. This means that device
activation and restoral messages sent to the CMS will still be
properly paired.
Failover operation is created by specific configuration and
programming steps. These are outlined below.
Configuration requirements

For each primary 3-MODCOM add (or select) a backup

3-MODCOM in the same panel or in a different panel
according to the scope of failover operation you need

Configure the primary and backup 3-MODCOMs identically

except for their labels and the labels of the accounts

Label the accounts so that its easy to recognize the

3-MODCOM in which they are used

Make sure each 3-MODCOM uses a unique account for

dialer tests

Programming requirements

Create message rules that send identical messages to both

accounts

On system startup, disable the accounts on the backup

3-MODCOM

On activation of a panel comm fault, line fault, or LRM

comm fault, disable the primary accounts and enable the
backup accounts

ACDB requirements

Additional steps are required when the project includes reporting

to a CMS that requires translation from a Cardholder ID to a
cardholder name. In this situation, the ACDB user must enter a
User ID (name) for both CMS Accounts (the primary and backup
accounts).

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.31

Installation

These entries are made on the System tab of the Cardholder tab.
The ACDB user should enter a User ID for each CMS Account.

Compatibility
EST3 versions

The 3-MODCOM Module will operate with EST3 Version. 3.0

or above. Do not use this communication module with earlier
versions.
Receiver compatibility

Refer to the EST3 ULI/ULC Compatibility Lists (P/N 3100427),

for a list of compatible receivers.

Transmission protocols
The 3-MODCOM is capable of transmitting messages in five
formats, or protocols:

Contact ID
SIA DCS
SIA P2 (3/1 Pulse Format)
SIA P3 (4/2 Pulse Format)
TAP (3-MODCOMP only)

All formats consist of short, predefined messages. Most contain

several parameters, some of which are optional. Check with your
dialer receiver and central monitoring station software provider
for the exact structure they require.
When programming transmissions, remember that device
messages require two separate send commands, one for
activation, and one for restoration.
Contact ID: numeric messages with several parameters including
event code, partition, and device or user. The format is:

[EventCode] [Partition] [DeviceNumber | User]

SIA DCS: ASCII text messages that include a number of
optional parameters, including time, date, user, partition, and
device. The format is:

[Date] [Time] [UserID] AlarmCode [Device | User | Partition]

SIA P2 (3/1): numeric messages that consist of four digits. These

contain the account number (three digits) and the alarm code
(one digit). The format is:
AccountNumber AlarmCode
The is no standard assignment of alarm codes and meanings.
Obtain the codes used by your CMS.

5.32

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation
SIA P3 (4/2): numeric messages that contain two numbers and
no other parameters. The format is:

EventCode
TAP: consists of two fields separated by a carriage return (CR).

The first field is the User ID. The second field is the text
message that will be displayed on an alphanumeric pager.
Message length, including User ID and CR is 60 characters. The
format is:
User [CR] Message [Location]
No standards describe the content of the message. Typically,
you'll use the device location message, as displayed on the LCD
module. Check with your paging service provider to ensure they
accept the TAP protocol and determine any message limitations.

Transmission process
The 3-MODCOM includes features that provide an appreciable
level of transmission integrity. Multiple telephone lines and
multiple telephone numbers help to ensure that a call to the
receiver gets through. The 3-MODCOM module sequences
through the following basic steps to contact the central
monitoring station receiver.
1. The 3-MODCOM seizes one of the telephone lines and puts
the line on-hook for a minimum of three seconds.
This cuts off any ongoing call and disconnects the line from
any telephone or dialing devices that are connected
downstream.
Note: The module tries to select an unused line for its first
two attempts.

2. The 3-MODCOM takes the line off-hook and waits for a dial
tone.
LED DS1 or DS2 lights steadily.
If a dial tone is not received by the configured time, the
module goes on-hook, increments the attempt counter, and
continues to alternate lines and numbers until a dial tone is
acquired.
If the 3-MODCOM is configured with two telephone
numbers and only one telephone line, it will make four
attempts using the first telephone number, then four attempts
using the second telephone number. This alternation of
telephone numbers continues as needed until a connection is
made or the configured number of dial attempts have been
made.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.33

Installation
Note: In areas where the telephone system has no dial tone,
or where the dial tone is erratic, you can set the 3MODCOM to dial without waiting for a dial tone. This is
called blind call dialing

3. The 3-MODCOM dials the CMS using the programmed

dialing mode and telephone number.
4. The 3-MODCOM waits for a handshake message from the
CMS indicating that a connection has been established.
If a handshake is not received within 40 seconds the module
puts the telephone line on-hook and waits for the configured
period.
After the wait, steps 2 through 4 are repeated. If the module
is still unable to contact the receiver it seizes the other
telephone line.
The module repeats two attempts on the other telephone line.
If still unable to contact the receiver it switches back to the
first telephone line and attempts to contact the receiver using
the secondary telephone number.
If still unable to contact the receiver the module continues to
alternate lines and numbers until the configured maximum
number of attempts have been reached.
If the maximum number of attempts is reached, the module
sends a trouble message to the CPU.
The 3-MODCOM retries the full number of attempts if
another event is activated or make one attempt if a
configured period (Wait Time Between Attempts) expires.
5. When the call is completed, ringing is detected by the CMS
dialer-receiver (DACR). The DACR goes off-hook and
transmits a handshake.
6. If the handshake matches the desired transmit format, the
3-MODCOM transmits, in the specified format, all premises
event data.
LED DS1 or DS2 flashes rapidly to indicate data is being
transmitted.
7. The 3-MODCOM waits for an acknowledgement and a
shutdown signal from the CMS receiver, then puts the line
on-hook, ending the call.
LED DS1 or DS2 extinguishes.

5.34

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Programming considerations
Accounts and receivers

In addition to the general operating characteristics of the

3-MODCOM, youll need to specify each account and receiver
used by the system. You may want to gather this information
before you begin using the SDU.
A receiver is a destination for a 3-MODCOM call to a CMS.
Typically, a CMS will have many receivers in operation, each
capable of receiving multiple calls. The CMS will determine
which receiver you should use for each account. For
configuration purposes, heres what youll need to specify about
the receiver:

Label
Description
Primary telephone number
Secondary telephone number
Protocol to use
Maximum number of dial attempts
Wait time between dial attempts

An account links a specific end user to a specific receiver. Each

message sent from the 3-MODCOM includes an account number
assigned by the CMS. This identifies the user site sending the
message and the receiver to which the message is sent. For each
account youll need to define:

Label
Description
Receiver to use
Account number (as assigned by the CMS)
Dialing test interval and time of day

Several accounts may use the same receiver, but each account is
assigned to only one receiver.
Events and commands

One event and two commands are particularly important when

you create SDU rules for the 3-MODCOM. These are:
activation, activate, and send.
Security and access control devices do not send event messages
to the CPU. Rather, they send requests to execute predefined
command lists. You need to define the command lists and assign
the correct command list for each security or access control
event.
Activation: an event that lets you define a command list.
Activate: a command that lets you execute a command list in a

rule.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.35

Installation
Send: a command that sends a message to a CMS through the
3-MODCOM.

Installation
Caution: Prior to installation, remove power from the rail.

To install the 3-MODCOM, youll need to follow these general

steps:
1. Arrange suitable telephone company lines and services.
2. Install the 3-MODCOM on the rail.
3. Connect the 3-MODCOM to the telephone company lines.
4. Download configuration data from the 3-SDU.
5. Make test transmissions to verify proper operation.
Requirements for telephone lines

3-MODCOM dialers can be used for most applications that use

telephone lines, the exceptions being:

The central station telephone number cannot be dialed

directly (using access numbers and area code where
necessary) without operator interception of the call

Multiparty service (a party line) exists

Operator assistance is required to complete a telephone call

and a foreign exchange cannot be introduced

Connection is not established within 38 seconds following

completion of dialing

The 3-MODCOM dialer circuit is compatible with any switched

telephone network that employs direct dialing (local) and Direct
Distance Dialing (DDD), without operator interception of the
call.
Operator interception occurs in some areas where message
billing is not completely automatic. Where operator interception
is involved, you must obtain a foreign exchange (FX) connection
must from the central station exchange to the exchange serving
the customer. The FX provides a local number for calling the
central station without toll billing. A WATS or ground-start line
connection must not be used for this purpose because the line
cannot be supervised.
The 3-MODCOM includes a feature that prevents jamming by
an incoming telephone call. The feature is based on a telephone
service option referred to as called party disconnect. This option
lets the receiver of a call disconnect by hanging up the telephone

5.36

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

for a period of time, even if the caller stays on the line. The time
required for disconnect varies in different areas, but is usually
between 18 and 90 seconds. Called party disconnect is available
in most areas. To determine whether called party disconnect
control is available in the area to be served, consult the local
telephone company.
In areas not having called party disconnect, the 3-MODCOM
module is vulnerable to jamming by an incoming call. To
minimize the possibility of jamming, we recommend that the
customer order a separate, unlisted number for exclusive use of
the 3-MODCOM module. The customer should keep this
number confidential. In the case of the two-line dialer, two
premises telephone numbers would have to be busied by
incoming calls to jam the system.
Progressive anti-jamming measures would entail the use of one
unlisted telephone number, or two unlisted numbers for
maximum dialer integrity.
The 3-MODCOM must be connected to the incoming line ahead
of all connected equipment on that line, but just behind the
demarcation block. This puts the control unit telephone
connection in series, assuring that all telephones, answering
machines, and FAX machines are disconnected during dial-out
to the CMS. This requirement is necessary so the 3-MODCOM
dialer circuit can seize the line for its exclusive use in the event
of an alarm.
Do not use a telephone line that is considered essential for
conducting business at the site. Use a separate line for the
3-MODCOM. The dialer must be the first connection in line, and
it seizes the line and disconnects all other equipment when
making a call.
If the incoming lines to the protected premises involve a rotary
telephone line arrangement, make the connection to the line
having the highest number. This will create the least interference
with business lines.
Note: If connection will be made to a telephone company line
that is also used for normal business purposes, advise customer
that the telephone service will be disrupted for a few minutes
during the connection period.

In areas where the telephone company requires that their own

connector block be installed, it should be wired as per the USOC
RJ-31X or RJ-38X configuration. (The RJ-38X configuration is
identical to RJ-31X except for a jumper between 2 and 7 which
is used in some residential applications but is not used by the
3-MODCOM.)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.37

Installation

When the 3-MODCOM is configured as a two-line dialer

module, two incoming lines must be used and connections must
be made to each line.
Installing the 3-MODCOM module

Make sure that panel power is off, then proceed as follows,

1. Use an antistatic wrist strap to ground yourself to an
unpainted part of the cabinet.
2. Carefully remove the 3-MODCOM from the antistatic bag in
which the module is packed. Always handle it by the edges
or by the plastic door.
3. Place the bag on a flat work surface, then place the module,
connector side up, on the empty bag.
Check for shipping damage. Orient the module so the two
eight-position modular telephone jacks are on the top.
4. If a control / display module is needed, remove the blank
front plate and attach the ribbon cable to the front of the
3-MODCOM board.
5. Refer to the SDU cabinet report to determine the proper
location for the module, then plug the module into the rail.
Be careful to align the module and rail sockets so that the
pins are in the proper holes and that seat the module firmly.
6. Fasten the module in place with the push-pins.
7. Restore power to the panel.
8. Install wiring to module as described on the 3-MODCOM
installation sheet.
Connecting the 3-MODCOM to a telephone line

Plug one end of the supplied telephone connecting cord (P/N

3601370) into the telephone company line jack on the
3-MODCOM.
Do not plug the other end into the RJ-31X jack until you are
ready to test the system. This prevents unnecessary interference
with other equipment connect to the line downstream.
When you are ready for final connections and testing, use the
telephone company line jacks as follows:
Line 1 jack

Line 2 jack

Single-line dialer
Incoming modem line

Second line of 2-line dialer

For the installation of a fire alarm system in compliance with

NFPA 72, the 3-MODCOM must be connected to loop-start

5.38

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

telephone lines. If the site has ground-start lines, two separate

loop-start lines must be installed for the dialer.
To determine the type of telephone company line, disconnect the
line pair and connect the lines to a test meter.
If the line is equipped for loop-start, the meter should read 48 to
52 Vdc between the lines.
If the line is equipped for ground-start, the meter will read 0 Vdc
between the lines, 48 to 52 Vdc between one line and ground,
and 0 Vdc between the other line and ground.
Note: AT&T Horizon PBX systems and some Type 75 systems

are of the loop-start type. AT&T Dimension PBX systems and

other Type 75 systems are equipped for ground-start.
If this installation is for a certified fire alarm system or a burglar
alarm system in compliance with NFPA 72, the telephone
company line must be of the called party disconnect type (also
called timed-release disconnect). This feature permits the
communication module to seize the line and dial out, even when
the telephone company line is in use.
To determine the whether the telephone line supports called
party disconnect

1. Have someone telephone the premises from the outside.

2. Hang up the telephone that received the call, but have the
individual who placed the call remain on the line.
3. After 40 seconds, pick up the called telephone again.

If you are no longer connected to the caller

If the caller is still on the line

Loading configuration data

After installing the 3-MODCOM, use the SDU network

downloading process to load the configuration data for the
3-MODCOM.
The SDU provides a report that lists all CMS codes that can be
transmitted from the 3-MODCOM. Give this report to the
appropriate CMS.
Testing transmission

After the CMS has programmed the central monitoring database,

perform transmission tests as required by the AHJ and CMS.
Note: Transmission failures are latched at the panel. This means
that you must reset the panel in order to clear them.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.39

Installation

3-SAC Security Access Control module

Product description
The 3-SAC is a high-speed RS-485 module used to support Card
Reader Controller modules and Keypad Display modules. Events
are passed to the 3-SAC module, then passed to the CPU for
alarm processing.
The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of
Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can
handle 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A
circuits can handle 30 devices total.

SAC bus
The 3-SAC Security Access Control module supports the SAC
bus, an RS-485 communication line. When properly constructed,
the SAC bus runs over longer distances, supports more drops,
and is more immune to noise than an RS-232 line.
The SAC bus consists of two lines:

SAC bus +
SAC bus

Recommended cabling
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we
suggest that you always use a four-wire cable for the SAC bus
and a 24 Vdc power supply.
For the data wires we suggest unshielded, twisted pair, with
greater than 6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq
mm).
For the power wires, we recommend 14 or 16 AWG.

Additional power supply wiring

When an additional power supply is required, you must connect
a circuit common point for correct operation. To establish a
circuit common, connect the 24 Vdc terminal on the additional
power supply to the 24 Vdc terminal of the last device. This
circuit common must be connected to the panel, to every device,
and to the circuit common point of any additional power
supplies.

5.40

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC-3

When upgrading an IRC-3 system to EST3, the 3-AADC1
Addressable Analog Driver Controller module lets you use
existing IRC-3 system segments without rework.
The 3-AADC1 can be connected to an existing IRC-3 Remote
Zone Interface Module (RZB(V/N)12-6/3) or a Universal Input
Output Module (UIO-12).
The 3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller module
provides one Class A or Class B loop. This loop becomes the
data communication line for the existing IRC-3 system.
The 3-AADC1 includes a line interface module (LIM) card. You
can also use the LIM card from an existing 3-AADC module by
installing it on a 3-AADC1-MB. The MB version is a local rail
module without a LIM card.
The audio features of the EST3 system can be connected to the
audio riser channels of the RZB module, or existing audio
equipment can be left in place.
Similarly, the EST3 system power supplies can provide 24 Vdc
power to the RZB or UIO cards, or existing power supplies can
be left in place.
Refer to the following installation sheets for wiring details:

3-AADC1 and 3-AADC1-MB Addressable Analog Driver

Controller Installation Sheet

RZB(V/N)12-6/3 Remote Zone Interface Module Installation

Sheet

UIO-12 Universal Input Output Module Installation Sheet

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.41

Installation

AC power and DC battery wiring

Due to power-limited/nonpower-limited wiring separation
requirements, it is easier to route and wire the nonpower-limited
AC power and battery conductors before installing the LRMs in
the rails. Nonpower-limited wiring should be routed to the
chassis notches to the left and rear of the cabinet. Power-limited
wiring should be routed to the right and front of the cabinet.
WARNING: Do not energize power until instructed to do so!

1. Connect the AC power source to TB1, line, neutral, and

ground terminals on the 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Heat Sink and the 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply Heat
Sink(s). DO NOT ENERGIZE THE AC POWER SOURCE
AT THIS TIME!
2. Connect the positive battery lead to TB2-1 and the negative
battery lead to TB2-2. Each heat sink assembly must have its
own pair of 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wires going to the battery.
Do not connect the heat sinks assemblies together and run a
common wire to the battery! DO NOT TERMINATE THE
WIRES AT THE BATTERY AT THIS TIME.
WARNING: Do not connect batteries until instructed to do so!

5.42

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

CONTROL PANEL
CABINET
3-PPS(-230)
TEMP
SENS.
TB2

3-BPS(-230)
TB2

3-BPS(-230)
TB2

3-BPS(-230)
TB2

REMOTE BATTERY CABINET

CONDUIT
8A FUSE
(P/N 46097-0110)
JUMPER

BATTERY
#1

BATTERY
#2

[3BCIN1.CDR]

Figure 5-8: Remote battery cabinet wiring

Note: A minimum of a 10Ah battery must be used in all systems
applications.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.43

Installation

Connecting auxiliary/booster power supplies

UL requires that you monitor secondary power sources for loss
of AC power. Upon loss of AC power, the control panel must
provide an audible and visible trouble signal. In addition, remote
station, central station, and proprietary-type protected premises
units must transmit a trouble signal off-premises after a one- to
three-hour delay.
To meet UL requirements you need to connect a SIGA-CC1 (or
SIGA-CC1S) and a SIGA-CT1 to the booster supply. The SIGACC1 is used to activate the booster supply and to signal common
troubles. The SIGA-CT1 is used to signal booster supply AC
power failures.

Installation
Mount the SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CT1 inside the booster supply
as described in the booster supplys technical documentation and
wire them as shown in Figure 32.

Configuration
Booster supply

Set SW2-6 to ON. This configures the booster supplys Trouble

relay to close only on loss of AC power. All other booster
troubles are signaled through the sense circuits.
Note: In Figure 32, the booster supply is configured so that

Sense 1 controls all four NACs. For DIP switch settings for this
and other booster supply configurations, refer to the booster
supplys technical reference manual.
Signature modules

Configure the Signature modules as described below.

5.44

Module

Properties

SIGA-CC1

Model = CC1
Device Type = CommonAlarmOutput
Personality = (5) Riser Selector
Text 1 = REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2 = SENSE_1

SIGA-CT1

Model = CT1
Device Type = ACFail
Personality = (3) Active B
Text 1 = REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2 = AC_FAILURE

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

NC

COM

NO

OUT

COM

47 k
EOLR
[3]

47 k
EOLR
[3]

Data In (+)
Data In ()

Model = CT1
Device type = ACFail
Personality = (3) Active B
Text 1 = REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2 = AC_FAILURE

Single input module

Sense 2

IN

OUT

COM

Signature loop from

previous device

Auxiliary/booster
supply

Sense 1

IN

4 3 2 1

8 7

ORG

PAM-1
[2]

N.O.
0V

WHT

BLU
C.
24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

RED

200 mA AUX

Not supervised

8 7 6 5

Active

Normal

4 3 2 1

10 9

Data Out (+)

Data Out ()

Signature loop
to next device

Model = CC1
Device type =
CommonAlarmOutput
Personality = (5) Riser Selector
Text 1 = REMOTE_SUPPLY
Text 2 = SENSE_1

Single input signal module

[3] Use part number EOL-47

[2] Install a PAM-1 or equivalent listed

relay only when you are required
to supervise the 200 mA AUX
circuit wiring

1. All wiring is supervised and powerlimited unless otherwise noted

Notes

Installation

Figure 5-9: Typical booster power supply wiring

5.45

Installation

Connecting the PT-1S impact printer

The PT-1S impact printer can be connected to an EST3 panel to
provide a hard copy printout of system status, active events,
panel reports, etc. The PT-1S is a 80-character line width,
freestanding printer that uses standard form feed paper.

LINE FORM TOP SELECT

FEED FEED
SET

ALARM

POWER

PITCH

MODE
SYSTEM PRINTER
PT1-P

[CPT1SX.CDR]

When connecting the PT-1S impact printer by itself:

Configure the serial port as a Printer port type and set the
baud rate for the printers baud rate.

Set printer switches SW1-1, -2, and -3 to OFF, ON, and ON,
respectively (8 bits, no parity).

When connecting the PT-1S impact printer to a serial port that is

shared with a CDR-3 Zone Coder:

Use an IOP3A to connect both devices. Refer to the topic

Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output
later in this chapter.

Configure the panels serial port as a CDR-3/Printer port

type and set the baud rate for the CDR-3s baud rate.

Set printer switches SW1-1, -2, and -3 to OFF, OFF, and

ON, respectively (8 bits, even parity). These are the factory
settings.

Set printer switches SW2-1, -2, and -3 to match the baud rate
set on the CDR-3 zone coder.

PT-1S Printer Specifications

5.46

Dimensions (HWD)

3.2 in x 14.2 in x 10.8 in (8.13 cm x 36

cm x 27.4 cm)

Print Speed

232 Characters/Second

Baud Rates

110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,

19200 bps.

Wiring

3 #18 AWG (0.75 mm2)

Voltage

120 Vac @ 60 Hz

Standby Power

40 VA

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Printing Power

120 VA

Switch DIPSW factory settings (located on main board)

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

SW7

SW8

OFF
(English)

OFF
(English)

OFF
(English)

OFF
(11-in form)

ON
(11-in form)

OFF
(auto LF off)

ON
(8 bits)

OFF
(enable front
panel)

Switch SW1 factory settings (located on serial board)

Switch

Factory
Setting

SW1-1

OFF

ON: Odd parity

OFF: Even parity

SW1-2

OFF

ON: No parity
OFF: With parity

SW1-3

ON

ON: 8 bits
OFF: 7 bits

SW1-4

OFF

ON: Ready/Busy protocol

OFF: XON/XOFF protocol

SW1-5

ON

ON: Circuit test

OFF: Monitor test

SW1-6

ON

ON: Print mode

OFF: Test mode

SW1-7, -8

ON,ON

OFF,OFF: SSD Busy

OFF,ON: SSD Busy
ON,OFF: RTS Busy
ON,ON: DTR Busy

Description

Switch SW2 factory settings (located on serial board)

Switch

Factory Setting Description

SW2-1, -2,
-3

OFF,OFF,ON

OFF,OFF,OFF: 110 bps

ON,OFF,OFF: 300 bps
OFF,ON.OFF: 600 bps
ON,ON,OFF: 1200 bps
OFF,OFF,ON: 2400 bps
ON,OFF,ON: 4800 bps
OFF,ON,ON: 9600 bps
ON,ON,ON: 19200 bps

SW2-4

OFF

ON: DSR active

OFF: DSR inactive

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.47

Installation

Switch SW2 factory settings (located on serial board)

Switch

Factory Setting Description

SW2-5

ON

ON: 32-byte buffer threshold

OFF: 256-byte buffer
threshold

SW2-6

ON

ON: 200ms busy signal

OFF: 1s busy signal

SW1-7

OFF

ON: Space after power on

OFF: Space after printer
select

SW1-8

OFF

not used

System printer power supply

If your PT-1S system printer is required to operate during a
brownout or AC power failure, install an uninterruptible power
supply per Figure 5-10.
UPS Trouble
Contact Monitor

To 120 VAC
15 Amp Circuit

Signature Module
To 3-CPUI

U.L. 1481 listed

UPS
Uninterruptible
Power Supply

LINE FO RM TOP S ELE CT

FE ED FE ED S ET

ALARM

P OWE R

P IT CH

M ODE
S YS TEM P RINT ER
P T1-P

Run Time
174 minutes+ 20%

PT1S Serial Printer

Figure 5-10: Printer uninterruptible power supply wiring

5.48

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Adjusting amplifier output levels

What you will need
An initial startup version of the project database that contains a
1kHz tone and a switch programmed to turn the tone on. See
Creating an initial startup version of the project database.
An RMS voltmeter (Fluke 83 or equivalent)

Adjustment procedure
1. Disconnect the field wiring to all the zoned amplifier
modules in the cabinet.
2. Place an RMS meter across an amplifiers TB2 NAC/B+ and
NAC/B- terminals.
3. Use the 1KHZ_TONE switch to turn on the tone.
4. Adjust the amplifiers gain pot until the RMS meter displays
the configured output level (25 or 70 Vrms).
5. Connect the amplifiers field wiring.
6. Use the 1KHZ_TONE switch again and verify that the
output level remains the same. Readjust the amplifiers gain
pot if necessary.
7. Disconnect the amplifiers field wiring.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each amplifier in the cabinet.
9. Reconnect the field wiring for all the amplifiers in the
cabinet.

Design considerations
Your audio system will work best if the prerecorded tones and
messages have roughly the same volume, or amplitude. The
process of establishing a common maximum amplitude is
sometimes called normalizing.
We suggest that you normalize your tones and messages to a
maximum amplitude of 1 V peak-to-peak, or an average of 0.7
Vrms.
The SDU does not contain a tool for normalizing your audio
clips, so you'll need to use a sound editor to normalize the clips
before you import them into the SDU database.
The audio clips included in the EST3 Support Library CD have
already been normalized.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.49

Installation

Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output

The CDR-3 Zone coder can be connected to the 3-ASUs AUX
input to provide a coded or march time tone to the audio system.
Refer to Figure 5-11. If youre connecting a CDR-3 to a serial
port that is shared with a PT-1S printer, you must connect both
devices using an IOP3A, as shown in the wiring diagram in this
topic.

What you will need

An initial startup version of the project database that contains a
switch programmed to turn the amplifiers onto the Auxiliary
channel. See Creating an initial startup version of the project
database.
An RMS voltmeter (Fluke 83 or equivalent)

Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input

The 3-ASU auxiliary input gain adjustment is critical to the
operation of this application. Before adjusting the 3-ASU, set
each zoned amplifier module in the cabinet for their configured
RMS output level. See Adjusting amplifier output levels.
To adjust the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input

1. Connect the coded tone output on the CDR-3 directly to the

3-ASU auxiliary input by bypassing the duration relay.
2. Set the 3-ASU auxiliary input gain pot to the mid-range
position.
3. Determine which zoned amplifier module requires the
highest gain adjustment (the module whose gain adjustment
pot is turned the most counter-clockwise). Use this amplifier
as the worst-case amplifier.
4. Disconnect the field wiring from all the amplifiers in the
cabinet except for the worst-case amplifier. This is to
prevent the CDR-3s supervisory tone from being broadcast
throughout the premises.
5. Place an RMS meter across the worst-case amplifiers TB2
NAC/B+ and NAC/B- terminals.
6. Press the AUX_INPUT_ADJ switch. This places the coders
supervisory tone onto the Auxiliary channel. The
supervisory tone occurs approximately every 5 seconds.
7. Adjust the 3-ASUs auxiliary input gain pot until the RMS
meter displays the amplifiers configured output level (22-28

5.50

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Vrms or 65-75 Vrms). Turning the pot clockwise increases

the gain while counter-clockwise decreases the gain.
8. Press the AUX_INPUT_ADJ switch a second time to restore
the input.
9. Reconnect the coded tone output of the CDR-3 back through
the duration relay.
10. Reconnect the field wiring to the remaining amplifier
modules.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.51

Installation

CPU
TB2
NETWORK
OUT
IN
A
A
B
B

Note: Connect 3-ASU output to

AUDIO A OUT +/- for single cabinet
applications.
AUDIO
A IN

AUDIO
A OUT

AUDIO
B IN

AUDIO
B OUT

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

3-PSMON
C
O
M
1

R
X
2

AUXILIARY POWER

C
O
M
2

R
T
S
2

T
X
2

TB1

DB25 male connector to

PT-1S Printer (rear view)

JB4

JB1

3
2
1

TB1

UP

SW1

TB2

IOP3A

JB2
JB3

TB3

10 k EOL
TEMPORL TONE
EARTH GRND
24 VDC
AUDIO DATA TELEPHONE PAGE
OUT
PRIMARYSECONDARY

REMOTE MIC
KEY

AUX

COMMON

AUDIO

RS232 INPUT

TB1

47 k EOL

PRINT SUPV
TRBLE OUT

3-ASU

CODED TONE

10 k EOL

SIGA-CT1

Note: Refer to the CDR-3

installation sheet for SW1
settings.

Note: Configure the SIGA-CT1

as a non-latching input circuit
with the Monitor device type.

From
24 Vdc NAC signal
power source
To next
device

DURATION

From Signature
controller or
previous device

CDR-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW1

JP2

TEMP
BELL
CODE

JP1

[CDR3_ASU.CDR]

To
24 Vdc notification
appliance circuit

Figure 5-11: Application wiring diagram

5.52

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote

Diagnostics Utility
Using the Remote Diagnostics Utility requires that you connect
an external modem to a CPU equipped with a 3-RS232 option
card.
Some applications may require that the modem be permanently
mounted. The following is a suggested method for mounting a
modem connected to the CPU. First you will need to obtain the
following parts

MFCA accessory enclosure

SIGA-MP1 mounting plate

2 cable ties long enough to go around the modem and

through the slots on the SIGA-MP1

To mount the modem:

1. Mount the MFCA enclosure back box at an acceptable

location within reach of the panel. Refer to Figure 5-12.
2. Secure the modem to the SIGA-MP1 with the 2 cable ties.
3. Screw the SIGA-MP1 to the MFCA enclosure back box.
4. Connect all modem wiring. Refer to the technical
documentation that came with the modem for wiring
connections.
RS-232 wiring must maintain a 1/4-in minimum separation
between nonpower-limited wiring.
5. Screw the MFCA cover to the back box.
6. Attach the modem RS-232 wires to the CPU serial port
terminals. The serial port must be configured for Remote
Diagnostics in the project database. See below.

CPU
TB2
R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O
M
1

R
X
2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

Modem serial cable

DB-25 male connector (rear view)

to modem RS-232 connector

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.53

Installation

6
7
1
3
2
Modem
8

MFCA/Modem Installation

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SIGA-MP1 mounting plate

Slotted pan head screw, #6-32X3/8
Lock washer, #6
MFCA Enclosure
Quick opening screw #362219
Conduit knockout
Tamper switch mounting screws
Cable ties

Figure 5-12: Suggested modem installation using MFCA and

SIGA-MP1

5.54

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Installation

Running the RPM and distributing profiles

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) is an add-on tool that
works with the SDU. The RPM lets you:

Create a description of the companies and buildings at a site

Assign security and access control devices to companies and

buildings

Specify a primary company (owner) for each CRC

Allocate device resources among companies that share the

devices

This information is displayed in a two-pane window that

includes a tree structure and a data table. The tree structure
shows the organization of companies and buildings and the
assignment of partitions and devices to the buildings. The data
table shows the labels, properties, and allocation numbers for the
current tree selection. You could think of this as the overall
resource profile for the project.
The RPM lets you export resource profiles for individual
companies. These are later imported into the Access Control
Database (ACDB) and Keypad Display Configuration (KDC)
programs.
Once imported, the profiles determine what the users see and
control when creating their portions of the security or access
control system.
To create and distribute resource profiles, you follow these
general steps:
1. Enter company and installer contact information.
2. Create buildings and assign them to companies.
3. Assign partitions and devices to the buildings for each
company.
4. Allocate device resources to each company.
5. Export a resource profile for each company.
The RPM includes a Mass Assign function to help you establish
a uniform baseline allocation of resources. A Summary display is
available so you can review and print the profile in several
different forms.
When your project includes security or access control
applications, run the RPM and distribute resource profile
diskettes to the ACDB and KDC users.
Refer to the SDU Online Help for details on these steps. Refer to
the Card Reader Controller (CRC) Technical Reference Manual
for details on configuring CRCs.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

5.55

Installation

5.56

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 6

Power-up and testing

Summary

This chapter provides information and procedures necessary to

perform initial system power-up and acceptance testing.
Content
Cabinet power-up procedure 6.3
Initial power-up 6.3
Runtime and system errors 6.4
Introduction 6.4
Runtime errors 6.4
System errors 6.5
Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6.6
Introduction 6.6
Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6.7
Primary power supplies 6.7
Booster power supplies 6.7
CPU with LCD module 6.8
3-RS232 card installed in CPU 6.10
3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class B configuration 6.10
3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class A configuration 6.11
3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module 6.11
3-SSDC(1) Signature Driver Controller module 6.11
3-AADC(1) Addressable Analog Driver Controller
module 6.12
3-OPS Off-premises Signaling module 6.12
3-ASU Audio Source Unit 6.14
3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit 6.14
3-ZAxx Audio Amplifiers 6.16
Control/display modules 6.16
Amplifier transfer panel (ATP) 6.17
Detector, input module, and output module testing 6.18
Signature Series detectors and bases on a 3-SSDC(1)
module circuit 6.18
Addressable analog detectors on a 3-AADC(1) Module
circuit 6.19
Traditional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to 3-IDC8/4
modules 6.19
Conventional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to SIGAUM modules 6.19
Signature series input modules 6.20
Signature series output modules 6.20
Initiating device testing 6.21
Manual stations 6.21
Nonrestorable heat detectors 6.21
Restorable heat detectors 6.21

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.1

Power-up and testing

Waterflow switches 6.21
Notification appliance testing 6.23
Visual devices 6.23
Speakers 6.23
Bells and horns 6.23
Record of completion 6.24

6.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Cabinet power-up procedure

Initial power-up
1. Energize AC power at 3-PPS/M (-230) Power Supply and
the 3-BPS/M (-230) Booster Power Supplies.
2. Connect batteries to the 3-PPS/M (-230) Power Supply and
the 3-BPS/M (-230) Booster Power Supplies.
While the CPUs microprocessor is initializing, the LCD
displays status messages.
3. Connect the download cable assembly between the SDU
computer and CPU connector J5.
4. Using the SDU, download the CPU database into the panel
controller. Refer to the next topic, Runtime and system
errors, should error messages be displayed on the LCD
module.
5. If an Audio Source Unit is part of the system, its database
must be downloaded in addition to the CPU database. For
best download performance, we suggest you connect directly
to the 3-ASU/FT module and download its database in
single-step mode.
6. Clear up any network communications faults between
cabinets.
7. If any Signature controller modules are installed as part of
the system, their individual databases must be downloaded in
addition to the CPU database. You will need to restart the
network for these changes to be effective.
8. Correct all the circuit faults.
9. Test the system as described in the next section.
Note: Remember that for a network system, youll need to make
the initial download to each CPU separately, to establish the
correct cabinet numbers. After the initial download, all further
downloads can be made from a single panel via the network.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.3

Power-up and testing

Runtime and system errors

Introduction
There are two major categories of errors which can occur when
configuring a database for the network. The System Definition
Utility program is used to set up the contents of each cabinet.
Once all the cabinets have been defined, devices labeled, and
rules written, all this information is cross checked against itself.
This process is called compiling the program. If there are
incorrectly written rules, unreferenced input or output devices or
other problems with the design, the compiler will generate a list
of errors. These errors must be corrected using the SDU.
When the data has been properly compiled, the data is in a form
that the CPU memory can receive. Sending this information to
the memory of the various CPUs making up the network is
called downloading. If an error occurs during the download
process, it is referred to as a runtime error.

Runtime errors
There are a number of reasons that errors may occur when
downloading data into the CPU controllers. Initially, certain
errors are to be expected, as the network database is loaded in
steps. Until all portions of the database are properly entered into
memory, errors will be generated. During initial system
configuration, this is to be expected. Most of these errors will
resolve themselves as the system configuration progresses.
A second source of download errors is a mismatch between the
cabinet configuration in the SDU and the actual hardware
installation. The most common cause for this error is typically
due to the installation of a local rail module in the wrong rail
position. Another common cause is the installation of the wrong
type module in the rail. Misidentification of an entire cabinet can
also cause this type of error.
A third source of download error can occur after the cabinets
have been initially downloaded. After the initial downloads, all
subsequent downloads can be done using the network data
circuit. The third type of error is primarily caused by
communications problems between cabinets.

6.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Table 6-1: Download errors

Error message

Possible cause

Unable to perform operation

General error. Restart CPU

Busy signal

System currently busy. Wait, then retry

Password Invalid

Incorrect or invalid password entered

Size parameter trouble

Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry

Storage media trouble

Problem with memory components. Swap module and retry.

Checksum error in packet

Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry

Device type error

Conflict between SDU download setting and connected device

type

Parcel #

Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry

Inaccessible panel

SDU program can not see the panel. Check network wiring

Session in progress

System is busy. Wait, then retry

Write protect

Write protect switch on 3-ASUMX is on

Erase program trouble

Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry

Block number

Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry

Version mismatch

Firmware downloaded does not agree with version setting

Note: If you are experiencing frequent problems downloading to
a 3-CPU, low signal levels from the SDU computer may be the
cause. The Buffered RS-232 Communications Cable, P/N
SDU-CBL, may be used to correct signal level problems. Do not
use this cable with the CPU.

System errors
The CPU does not send data to the SDU program. Except for
problems with the communications between the CPU and the PC
running the SDU program, the majority of problems with the
runtime process are annunciated on the LCD modules display.
Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Troubleshooting for system
error codes and their possible causes.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.5

Power-up and testing

Initial and reacceptance test procedures

Introduction
Once the system has been wired, programmed, and the circuit
faults corrected, all installed components should be tested as a
system, to insure proper operation.
The initial system check is designed to verify that all
components of the system are installed and operating as
designed. Verifying that the system was designed and installed
according to specifications requires all aspects of the system to
be exercised and the results verified. Where test results differ
from those expected, corrective action must be taken.
Before commencing testing, notify all areas where the alarm
sounds and off-premises locations that receive alarm and trouble
transmissions that testing is in progress.
Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the
protected premises for a period of at least five (5) years.
Required Tools:

Slotted screwdriver, insulated

Digital multimeter
12inch (30.5 cm) jumper lead with alligator clips
Panel door key

A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be

made at regular intervals, in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC
524 requirements. These requirements are covered in the chapter
on preventive maintenance.

6.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Control and emergency communications equipment testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be
performed on the equipment installed in each cabinet connected
to the system. These procedures are designed to test the
hardware and its installation. The applications programming will
be tested later.
Note: The network configuration information must be
downloaded into the network and Audio Source Unit, using the
System Definition Utility (SDU) program, before starting testing.

Primary power supplies

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Verify adequate separation between power-limited and
nonpower-limited wiring. Refer to NFPA 70, article 760, of
the National Electrical Code.
3. Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for
the application.
4. With the batteries disconnected, verify that the supplys full
alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the
batteries connected.
5. With the batteries connected, disconnect the AC source and
verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated, and that
the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries.
6. Verify that the battery charger properly charges the batteries
connected to both the primary and booster power supplies to
80% capacity within 24 hours.

Booster power supplies

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Verify adequate separation between power-limited and
nonpower-limited wiring.
3. Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for
the application.
4. With the batteries disconnected, verify that the supplys full
alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the
batteries connected.
5. With the batteries connected, disconnect the AC source and
verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated, and that
the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.7

Power-up and testing

CPU with LCD module

1. Verify the module is properly seated in all four rail
connectors and secured with the four snap rivets. Verify that
removable terminal strips TB1 and TB2 are firmly seated.
2. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
3. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed on the
LCD modules display, and the Power LED is on.
4. Activate the lamp test and verify all lamps operated as
follows:
Select the Command Menus button to obtain the Main Menu
screen.
Select Test to obtain the Test Menu screen, then select Lamp
Test.
5. Initiate a fire alarm and verify the following: the alarm LED
flashes, the Alarm relay transfers, the correct device message
appears at the top of the LCD window, the active point
counter increments, the event sequence indicates a 1, the
active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display
indicates A001, the event type indicates fire alarm, and the
local panel buzzer sounds.
Press the Alarm Silence switch and verify that the required
notification appliances are silenced and the Alarm Silence
LED lights.
Press the Panel Silence switch to verify that the panel buzzer
silences and the Panel Silence LED lights.
Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED
lights steady.
Press the Details switch and verify that the alarm devices
message, if any, is displayed. If a printer is connected to the
CPU, verify that all specified information appears on the
printer.
6. 6Initiate a second fire alarm and verify that: it appears at the
bottom of the LCD window, the active point counter
changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active
Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates
A002, the event type indicates fire alarm, the Alarm LED
flashes again, the local panel buzzer resounds, and the first
Alarm message remains at the top of the LCD window. Press
the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED
lights steady.
7. Initiate a third fire alarm and verify that: its message appears
at the bottom of the LCD window, the active point counter

6.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

changes, the event sequence indicates a 3, the active

Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates
A003, the event type indicates fire alarm, and the local panel
buzzer resounds, and the first alarm message remains at the
top of the LCD window. Press the Alarm queue switch and
verify that the Alarm LED lights steady.
8. Use the previous and next message switches to verify that
you can scroll through all three messages in the alarm queue,
as indicated by the event sequence window.
9. Press the Reset switch. Verify that all initiating devices reset
and that all panel indicators clear except the power LED.
10. Initiate an active Monitor condition and verify that: the
Monitor LED flashes, the correct active Monitor device
message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD,
the active point counter changes, the event sequence
indicates a 1, the active Monitor events counter at the
bottom of the display indicates M001, and the event type
indicates Monitor. Press the Monitor queue switch and verify
that the Monitor LED lights steady. Initiate a second active
Monitor condition and verify that the first Monitor message
remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second
Monitor event message appears at the bottom of the display,
the active point counter changes, the event sequence
indicates a 2, the active Monitor events counter at the
bottom of the display indicates M002.
11. Initiate an active Trouble condition and verify that: the
Trouble LED flashes, the correct active Trouble device
message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD,
the local panel buzzer sounds, the Trouble relay transfers,
the active point counter changes, the event sequence
indicates a 1, the active Trouble events counter at the
bottom of the display indicates T001, and the event type
indicates Trouble. Press the Trouble queue switch and verify
that the Trouble LED lights steady. Press the Panel Silence
switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel
Silenced LED lights. Initiate a second active Trouble
condition and verify that the first Trouble message remains
at the top of the LCD window, that the second Trouble event
message appears at the bottom of the display, the active
point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2,
the active Trouble events counter at the bottom of the
display indicates T002.
12. Initiate an active Supervisory condition and verify that the
Supervisory LED flashes, the correct active Supervisory
device message appears in the top and bottom windows of
the LCD, the local panel buzzer sounds, the Supervisory
relay transfers, the active point counter changes, the event

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.9

Power-up and testing

sequence indicates a 1, the active Supervisory events

counter at the bottom of the display indicates S001 and the
event type indicates Supervisory. Press the Supervisory
queue switch and verify that the Supervisory LED lights
steady. Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel
buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights. Initiate a
second active Supervisory condition and verify that the first
Supervisory message remains at the top of the LCD window,
that the second Supervisory event message appears at the
bottom of the display, the active point counter changes, the
event sequence indicates a 2, the active Supervisory events
counter at the bottom of the display indicates S002.
13. Initiate an active fire Alarm, verify that alarm LED flashes,
the correct fire alarm message appears in the top and bottom
windows of the LCD the active point counter changes, the
event sequence indicates a 1, the active fire alarm events
counter at the bottom of the display indicates A001 and the
event type indicates fire alarm. Press the Alarm queue switch
and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady. Press the Panel
Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the
Panel Silenced LED lights. Initiate a second fire Alarm
condition and verify that the first fire Alarm message
remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second fire
Alarm event message appears at the bottom of the display,
the active point counter changes, the event sequence
indicates a 2, the active fire alarm events counter at the
bottom of the display indicates A002.
14. Press the Reset switch and verify that all devices reset and
the panel returns to the normal condition.

3-RS232 card installed in CPU

1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and
secured with the snap rivet.
2. Verify that the baud rate of the peripheral device connected
to the port matches the port setting as set using the SDU
program.
3. Check the printer operation by initiating an active condition
on the system or generating a system report via the keypad.

3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class B

configuration
1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and
secured with the snap rivet.

6.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

2. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the

status command to verify all connected cabinets are
communicating over the network.
3. Disconnect the network data communications wiring
(TB2-17/18 & 19/20) from the cabinet with the primary
LCD module, and verify that all the other system cabinets
connected to the network appear in the trouble queue.

3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class A

configuration
1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and
secured with the snap rivet.
2. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the
status command to verify all connected cabinets are
communicating over the network.
3. Disconnect the network data communications wiring
(TB2-17/18 & 19/20) from the cabinet with the primary
LCD module and verify that a Class A network
communications fault is annunciated. Repeat step 2 to verify
that all connected cabinets still communicate over the
network.

3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module

1. Familiarize yourself with the circuit configuration of the
individual module to be tested. Remember, modules of the
same type can be configured differently.
2. For circuits configured as initiating device circuits (IDCs),
activate the circuit by shorting the circuits two terminals.
Verify that the appropriate message appears in the proper
message queue. Disconnect the circuit or EOL resistor.
Verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble
message queue.
3. For circuits configured as Notification Device Circuits
(NACs), turn on the circuit by activating an IDC
programmed to turn on the NAC, or use the activate output
device command via the keypad. Verify that the circuit
activates properly. Restore the circuit. Disconnect the circuit
or EOL resistor. Verify that a Trouble message appears in
the Trouble message queue.

3-SSDC(1) Signature Driver Controller module

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail
connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that
removable terminal strips TB1 and TB2 are firmly seated.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.11

Power-up and testing

2. Verify the wiring to all Signature devices.

3. Map the SDC circuit by reading the device data; adjusting,
modifying, and accepting devices as required; writing the
information back to the devices; and rereading the device
data.
4. With no map errors displayed, put an input device on the
circuit in the active mode, and verify the appropriate
message is displayed on the LCD module. Put the input
device in the Trouble mode and verify that the correct
Trouble message is displayed.
Note: Individual device testing will be done later.

3-AADC(1) Addressable Analog Driver Controller

module
1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail
connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that
removable terminal strip TB1 is firmly seated.
2. Verify the wiring to all addressable analog devices.
3. Read the addressable analog circuit device data; adjusting,
modifying, and accepting devices as required; writing the
information back to the addressable analog module.
4. With no errors displayed, put an input device on the circuit
in the active mode, and verify the appropriate message is
displayed on the LCD module. Put the input device in the
Trouble mode and verify that the correct Trouble message is
displayed.
Note: Individual device testing will be done later.

3-OPS Off-premises Signaling module

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail
connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that
removable terminal strip TB1 is firmly seated.
2. Familiarize yourself with the configuration of the module to
be tested.
3. If the module is connected to a municipal box or central
station, advise the appropriate parties that testing is in
progress.
4a. Local Energy Municipal Box (City-Tie) configuration: With
the municipal box connected between TB1-2 and TB1-3,
open the circuit. (Note: You can temporarily substitute a
15, 2W resistor for the municipal box.) Verify that the
module Trouble activates and the appropriate Trouble
message appears in the Trouble message queue. Reconnect

6.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

the circuit and initiate an active fire alarm. You should

measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1-3 (+) and TB1-4 (-).
Press the panel Reset switch, and wait for the system to
reset. Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving
station.
If you activate the municipal box, it will indicate
Trouble until rewound.

Note:

4b. Single Reverse Polarity Circuit (Old Style) configuration:

Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1-5 (+) and
TB1-6 (-), paying attention to polarity. Create a Trouble
condition on the panel. Verify that 0 volts appears between
TB1-5 (+) and TB1-6 (-). Verify that the modules Trouble
relay activates, the appropriate Trouble message appears in
the Trouble message queue, and that the receiving station
receives the Trouble indication. Open the circuit wired
between TB1-5 and TB1-6. Verify that the receiving station
receives the Trouble indication.
Initiate an active fire alarm. You should measure 20 to 25
volts between TB1-5 (-) and TB1-6 (+), paying attention to
the polarity change. Verify receipt of the alarm at the
municipal receiving station.
4c. Three Reverse Polarity Circuit (New Style) configuration:
Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1-5 (+) &
TB1-6 (-), between TB1-7 (+) & TB1-8 (-), between TB1-9
(+) & TB1-10 (-), paying attention to polarity. Create a
Trouble condition on the panel. Verify that 20 to 25 volts
appears between TB1-8 (+) and TB1-8 (-). Verify that the
modules Trouble relay activates, the appropriate Trouble
message appears in the Trouble message queue, and that the
receiving station receives the Trouble indication. Open the
circuit wired between TB1-5 and TB1-6. Verify that the
receiving station receives a circuit fault indication. Open the
circuit wired between TB1-7 and TB1-8. Verify that the
receiving station receives a circuit fault indication. Open the
circuit wired between TB1-9 and TB1-10. Verify that the
modules Trouble relay activates and the appropriate Trouble
message appears in the Trouble message queue, and that the
receiving station receives a circuit fault indication.
Initiate an active fire alarm. You should measure 20 to 25
volts between TB1-5 (-) and TB1-6 (+), paying attention to
the polarity change. Verify receipt of the alarm at the
municipal receiving station.
Initiate an active Supervisory condition. You should measure
20 to 25 volts between TB1-9 (-) and TB1-10 (+), paying
attention to the polarity change. Verify receipt of the
Supervisory condition at the municipal receiving station.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.13

Power-up and testing

3-ASU Audio Source Unit

1. Verify that the 3-ASU is installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. The audio sub-system messages and configuration
information must be downloaded into the Audio Source
Unit, using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program,
before starting testing. Verify that the 3-ASUMX expansion
card, if used, is firmly seated in its connector.
3. Verify the wiring to all devices.
4. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the
Status command to verify all amplifiers are communicating
over the network.
5. Disconnect the network audio communications wiring
(TB1-1/2) from the 3-ASU, and verify that all the audio
amplifiers connected to the network appear in the Trouble
queue. Restore the connection.
6. If a supervised remote microphone is used, disconnect the
remote microphone wiring (TB1-11 & TB1-12) from the
3-ASU. Verify a remote microphone trouble is annunciated.
7. Press the All Call switch on the front of the 3-ASU. Verify
the All Call LED next to the switch lights. Remove the
microphone from its bracket, press the Push-To-Talk (PTT)
switch. Verify that that the preannouncement tone (if
configured) sounds, followed by the Ready to Page LED
lighting. Speak into the microphone and verify that the Page
Level Meter is operational, and the message is being
transmitted over all speakers.

3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit

1. Verify that the 3-FTCU is installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Verify the wiring to all devices. The SIGA-CC1 should be
set to personality code 6.
3. Verify that the 3-FTCU display indicates: 0 Calls Pending
and Unit: OK.
4. Take the master handset off-hook. Verify that the display
indicates: Handset off hook.. Replace the master handset
on-hook.
5. Take a firefighter telephone off-hook (plug a phone in a
phone jack). Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the
display indicates 1 Calls Pending, the location of the
incoming call is displayed in reversed text, and 0 calls
connected is shown on the display. Silence the buzzer by

6.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

pressing the ACK switch. Press the Connect switch. Verify

that the display indicates: 0 calls pending, 1 calls
connected, and the location of the connected call is
displayed in reversed text. Converse over the phone
connection to verify clear, noise free communications.
Take a second firefighter telephone on a different circuit
off-hook. Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the
display indicates 1 Calls Pending, the location of the
incoming call is displayed in reversed text, and 1 calls
connected is shown in the display. Silence the buzzer by
pressing the ACK switch. Press the Connect switch. Verify
that the display indicates: 0 calls pending, 2 calls
connected, the location of the second connected call is
displayed in reversed text, the location of the first call is
displayed in normal text below the second call location.
Converse over the phone connection to verify clear, noise
free communications.
Press the Review Connected switch, moving the reversed
text to the first calls location message. Without hanging up
the first telephone, press the Disconnect switch. Verify the
display indicates: 1 Calls Pending, the location of the call
being disconnected is displayed in reversed text at the top of
the screen, and 1 calls connected is shown in the display.
Hang up the first telephone. Verify that the display indicates:
0 Calls Pending and 1 calls connected.
6. Repeat Step 5, connecting five (5) phones simultaneously,
and verify acceptable voice quality.
7. Press the All Call and Page by Phone switches on the 3-ASU
Audio Source Unit. When the Ready to Page LED lights
steady, speak into the telephone still connected, and verify
that the telephones audio is distributed throughout the
facility. Press the Disconnect switch on the 3-FTCU, and
hang up the master and remote phones.
8a. Class A telephone riser configuration: Disconnect the
telephone riser wiring (TB1-2 & TB1-2) or (TB1-3 &
TB1-4) from the 3-FTCU, and verify that a riser trouble
message appears in the Trouble queue. Take a firefighter
telephone off-hook (plug a phone in a phone jack). Verify
that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the display indicates 1
Calls Pending, the location of the incoming call is displayed
in reversed text, and 0 calls connected is shown in the
display. Restore the connection.
8b. Class B telephone riser configuration: Disconnect the
telephone riser wiring (TB1-1 & TB1-2) from the 3-FTCU,
and verify that a riser trouble message appears in the Trouble
queue. Restore the connection.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.15

Power-up and testing

9. Disconnect each phone station/jack station, and verify that a

Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the
connections.

3-ZAxx Audio Amplifiers

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail
connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that
removable terminal strips are firmly seated.
2. Verify that the 3-ASU is installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
3. If wired with a backup amplifier, verify that the backup
amplifiers wattage is equal to or greater than the wattage of
any primary amplifier it can replace. If mixing 15-, and
30-watt amplifiers with 20-, and 40-watt amplifier modules,
make sure the back up amplifier is 20 or 40 watts, whichever
is required.
4. Verify that the EVAC and Page signals are available at the
speakers
5. Create an amplifier fault. Verify backup amplifier
substitution.
6. Class B amp output configuration: Disconnect the modules
audio output wiring (TB2-7 & TB2-8) from the 3-ZAxx, and
verify that the appropriate amplifier Trouble message
appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection.
7. Class B supplementary NAC output configuration (3-ZA20
& 3-ZA40 only): Disconnect the modules supplementary
notification appliance circuit wiring (TB2-3 & TB2-4) from
the 3-ZAxx, and verify that the appropriate Trouble message
appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection. Short
the modules supplementary notification appliance circuit
wiring (TB2-3 & TB2-4) from the 3-ZAxx, and verify that
the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble
queue. Remove the short.

Control/display modules
1. Verify that the display(s) are properly seated in the module
and secured with the four snap rivets. Verify that the ribbon
cable between the display and its host module is firmly
seated on both ends.
2

Activate the lamp test and verify all lamps operated as

follows:
Select the Command Menus button to obtain the Main Menu
screen.

6.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Select Test to obtain the Test Menu screen, then select Lamp
Test.
2. Perform a functional switch test

Amplifier transfer panel (ATP)

1. Disconnect power amplifier output. Verify amplifier/riser
trouble annunciated on panel. Restore connection.
2. Initiate an All Call page. Verify that audio is available on all
power amplifier outputs.
3. If back up amplifiers provided, create an amplifier failure
and verify backup amp operates properly.
4. Disconnect AC power from amplifier rack. Initiate an All
Call page. Verify that audio is available on all power
amplifier outputs.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.17

Power-up and testing

Detector, input module, and output module testing

The procedures listed in this section should be performed on the
detectors, input modules, output modules, and related accessories
connected to each cabinet. These procedures are designed to test
the devices and the network applications programming.
Note: The network configuration, Signature Control module
information must be downloaded into the network and Audio
Source Unit, using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program,
before starting testing.

Every circuit connected to the EST3 system should be visited,

and manually activated during the installation process to verify
that:
1. The installed location meets proper engineering practices.
2. The location annunciated by the system agrees with the
physical location of the device.
3. That the activated device initiates the correct system
response.
Duct detectors should be tested to verify that both minimum and
maximum airflow requirements are met.

Signature Series detectors and bases on a 3SSDC(1) module circuit

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the
appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the
LCD module. Verify that the detector initiates the
appropriate system responses. If the detector is installed in a
relay base, verify that the bases relay function operates
correctly. If the detector is installed in an isolator base,
verify that the base isolates the required circuit segments.
Caution: Do not use magnets to test Signature series detectors.

Doing so may damage the detector electronics. Instead, use an

approved testing agent (e.g. canned smoke.)
3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested using an air
velocity test kit (6263, 6263-SG) to verify that
minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met.
4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the
appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the
LCD module.

6.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

5. After all detectors have been individually inspected, run a

Sensitivity report, using the Reports command.

Addressable analog detectors on a 3-AADC(1)

Module circuit
1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the
appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the
LCD module. Verify that the detector initiates the
appropriate system responses.
3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that
minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met.
4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the
appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the
LCD module.
5. After all detectors have been individually inspected, run a
Sensitivity report, using the Reports command.

Traditional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to

3-IDC8/4 modules
1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the
appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the
LCD module. Verify the detector circuit initiates the
appropriate system responses.
3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that
minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met.
4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the
appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is
displayed on the LCD module.

Conventional 2-wire smoke detectors connected

to SIGA-UM modules
1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Verify that jumper JP1 on each SIGA-UM module is set to
position 1/2.
3. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the
appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.19

Power-up and testing

LCD module. Verify the SIGA-UM initiates the appropriate

system responses.
4. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that
minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met.
5. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the
appropriate SIGA-UM Trouble and location message is
displayed on the LCD module.

Signature series input modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Individually activate each initiation device. Verify that the
appropriate circuit type and location message is displayed on
the LCD module. Verify that the circuit initiates the
appropriate system responses.
3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Signature series output modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted
workmanship standards.
2. Using the Activate Output command, individually activate
each output. Verify that the device responds appropriately.
3. For supervised output circuits, open up the circuit. Verify
that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is
displayed on the LCD module.
4. If the output is activated by one or more system inputs,
activate these inputs and verify the output function operates
appropriately.

6.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Initiating device testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be
performed on the initiating devices connected to the system, in
conjunction with the procedures in the topic Detector, input
module, and output module initial and reacceptance testing.
These procedures are designed to test the initiating devices and
the network applications programming.

Manual stations
1. Visual inspection
2. Activate mechanism
3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location
message is displayed on the LCD module. Verify the device
initiates the appropriate system responses.
4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Nonrestorable heat detectors

1. Visual inspection
2. Test mechanically and/or electrically
3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location
message is displayed on the LCD module. Verify the device
initiates the appropriate system responses.
4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Restorable heat detectors

1. Visual inspection
2. Activate detector
3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location
message is displayed on the LCD module. Verify the device
initiates the appropriate system responses.
4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Waterflow switches
1. Visual inspection

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.21

Power-up and testing

2. Activate sprinkler test valve. (Refer to Sprinkler system test

procedure.)
3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location
message is displayed on the LCD module. Verify the device
initiates the appropriate system responses.
4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

6.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Notification appliance testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be
performed on the notification appliances connected to the
system, in conjunction with the procedures in Detector, input
module, and output module initial and reacceptance testing.
These procedures are designed to test the notification appliances
and the network applications programming.

Visual devices
1. Visual Inspection
2. Activate the circuit. Verify all indicating appliances
operating properly.
3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Speakers
1. Visual Inspection
2. Activate the circuit. Verify all indicating appliances
operating properly.
3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

Bells and horns

1. Visual Inspection
2. Activate the circuit. Verify all indicating appliances
operating properly.
3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit
Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD
module.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.23

Power-up and testing

Record of completion
When the system has been tested and found to operate
satisfactorily, make a copy and fill out the Record of Completion
on the following pages, and mount it near the fire alarm panel or
give it to the building representative.

6.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Power-up and testing

Record of Completion

Page 1 of 2

Protected Property
Name:

Authority Having Jurisdiction:

Address:

Address:

Representative:

Phone:

Phone:

Record of System Installation

This system has been installed in accordance with the NFPA standards listed below, was inspected by __________________
on __________________, and includes the devices listed below, and has been in service since _______________ .
NFPA 72: Year ________; Ch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (circle all that apply)
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760
Manufacturer's Instructions
Other (specify):

Record of System Operation

All operational features and functions of this system were tested by __________on _________ and found to be operating properly and in
accordance with the requirements of:
NFPA 72: Year ________; Ch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 circle all that apply)
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760
Manufacturer's Instructions
Other (specify):
Signed:

Dated:

Organization:

System Software
System Firmware
Installed Revision:

Checksum:

Date:

Application Programming
Initial Program Installation:
Revisions & Reasons:

Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:

Programmed by (name):
Date of Programmer's Latest Factory Certification:
Data Entry Program Revision Used

Maintenance
Frequency of routine tests and inspections, if other than in accordance with the referenced NFPA standards:

System deviations from the referenced standards are:

(signed) for Central Station or Alarm Service Company

(title)

(date)

(signed) for representative of the authority having jurisdiction

(title)

(date)
[EST3ROC1.CDR]

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

6.25

Power-up and testing

Record of Completion
Initiating Devices and Circuits

Page 2 of 2

System & Service

(indicate quantity)
Manual Stations
Automatic Devices
Smoke Detectors:
Duct Detectors:
Waterflow Switches:
Other (list):

Ion

Photo

Ion

Photo

Combination Detectors
(circle active sensors)
Ion/Photo/Heat

NFPA 72 - Local

If alarm transmitted off premise, location(s) received:

Ion/Photo/Heat

NFPA 72 - Emergency Voice Alarm Service

# Voice/alarm channels:

Single:

# Installed speakers:

# speakers per zone:

Multiple:

# Telephones/jacks installed:

Supervisory Devices and Circuits

(indicate quantity)
Compulsory Guard's Tour comprised of ______ transmitter stations and
_______ intermdediate stations.
Sprinkler System
Valve supervisory devices
Building temperature points
Site water temperature points
Site water supply level points:

Electric Fire Pump

Fire pump power
Fire pump running
Phase reversal

Engine Driven Fire Pump

Selector in auto position
Control panel trouble
Transfer switches
Engine running

Other Supervisory Function(s)

(specify)

NFPA 72 - Auxiliary
Type of connection:
Local Energy:

Shunt:

Parallel Telephone:

Location/Phone # for receipt of signals:

NFPA 72 - Remote Station

Alarm:
Supervisory:

NFPA 72 - Proprietary
If alarms retransmitted off premise, location & phone of receiving organization:

Method of alarm retransmission:

Notification Appliances & Circuits

# Notification Appliance Circuits

inch

Prime Contractor:
Central Station Location:

Type and quantity of installed Notification Appliances

Bells
Speakers
Horns

NFPA 72 - Central Station

Visual Signals Type:

with audible
without audible

Other:

Method of transmission of alarms to central station:

McCulloh
Multiplex

One-Way Radio
Two-Way Radio

Digital Alarm Communicator

Others:

Method of transmission of alarms to public fire service comunications center:

1.

2.

Local Annunciator

Signaling Line Circuits

Quantity and Style of connected SLCs, per NFPA 72, Table 3-6.1
Quantity
Style

Power Supplies
Primary (main)
Nominal Voltage:
Current Rating:
Overcurrent protection:
Type:
Current rating:
Location:

Secondery (standby)
Storage battery
Amp-Hour rating:
Calculated for _____ hours of
system operation.
Dedicated generator
Location of fuel supply:

Emergency or standby system used to backup primary supply

Emergency system described in NFPA 70, Article 700
Legally required standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 701
Optional standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 702, meeting the
performance requirements of Article 700 or 701

[EST3ROC2.CDR]

6.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 7

Preventive maintenance

Summary

This chapter provides a listing of required scheduled

maintenance items and procedures.
Content
General 7.2
Preventive maintenance schedule 7.3
Signature device routine maintenance tips 7.5
Detectors 7.5
Modules 7.5
Signature detector cleaning procedure 7.6
System trouble and maintenance log 7.7

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

7.1

Preventive maintenance

General
Before commencing testing, notify all areas where the alarm
sounds and off premises locations that receive alarm and trouble
transmissions that testing is in progress.
Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the
protected premises for a period of at least five (5) years.
Required Tools:

Slotted Screwdriver, Insulated

Digital multimeter
1.1 k 1 W resistor
12 inch (30.5 cm) jumper lead with alligator clips
Panel Door Key

In addition, make sure you have the required system passwords.

If the system includes access control applications, you'll need a
construction card, or other valid access card.
A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be
made at regular intervals, in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC
524 requirements. This includes testing all alarm and supervisory
alarm initiating devices and circuits, and any off premise
connections.
Panel operation should be verified in the alarm, supervisory, and
trouble modes.
To ensure that the panel can be powered when primary power is
lost, the batteries should be periodically inspected, tested, and
replaced (as a minimum) every 4 years.

7.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance schedule

Preventive maintenance schedule
Component
Manual
stations

Testing
Interval

Test Procedure

Semiannually 1. Visual inspection

2. Put zone in Test mode
3. Activate mechanism
4. Verify proper IDC zone response

Non-restorable Semiannually 1. Visual inspection

heat detectors
2. Put zone in Test mode
3. Test mechanically and/or electrically
4. Verify proper IDC zone response
Restorable
Semiannually 1. Visual Inspection
heat detectors
2. Put zone in Test mode
3. Activate at least one detector on each IDC. All detectors on
each IDC must be tested within five years.
Smoke
detectors

Annually

1. Visual inspection
2. Put zone in test mode
3. Conduct a Functional test to verify proper IDC zone
response
4. Check sensitivity
5. Clean as required

Waterflow
switches

Every two
months

1. Put zone in Test mode

All initiating
device circuits

Annually

1. Enter Test mode

2. Activate sprinkler test valve. Refer to Sprinkler system test

procedure.
2. Activate IDC zone. Appropriate NACs should activate and
zone information should be annunciated.
3. Restore device and reset zone
4. Open the IDC field wiring. Trouble should be annunciated.
5. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing

Remote
annunciators

Annually

1. Verify all indicators operating properly.

Notification
appliances

Annually

1. Visual Inspection
2. Put panel in Alarm, Drill, or Test mode. Verify that all
indicating appliances are operating properly

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

7.3

Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance schedule

Component

Testing
Interval

Test Procedure

Panel LEDs
and trouble
buzzer

Annually

1. Illuminate all LEDs by pressing the Panel Silence and

Trouble Silence switches at the same time

Panel primary
power

Acceptance
1. Remove Primary AC power
and
2. Verify panel operates from battery
reacceptance
tests
3. Verify panel goes into trouble (6 second delay)

2. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing

4. Restore AC power at end of test

5. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
Panel
secondary
power

Acceptance
1. Remove primary AC power
and
2. Measure standby and alarm currents, and compare with
reacceptance
battery calculations to verify adequate battery capacity.
tests
3. Test under full load for 5 minutes
4. Measure battery voltage under full load (20.4 to 27.3 Vdc)
5. Restore AC power at end of test
6. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing

Panel trouble
signals

Annually

LCD clock

Each visit

1. Verify operation of system Trouble LED and trouble buzzer

2. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
Verify displayed time is correct. Reset clock if incorrect.

Supervisory
Semiannually 1. Put zone in Test mode
signal initiating
2. Operate valve
devices
3. Test pressure, temperature, and water level sensors per the
sprinkler system test procedure
Auxiliary
system offpremises fire
alarm signal
transmission

Monthly

Remote
system offpremises
waterflow
signal
transmission

Every two
months

7.4

1. Coordinate test with receiving location

2. Verify receipt of all transmitted signals
3. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
1. Coordinate test with receiving location
2. Verify receipt of all transmitted signals
3. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Preventive maintenance

Signature device routine maintenance tips

Detectors
When removing one detector at a time, wait 1 minute after
replacing the first detector before removing the next detector.
This gives the system time to recognize and re-map the first
detector before generating a trouble condition caused by
removing the second detector.

Modules
Signature modules should be visually inspected to insure the
physical installation is secure. Functional testing of the module
should be done regularly as required by the AHJ.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

7.5

Preventive maintenance

Signature detector cleaning procedure

Signature detectors may be cleaned using a conventional vacuum
cleaner with the detector cleaning tool (P/N SIGA-ST) installed
on the end of the suction hose (nominal 1.5 in. [3.8 cm] ID)
extension tubes. The tool creates a high velocity vortex
scrubbing action around the detector, removing loose dust and
debris which is subsequently drawn into the vacuum.
Note: In order to avoid false alarms, disable the detector being

cleaned before using the detector cleaning tool.

1. Disable the detector to prevent false alarms.
2. Use the conventional vacuum cleaner brush attachment to
remove any visible cobwebs etc. from the immediate area of
the detector.
3. Connect the detector cleaning tool to the suction hose.
4. Place the detector cleaning tool over the detector head for
approximately 10 seconds.
5. After the detector has been cleaned, Restore it to proper
operation.
6. Check the detectors sensitivity to verify the effectiveness of
the cleaning.

Place cleaning tool

over detector.

Detector
Cleaning
Tool

Connect to vacuum
cleaner hose.

[ACLEAN1.CDR]

Figure 7-1: Detector Cleaning Tool

7.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Preventive maintenance

System trouble and maintenance log

Date

Time

Event

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Initial

7.7

Preventive maintenance

7.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Chapter 8

Service and troubleshooting

Summary

This chapter provides a comprehensive set of procedures and

tables to aid certified technical personnel in servicing and
troubleshooting the system.
Content
Overview 8.3
Maintenance philosophy 8.3
Problem classification 8.3
Handling static-sensitive circuit modules 8.3
Removing or replacing circuit modules 8.4
Recommended spares list 8.4
Hardware problems 8.5
Identification 8.5
Isolation 8.5
Substituting hardware 8.5
Adding hardware 8.6
Downloading problems 8.6
Modules 8.7
Rail signals 8.7
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module 8.7
3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module 8.9
CPU Central Processor module 8.9
3-FIBMB fiber optic interface 8.13
Signature Controller modules 8.14
Control / display modules 8.14
Audio amplifier modules 8.15
3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module 8.16
3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module 8.16
3-LDSM Display Support module 8.17
3-MODCOM(P) Modem Communicator module 8.17
Common causes of problems 8.18
Audio components 8.20
3-ASU Audio Source Unit 8.20
3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit 8.21
SIGA audio amplifiers 8.21
Pseudo point descriptions 8.24
Signature data circuit (SDC) operation 8.35
Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8.37
Isolating circuit and device problems 8.37
Open circuit conditions 8.37
Short circuit conditions 8.38
Ground fault conditions 8.39
Substituting known good Signature series devices 8.41
Signature controller modules 8.47

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.1

Service and troubleshooting

Substituting Signature controller modules 8.47
Mapping errors 8.47
Device troubleshooting 8.49
Signature diagnostic tools 8.51
Using Signature diagnostics 8.51
Signature diagnostic sequence 8.52
Displaying mapping errors 8.52
Displaying device chain errors 8.55
Using the chain lists 8.57
Displaying message counters 8.57
Displaying device trouble 8.59
Displaying trouble tables 8.62
DSDC status 8.65
Introduction 8.65
Setting up the System Definition Utility program 8.65
Using DSDC status 8.65
Displaying the current SDC status 8.65
Displaying a log of current SDC status events 8.67
Displaying the SDC in-process progress chart 8.68
Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8.70
System definition utility 8.70
Problem solving hints 8.72
3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8.74
Substituting 3-AADC1 local rail modules 8.74
Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8.75
Wiring problems 8.77
Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring problems 8.78

8.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Overview
Maintenance philosophy
The EST3 life safety system consists of modular assemblies
utilizing surface mount technology (SMT) for easy installation
and maintenance. SMT provides high reliability but prohibits
component-level field repairs. For these and other reasons, the
maintenance philosophy consists of fault isolating to the circuit
card assembly, removing the defective circuit card, and then
replacing it with a spare.
Service and repair of EST3 system components centers around
the following assumptions:
1. Qualified technicians possessing a complete understanding
of the system hardware and functions will perform
maintenance.
2. Only certified maintenance technicians will service the
equipment.
3. Maintenance technicians will have a ready available supply
of replacement parts.

Problem classification
Problems with the system can generally be classified into two
categories: application programming problems and hardware
(including firmware) problems. Many times hardware problems
are identified by the system itself. Application programming
problems are typically suspected when an incorrect response
happens, or when a response fails to happen or happens at the
wrong time.

Handling static-sensitive circuit modules

Many of the circuit modules use components that are sensitive to
static electricity. To reduce the possibility of damaging these
components, take the following precautions when handling:
1. Use only approved grounding straps that are equipped with a
1 M resistive path to earth ground.
2. Always keep circuit modules in their protective antistatic
packaging. Remove only for inspection or installation.
3. Always hold circuit modules by the sides. Avoid touching
component leads and connector pins.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.3

Service and troubleshooting

Removing or replacing circuit modules

When removing or replacing circuit modules, always remember
to:
1. First disconnect the battery then remove AC power.
Removing or replacing circuit modules when power is
applied will damage the equipment.
2. Avoid applying excessive force to the snap-rivet fasteners
that lock the plug-in modules in place. If needed, use the
extraction tool provided in the hardware kit.

Recommended spares list

As a general guideline, 10% of the quantity installed or a
minimum of 1 each of the following installed equipment should be
available as spare:

Power supply
Local rail modules
Amplifiers (if no backup installed in system)
Printer ribbon

As a general guideline, 10% of the quantity installed or a

minimum of 3 each of the following installed equipment should be
available as spare:

Monitor modules
Control modules
Heat detectors
Ionization smoke detectors
Photoelectric smoke detectors
Base, detector
Duct detector filter kits
Breakglass replacement for pull stations
Breakglass replacement for warden stations
Horn, bell, strobe, and speaker

System batteries should be replaced at recommended intervals.

Stocking of spare batteries is not recommended because of
shelf-life limitations.

8.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Hardware problems
Identification
Hardware problems are typically identified by an intermittent or
total failure of a device.

Isolation
Hardware problems may be categorized as problems within an
equipment cabinet, and problems with field wiring and devices.
The quickest way to locate a hardware problem is by selectively
isolating portions of the system and observing the results of the
isolation. By selectively isolating smaller and smaller portions of
the system, hardware faults can usually be isolated. The suspect
component may then be replaced with a known good component,
and the results again observed.

Substituting hardware
Caution: Never install or remove a module while power is

applied to the cabinet.

The local rail modules in the EST3 system are microprocessor
based. The Signature driver controller module, Central Processor
Module (CPU) module, 3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Device
Controller module, and 3-ASU Audio Source Unit all have
flash memory, which is used to store the operating firmware.
The flash memory is empty when the module is shipped from the
factory. When the configuration database is downloaded into the
cabinet, each component using flash memory receives specific
information. This information includes the modules location in
the system and its configuration.
Note: Because the content of each module is specific to its
cabinet location, do not substitute 3-SSDC(1), CPU, 3-AADC1,
or 3-ASU modules without downloading the new cabinet
configuration database.

If you are substituting a Signature driver controller module, you

must also download the specific Signature circuit information
into the modules memory. If you are substituting a 3-AADC1
driver controller module, you must also download its specific
circuit configuration into its database. If you are substituting
3-ASU modules, you must also download the audio message
database directly into the 3-ASU.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.5

Service and troubleshooting

Rail module substitution and replacement rules

Rule 1: Modules must be replaced with modules of the same

model number.
Rule 2: LED / Switch Displays must be replaced with LED /
Switch Displays of the same model number.
Rule 3: Substitute modules must have an identical LED / Switch
Display installed as the module it replaces.
Rule 4: Substitute modules should be installed in the same rail
location as the module it is replacing.

Adding hardware
When hardware is added to a cabinet, a portion of the network
configuration database must also be changed. The extent of the
changes depends on the rule relationships between the added
component and the balance of the network. Revised copies of the
database must then be downloaded using the SDU.

Downloading problems
If you are experiencing frequent downloading problems, low
signal level from the download computer may be the cause. The
Buffered RS-232 Communication Cable, Catalog No.
SDU-CBL, may be used to correct signal level problems.
Note: Do not use the buffered RS-232 communication cable with
a CPU.

8.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Modules
Rail signals
The figure below shows the signals normally present on a pair of
chassis rails.
Note: The panel controller and the power supply monitor module
must be installed in order to measure the voltages indicated.
Top Rail
Pin
Function
1-2
+6.25 VDC
3
+Sense
4
-Sense
5
-Audio Data
6
+Audio Data
7
-Rail Data
8
+Rail Data
9 - 10 Not Used
11 - 14 Common
Bottom Rail
Pin
Function
1-4
+24 VDC
5
All Fail
6-9
Not Used
10 - 12 Ground

[3RAILSIG.CDR]

Top Rail
1

J9 BIN

J8 AIN
J9
J8

J11
J10

13

14

Bottom Rail
1

J10 AOUT

J11 BOUT

J8 CIN

J9 DIN
J9

J8

J11
J10

11

12

J10 COUT

J11 DOUT

The DC voltages can be checked with a digital meter. Data

signals on pins 7 and 8 of the top rail can be verified by looking
at the Receive (RX) and Transmit (TX) LEDs on any module
installed on the rail.

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The transmit (TX) and receive (RX) LEDs on the Primary Power
Supply Monitor Module should flicker, indicating normal two
way communication activity with the CPU.

TX RX
TX
RX

[PSMONLED.CDR]

If the 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply is used in conjunction

with one or more 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supplies, there is

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.7

Service and troubleshooting

interaction between the supplies. Under most conditions, a

defective power supply will be identified by the system, and
annunciated as a trouble. The system may continue to operate
nearly normally, as the battery connected to the faulty supply
will automatically be switched into the circuit, as the load
demands.
Table 8-1: Nominal primary and booster power supply
voltages
Test Point

Voltage

Rail Power

25 - 26.4 Vdc w/AC power on

Auxiliary Power

25 - 26.4 Vdc w/AC power on

Battery

27.3 V (battery under charge @ 25 C)

Table 8-2: Primary Power Supply module troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Supply will not operate from

AC line

1.

AC line fuse F2 (3.15A slow blow) open

2.

Rectified DC fuse F3 (3.15A slow blow) open

RX or TX LED OFF
No communication between
3-PSMON and CPU

1.

Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between

3-PSMON and 3-PPS

2.

3-PSMON Defective

3.

3-PPS Defective

1.

Excessive load causing supply to fold back

2.

Power Cable between 3-PSMON and 3-PPS loose or

defective

3.

Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back

1.

System in alarm mode

2.

Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-PPS open

3.

30 to 60 Ah battery installed, 10 to 29 Ah battery specified in

SDU

4.

Battery shorted

5.

Battery not wired to power supplies correctly (only wired to

BPS/M)

Auxiliary and Rail voltage low

Batteries will not charge

System will not operate on

batteries

1. Battery voltage below 18 Vdc. (system automatically turns off

when batteries too low to properly operate system)
2. Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-PPS open
3. Batteries connected before AC power energized
4. Battery temperature too high
5. Defective batteries

8.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module

The transmit (TX) and receive (RX) LEDs on the Booster Power
Supply Monitor Module should flicker, indicating normal two
way communication activity with the CPU.

TX RX
TX
RX

[PSMONLED.CDR]

The booster power supply voltages are indicated in Table 8-1.

Table 8-3 lists common problems with the booster power supply
and booster monitor module.
Table 8-3: Booster Power Supply module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Supply will not operate from

AC line

1. AC line fuse F2 (3.15A slow blow) open

RX or TX LED OFF
No communication between
3-BPSMON and CPU

1. Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between

3-BPSMON and 3-BPS

2. Rectified DC fuse F3 (3.15A slow blow) open

2. 3-BPSMON defective
3. 3-BPS defective

Auxiliary and Rail voltage low

1. Excessive load causing supply to fold back

2. Power Cable between 3-BPSMON and 3-BPS loose or
defective
3. Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back

System will not operate on

batteries

1. Battery voltage below 18 Vdc. (system automatically turns off

when batteries too low to properly operate system)
2. Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-BPS open
3. Batteries connected before AC power energized
4. Battery temperature too high
5. Defective batteries

CPU Central Processor module

The CPU controls all the communication and processing of
information for modules located in its cabinet. Token ring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.9

Service and troubleshooting

network communication between CPU modules in other cabinets

is also processed by the CPU. Network communication is
RS-485 when the 3-RS485 card is installed in CPU connector J2,
and fiber optic when the 3-FIBMB or 3-NSHM module is
connected to J2 of the CPU.
Network and audio data circuits

Figure 8-1 and Table 8-4 show the location and normal state of
the communication status LEDs on the CPU module.

N
C

N
O

N
O

TROUBLE

C
N
A
ALARM

N
C

N
O

N
C

SUP
TB1

Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
Rx3
Tx3

J1

A
+

NETWORK
AUDIO
OUT
A IN
A B IN B
- +
- +
-

AUDIO AUDIO
B IN
A OUT
+
- +

AUDIO
B OUT
+
-

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

[CPULEDS.CDR]

Figure 8-1: CPU module

Table 8-4: CPU LED indications

8.10

LED

Normal
state

Description

RX1

Flicker

Local Rail Receive Activity

TX1

Flicker

Local Rail Transmit Activity

RX2

Flicker

Network Data Ch A Receive Activity

TX2

Flicker

Network Data Ch A Transmit Activity

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

RX3

Flicker

Network Data Ch B Receive Activity

TX3

Flicker

Network Data Ch B Transmit Activity

EST3 network wiring alternates between channel A and channel

B, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Class B network siring one-line diagram

A B

A B

A B

CPU

CPU

CPU

Class A network wiring one-line diagram

A B

A B

A B

CPU

CPU

CPU

Figure 8-2: Network wiring one-line diagrams

RX1 and TX1 should flicker continuously, indicating normal

two-way CPU module to rail module communication activity.
When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class
B wiring, RX2, TX2, RX3, and TX3 on all panels except the first
and last should flicker continuously, indicating normal two-way
network communication activity on both data channels.
When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class
A wiring, RX2, TX2, RX3, and TX3 should flicker continuously,
indicating normal two way network communication activity on
data channels A, and B.
The network and audio riser data circuits are isolated at each
CPU module. This prevents a shorted data circuit from
interrupting communication on the entire circuit. Figure 8-3
shows typical Class B network data circuit.

5
3NETTS1.CDR

Figure 8-3: Class B network data circuit

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.11

Service and troubleshooting

When trying to isolate trouble on a network or audio data circuit,

remember that both shorted and open circuit segments will
interrupt communication between two CPU modules.
Figure 8-4 shows an open or short circuit fault between cabinets
3 and 4.
Circuit Fault
open or short

5
3NETTS2.CDR

Figure 8-4: Network data circuit fault

Either an open or shorted circuit will interrupt communication

between cabinets 3 and 4. The token ring network will
reconfigure and operate as two independent sub-networks, one
consisting of cabinets 1, 2, and 3; the second consisting of
cabinets 4 and 5.
Due to the isolation between cabinets, during a ground fault
condition, the number of potential circuits to be investigated is
limited to those originating from a single cabinet.
Table 8-5: CPU troubleshooting
Problem
RX1 or TX1 off

Possible cause
1. CPU not firmly seated in rail connectors
2. CPU failure

RX2, TX2 or RX3, TX3 off, or

both pairs off

1. (+) and (-) wires reversed.

2. Circuit not properly terminated
3. Network A and Network B circuits crossed
4. Improper wire installed
5

Ground fault

6. 3-RS485 card loose

RS-232 port (J5) inoperative

1. TX and RX wires reversed

2. CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched
3. PC improperly configured

Ancillary RS-232 port (TB2-1

to 4 or TB2-5 to 8) inoperative

1. TX and RX wires reversed.

2. CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched
3. Peripheral device off-line or improperly configured

8.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-5: CPU troubleshooting

Problem
RS-485 port (TB2 17 to 20)
inoperative

Possible cause
1. (+) and (-) wires reversed.
2. 3-RS485 card not seated properly
3. Network A and Network B circuits crossed
4. Improper wire

Power LED off, no characters

on display, switches
inoperative

1. No power to panel.
2. Ribbon cable between LCD and CPU loose or defective.
3. CPU defective
4

LCD defective

5. CPU not configured in SDU for LCD

All Module LEDs and switches
inoperative AND host module
working correctly.

1. Ribbon cable between display and CPU module loose or

defective
2. Display not configured in SDU
3. Display defective

Switch activation does not

perform the required function.

Display not defined in SDU database

2. Domain not configured correctly.

3-FIBMB fiber optic interface

Several models of the 3-FIB card are available to support
compatible operations with different models of the CPU.
3-FIB: Compatible with the 3-CPU.
3-FIBA: Compatible with the 3-CPU and 3-CPU1. The 3-FIBA
provides Class A audio when used with the 3-CPU1, but not
when used with the 3-CPU.
3-FIBMB: Compatible with both the 3-CPU1 and the 3-CPU3,
but not with the 3-CPU.
Note: If network communication must be maintained when the
node is powered down for service, connect a 12 V battery to J2
on the fiber optic interface card.

The LEDs on the 3-FIBMB interface board adjacent to the fiber

optic indicate circuit activity.
Test jumpers

Jumper JP1 is used to put the module in test mode. In the test
mode, the OUT ports transmit a constant signal, which can be
used to measure cable loss.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.13

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-6: 3-FIB troubleshooting

Symptom

Possible causes

No LED activity on any fiber

optic port

1. Ribbon cable between interface and electronics card loose,

Improperly installed, or broken.
2. Electronics card not properly seated in J2 of CPU.

No LED activity on IN fiber

optic port

1. Incorrect cable connected to port.

Steady on LED on IN fiber

optic port

1. Jumper JP1 left in test position.

Signature Controller modules

Please refer to Signature Component Troubleshooting Chapter
for complete information on Signature related troubleshooting.

Control / display modules

The information in this section applies to the following models
of control / display modules:
3-12/1RY

3-2RY

3-12/2RY

3-12SG

3-12SR

3-12SY

3-12/SIGY

3-12/S1RY

3-12/AS2Y

3-24G

3-24R

3-24Y

3-6/3S3L

3-6/3S1G2Y

3-6/S1GYR

The control / display modules operate independently of the host

module on which they are installed. The displays do use the host
modules electronics to communicate with the CPU.
The Lamp Test function (pressing Panel Silence and Alarm
Silence Switches simultaneously) will quickly isolate hardware
problems from programming problems with any display.
Table 8-7: Control / display module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Module LEDs and switches

inoperative AND host module
inoperative

1. No power to panel
2. Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or
defective
3. Display defective
4. Host module defective

8.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-7: Control / display module troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

All module LEDs and switches

inoperative AND host module
working correctly

1. Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or

defective
2. Display not configured in SDU
3. Display defective

LEDs respond incorrectly

1. Display not defined in SDU database

2. LED misidentified in SDU database
3. Rule governing LED operation not correctly written

Switch activation does not

perform the required function

1. Display not defined in SDU database

2. Switch misidentified in SDU database
3. Rule governing switch operation not correctly written

Audio amplifier modules

Table 8-8: 3-ZAxx Zoned Audio Amplifier module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Audio output level too low

1. Jumpers set for 25 Vrms when connected to a 70 Vrms

circuit
2. Gain adjusted too low
3. Input level to ASU too low

No or extremely low audio

output

1. Fuse blown

Audio level too high

1. Jumper set for 70 Vrms when connected to 25 Vrms circuit

2. Gain set too low

2. Gain adjusted too high
3. Input level to ASU too high

Amplifier current limiting

1. Audio circuit overloaded

2. Input level to ASU too high

Incorrect amplifier version

reported to CPU module

1. Jumpers installed incorrectly

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.15

Service and troubleshooting

3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module

Table 8-9: 3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Module in trouble

1. Master box circuit open or not reset

2. Reverse polarity circuit open
3. 3.6 k EOL resistor not installed on unused circuits

Remote receiver indicates

circuit trouble and does not
receive alarm

1. Circuit polarity reversed

2. Circuit open
3. Excessive circuit resistance
4. Incompatible receiver
5. Defective module

Remote receiver does NOT

indicate circuit trouble and
does not receive alarm

1. 3-OPS Not activated by panel (SDU database)

2. Incompatible receiver
3. Defective module

3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module

Table 8-10: 3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Module in trouble

1. 4.7 k EOL resistor not installed on unused IDC circuits

2. 15 k EOL resistor not installed on unused NAC circuits
3. No communication with CPU module
4. Module not defined in SDU database.
5. Field wiring connector not plugged into module

NAC output not working

1. Jumpers installed incorrectly

2. External source configured but not connected
3. Circuit folding back due to overload.
4. Circuit Silenced
5. Circuit shorted
6. Polarized device defective or reversed on circuit

IDC circuit not working

1. Incompatible 2-wire smoke detectors

2. Excessive wiring resistance or capacitance

8.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

3-LDSM Display Support module

Table 8-11: 3-LDSM Display Support module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

All Module LEDs and switches 1. Ribbon cable between display and 3-LDSM module loose or
inoperative and host module
defective
working correctly
2. Module not configured in SDU
3. Display not configured in SDU
4. Display defective

3-MODCOM(P) Modem Communicator module

Diagnostic aids

Two LEDs (DS1 and DS2) provide diagnostic information. The

activity of DS1 and DS2 during dialing and data transmission are
outlined in the following table.
Table 8-12: 3-MODCOM LED states and meanings
LED state

DS1 meaning

DS2 meaning

Off

No activity

No activity

On

Line 1 has been seized

Line 2 has been seized

Slow flash

Dialer or modem data is

being passed on Line 1

Dialer data is being passed on

line 2. (Modem data is passed
only on line 1.)

Slow flash (both)

Slow flash on both LEDs indicates an ongoing download of

application code or configuration code from CPU or SDU

Fast flash

Reflects ringing on Line 1.

(Flashing follows pattern
detected.)

N/A - line 2 does not have ring

detection

A Radio Shack Mini Audio Amplifier (catalog number

277-1008) facilitates listening to the distinctive sounds
associated with dialing, receiving handshakes, transmitting data,
and receiving acknowledgements. Obtain this device locally and
place a 0.1 F 200 V or greater capacitor in series with one of
the leads. (You can install the capacitor permanently, within the
case, if you prefer.) Alternately, you can use a linemans butt set
in monitor mode.
During downloading from a remote computer, you will hear the
distinct sound of modems establishing a connection, then a series

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.17

Service and troubleshooting

of rapid chirps as data is transmitted from the ACDB or KDC

program.
Note: Remove the amplifier when you finish troubleshooting.
Do not install the amplifier permanently.

Common causes of problems

Evaluation of visual and audible indications will usually serve to
isolate the source of trouble. Before attempting to replace the
3-MODCOM module, the following causes of problems should
be investigated:

The 3-MODCOM module is not properly seated on the rail

connectors, or one or more connector pins have been bent
away from the associated sockets

A modular telephone plug is not connected to the appropriate

line 1 or line 2 jack, or is not fully seated, or is not connected
at the telephone block

The 3-MODCOM has been configured with incorrect CMS

telephone numbers

The telephone line is faulty

If the module and telephone line are okay, check the CMS
telephone number by dialing it using a standard telephone
plugged directly into the RJ-31X jack. (The jack will
accommodate a standard modular phone plug.)
You should hear a dial tone when going off-hook, lose the dial
tone after dialing the first digit, hear the receiver ringing, hear
the CMS receiver go off-hook and send a handshake tone.
Typical problems dialing the CMS involve missing or incorrect
area codes, the need to dial 1 for long distance, and missing line
access codes (example: dialing 9 for an outside line).
If the receiver answers, check that it is sending out the correct
handshake. For SIA P2 (3/1 pulse), SIA P3 (4/2 pulse), and SIA
DCS the receiver should send a single tone of 0.5 to 1.0 seconds
in duration. For Contact ID, the handshake signal consists of two
short tones of different frequency. For TAP there should be a
modem-type exchange of handshake messages.
If the receiver sends the correct handshake and the 3-MODCOM
transmits data but the receiver does not send an
acknowledgement, check that the receiver is compatible with the
desired protocol. (SIA DCS, P2, and P3 standards are available
from the Security Industry Association). Typical problems
involve an incompatible format or data message.
If the handshake and acknowledge signals are audible, check that
the correct account number was configured in the 3-MODCOM

8.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

and that the code being sent was correctly programmed in the
CMS computer.
Where a 3-MODCOM module is suspected of being faulty, try
substituting a known good one that has been properly
programmed.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.19

Service and troubleshooting

Audio components
3-ASU Audio Source Unit
Table 8-13: 3-ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Unit does not respond. No

1. Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail
network RX or TX LED activity
Chassis Interface Card
2. Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and
3-ASU (and 3-FTCU, if installed) loose or defective
3. Ribbon cable between 3-ASU main board and cover loose or
defective
No All Call page audio output
from network amplifiers and
low level page output
terminals

1. Defective microphone
2. Page inhibit timer set too long
3. Defective 3-ASU
4. Ribbon cable between 3-ASU main board and cover loose or
defective
5. Defective amplifier

No All Call page audio output 1. Network audio data riser open, shorted, or incorrectly wired
from network amplifiers, output
2. Network data riser open, shorted, or incorrectly wired
available at low level page
output terminals
3. TB2 on the CPU loose or incorrectly wired
4. 3-ASU not properly configured in SDU database
5. Amplifiers not properly installed or defective
Page audio distorted

1. Speaking too loud into microphone. Speak such that the last
green LED on the page level meter only flickers occasionally
2. Gain of individual amplifiers set too high

Auxiliary Input volume level

too low

1. Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU

Auxiliary Input volume level

too high

1. Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU

Recorded messages not

working properly

1. 3-ASUMX memory not firmly seated in connector

2. Auxiliary input wiring open or shorted

2. Audio database not correctly downloaded into 3-ASU

3. Incorrect message label referenced.

Wrong messages going to

wrong floors

1. Amplifier and message labels and rules incorrect or

mislabeled

Telephone Page inoperative

1. Wiring between 3-ASU and 3-FTCU open, shorted, or

incorrectly wired

8.20

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-13: 3-ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Remote Microphone trouble

1. Wrong or missing EOL resistor on microphone key input

2. No supervisory tone on DC current on remote microphone
audio output

3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit

Table 8-14: 3-FTCU (3-ASU/FT) Firefighter Telephone Control Unit Troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Unit does not respond

1. Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail

Chassis Interface Card

No RX or TX LED activity

2. Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and

3-FTCU loose or defective
3. Ribbon cable between 3-FTCU main board and cover loose
or defective
4. Defective 3-FTCU
Signature modules do not
switch telephones correctly

1. Network data riser open, shorted, or wired incorrectly

2. TB2 on the CPU loose or wired incorrectly
3. Defective 3-FTCU
4. Signature module has incorrect label, personality code, or
device type
5. Defective Signature module

Low telephone volume level

1. More than five handsets active at one time

2. Phone riser open, shorted, or wired incorrectly
3. Connector TB1 on 3-FTCU loose
4. Defective telephone

Call displayed by LCD doesnt

match connected call

1. Signature module incorrectly labeled in rule

2. Signature module misidentified or installed in wrong location

SIGA audio amplifiers

The following material refers to these amplifier models:

SIGA-AA30 Audio Amplifier

SIGA-AA50 Audio Amplifier

Note: At publication time, these modules were not approved for

use in UL 864 9th edition applications. Call Technical Support to
determine the current approval status of the modules.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.21

Service and troubleshooting

TB4
NAC

DS3 DS2

DS5 DS4

TB1-IN

TB1-OUT
DS1
TB2-OUT

70V
25V

TB2-IN

TB5
BACKUP
TB6

JP2

TB3
SIGA +IN- +OUT-

+ 24V [3SIGAMP1.CDR]

Table 8-15: SIGA-AAxx LED indications

LED

Color

Description

DS1

Yellow

Power Amp Enabled

DS2

Yellow

Backup Mode

DS3

Green

Amplifier Active

DS4
(daughter board)

Green (flashing)

Normal

DS5
(daughter board)

Red (flashing)

Active Condition

Gain adjustment

With the amplifier connected to the speaker load, use the gain
adjust potentiometer (R116) to get a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms signal
(depending on JP2 setting) with a 1Vrms 1 kHz tone at the
amplifier input. If a oscilloscope is used to adjust levels, use the
following peak-to-peak voltage levels:

25 Vrms = 71VPP
70 Vrms = 200 VPP

The amplifier must be connected to a load to properly adjust the

gain. In the event the actual speaker circuit can not be used, a
dummy load must be fabricated according to Table 8-16. The
wattage rating of the dummy load must exceed the output power
rating of the amplifier.
Table 8-16: Amplifier dummy load values
Output power

25 Vrms output

70 Vrms output

30 Watts

20.8 @ 30W

167 @ 30W

50 Watts

12.5 @ 50W

100 @ 50W

To maintain DC supervision and keep the amplifier out of

trouble while adjusting the gain, connect a 47 k EOL resistor

8.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

across the NAC B output (TB4-2 and TB4-3), then connect the
dummy load to the NAC A Output terminals (TB4-4 and
TB4-5).
Caution: Do not operate the amplifier with both the speaker

circuit and the dummy load connected.

Table 8-17: SIGA-AAxx Audio Amplifier troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

No output

1. 24 Vdc power or input signal missing

2. Output circuits wired incorrectly
3. Daughter board not firmly seated in connector
4. Module defined incorrectly in database
5. In backup mode with backup amplifier or wiring problem
6. Branch circuit control modules inoperative or programmed
incorrectly

Backup 1 kHz Tone sounding

1. Input wiring incorrect or missing

2. Low or no audio input

Low Output

1. 70 Vrms speakers with 25 Vrms jumper setting

2. Too many SIGA-CC1s or SIGA-CC2s installed causing
amplifier to shut down
3. Gain (R116) setting too low

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.23

Service and troubleshooting

Pseudo point descriptions

Table 8-18: System pseudo points
Address

Label

Source

Functional description

0001

Startup Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

panel is energized or an operator initiates
a Restart from the LCD module.

0002

First Alarm Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

point on a panel or any panel in the same
network routing group changes to the
alarm state.

0003

First Supervisory Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

point on a panel or any panel in the same
network routing group changes to the
supervisory state.

0004

First Trouble Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

point on a panel or any panel in the same
network routing group changes to the
trouble state.

0005

First Monitor Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

point on a panel or any panel in the same
network routing group changes to the
monitor state.

0006

Evacuation Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses a switch that executes
the Evacuation command.

0007

Drill Response

CPU

Pseudo point that changes to the active

state when an operator presses a switch
that executes the Drill command.

0008

AllCall Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses the All Call or All Call
Minus switch on the 3-ASU.

0009

Alarm Silence Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses a switch that executes
the AlarmSilence command.

0010

Two Stage Timer Expiration

CPU

Changes to the active state when a

panels two-stage alarm timer expires.

0011

Reset Active

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses a switch that executes
the Reset command.

0012

Reset Phase 1

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

phase of the 3-phase reset cycle starts.

0013

Reset Phase 2

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

second phase of the 3-phase reset cycle
starts.

8.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-18: System pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Functional description

0014

Reset Phase 3

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

third phase of the 3-phase reset cycle
starts.

0015

First Disable Response

CPU

Changes to the active state when the first

point on a panel or any panel in the same
network routing group changes to the
disable state.

0016

Fail Safe Event

CPU

Changes to the active state when a

device asserts the rail alarm-not line and
the CPU module has not registered an
alarm event.

0017

Service Group Active

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator enables a Service Group from
the LCD module.

0018

Two Stage Timer Active

CPU

Changes to the active state when a

panels two-stage alarm timer starts.

0019

Loop Controller Reset

Extension

CPU

Changes to the active state when a loop

controller stays in the reset mode longer
than expected.

0020

Service Device Supervision

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator cancels a Service Group test
while a circuit under test remained active.

0021

User Trouble

CPU

Changes to the active state when an

operator forces a trouble into the system.
Not implemented at this time.

0022

Ext Database Incompatibility

CPU

Changes to the active state when a

different database in one or more
network nodes

0023

Reboot Fault

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

CPU module is interrupted unexpectedly.

0101
0164

Comm Fail xx

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

CPU is unable communicate with the
networked CPU module in cabinet xx.

0200
0222

Task xx Watchdog Violation

CPU

Changes to the active state when task xx

fails to execute properly.

0261
0279

Configuration Mismatch Card

xx.

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

card in slot xx can not perform the
programmed advance feature (currently
only degraded mode).

0281
0299

DB Out Of Sync with CPU

Card xx

CPU

Changes to the active state when the

Signature controller module in rail slot xx
reports an actual and expected data
mismatch.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.25

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-19: Local alarm pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0676

Unprogrammed Device

3-AADC1 Device not defined in SDU database is in

alarm or trouble state

0676

Unprogrammed Device Data

Card 1

3-DSDC Device not defined in SDU database is in

3-SSDC1 alarm or trouble state
3-SDDC1

0686

Unprogrammed Device Data

Card 2

3-DSDC Device not defined in SDU database is in

3-SSDC1 alarm or trouble state
3-SDDC1

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0001

Class A Fault Spur

3-SAC

Fault or break in Class A loop on SAC

bus

0002

Class A Fault Video Bus

3-SAC

Fault or break in Class A loop on

video bus

0003

Annunciator Supervision

3-SAC

Control / display module faulty or

missing or not properly configured

0004

Rail Module Communication

Fault

3-SAC

Cabinet local rail communication

failure

0005

Video Communication Fault

3-SAC

Fault or break in video signal lines

0006

RAM Fault or Stack Fault

3-SAC

Fault in internal 3-SAC processor

0007

Code Supervision

3-SAC

Executable program corrupt

0008

Internal Fault

3-SAC

3-SAC hardware failure

0009

Configuration Fault

3-SAC

1. Module in wrong slot

2. Incorrect display on module

0010

Database Supervision

3-SAC

Database corrupt

0071

Task Failure

3-SAC

0071

Waiting for SDU Download

3-SAC

Database download from the SDU is

in progress or was incomplete

0600

Annunciator Supervision

General

Control / display module faulty or

missing or not properly configured

0601

Class A Failure

CPU

Fault or break in Class A network

data riser connection

0601

Rail Module Communication

Fault

General

Cabinet local rail communication

failure

0602

Ground Fault Detection

CPU

Any cabinet component or field wiring

0603

Audio Supervision

CPU

Audio data circuit open or shorted

8.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0604

Internal Fault

General

CPU hardware failure

0604

RAM Fault or Stack Fault

3-AADC1

RAM or Stack (memory) fails its

interval check

0605

Database Supervision

General

Database corrupt

0605

DB Supervision Audio Default

Tone

3-ASU

No message present, problem

erasing flash, message space fails
internal checks

0606

Code Supervision

General

Executable program corrupt

0607

Auxiliary Port One

CPU

Port 1 serial communication circuit

open or shorted

0607

Data Card Fault

3-AADC1

N/A

0607

Data Card Fault 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0608

Auxiliary Port Two

CPU

Port 2 serial communication circuit

open or shorted

0608

Data Card Fault 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0609

Panel in Download Mode

CPU

Panel out of service. In mode to

accept download data

0609

Configuration Fault

General

1. Module in wrong slot

2. Incorrect display on module

0610

Network Audio Circuit A Fault

CPU

Loss of signal on primary audio

connection

0610

Rail Voltage Out of Spec

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

1. Rail voltage >30 Vdc or <24 Vdc

2. Excessive rail current load
3. Faulty or misadjusted
3-PPS/3-BPS

0610

Telephone Line 1

3-MODCOM Line-cut fault detected on phone line

1

0611

Network Audio Circuit B Fault

CPU

Loss of signal on secondary audio

connection

0611

Rail Vltg Blw Batt

3-PS/M

Excessive rail current load

0611

Telephone Line 2

3-MODCOM Line-cut fault detected on phone line

2

0612

Heat Sink Too Hot

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

1. Enclosure vents clogged

2. Heat sink not fastened properly

8.27

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0612

Receiver Test - Line 1

3-MODCOM Line 1 test transmission to CMS failed

0613

Lo Batt Cut Off

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

0613

Receiver Test - Line 2

3-MODCOM Line 2 test transmission to CMS failed

0614

AC Brownout

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

0614

RS-232 Channel

3-MODCOM Communication failure with RS-232

card on module

0615

Batt Trbl

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

Battery voltage below 19.5 Vdc when

on battery backup

AC line voltage below 96 Vac for

3-PPS or 196 Vac for 3-PPS/230

1. Battery wiring open

2. Battery voltage below 24 Vdc
3. Battery internal resistance too high
(load test failure)

0616

Network_ClassA_CircuitA_Fail CPU
ure_01_01

CPU unable to receive data on data

riser circuit A

0617

Network_ClassA_CircuitB_Fail CPU
ure_01_01

CPU unable to receive data on data

riser circuit B

0616

Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 2

1. Excessive load

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

2. Circuit shorted

0617

DSP Supervision

3-MODCOM The DSP chip on the module failed.

0617

Pwr Supply Fail

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

1. Cables between power supply and

monitor module loose or missing

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

1. Excessive load

3-PPS/M
3-BPS/M
3-BBC/M

1. Cables between power supply and

monitor module loose or missing

Digitized audio data missing

0618

0619

Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 1

Drvr Pwr Supply Fail

2. Defective power supply or monitor

module
2. Circuit shorted

2. Defective power supply or monitor

module

0620

Demux Audio Input

3-ZAxx

0620

Waiting for SDU Download

3-MODCOM Database download from the SDU is

in progress or was incomplete

8.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0621

Amp Overcurrent

3-ZAxx

1. Circuit shorted
2. Speaker wattage tap setting
exceeds output rating of amplifier
3. 70 Vrms jumper setting used with
25 Vrms speakers. .

0622

Primary Audio Output DC

3-ZAxx

1. Open DC NAC circuit, missing or

wrong value EOL resistor
2. Shorted DC NAC circuit

0623

Primary Audio Output Analog

3-ZAxx

1. Open Audio NAC circuit, missing or

wrong value EOL resistor
2. Shorted Audio NAC circuit
3. Output voltage jumper set wrong

0624

Backup Audio Output Analog

3-ZAxx

1. Open Audio NAC circuit, missing or

wrong value EOL resistor
2. Shorted Audio NAC circuit
3. Output voltage jumper set wrong

0625

Amplifier Daughter Board

3-ZAxx

Defective board

0626

Fuse Supervision

3-ZAxx

Open fuse in amplifier

0627

PAL Supervision

3-ZAxx

Bad PAL chip. Replace amplifier.

0629

Request Backup

3-ZAxx

N/A

0630

Riser Supervision

3-FTCU

1. Open circuit, missing or wrong

value EOL resistor
2. Shorted circuit

0631

User Interface

3-FTCU

Ribbon cable between display and

main PC board loose or missing.

0632

Master Phone Supervision

3-FTCU

Master handset internal wiring fault

0633

Handset Off Hook

3-FTCU

Hook switch defective

0640

Jumper Fault

3-OPS

Jumpers incorrectly set

0641

AtoD Converter Failure

3-OPS

Internal module failure

0642

City Tie Open

3-OPS

N/A

0652

Input Supervision Trbls

3-ASU

Defective microphone or connections

0653

Phone Page Time Out

3-ASU

Phone page switch has been

activated for a period which exceeds
the time limit set via SDU program

0654

Audio Hardware Mismatch

3-ASU

Mismatch between 3-ASUMX

specified via SDU program and that
installed in the 3-ASU

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.29

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0655

RAM Diagnostic Failure

3-ASU

Memory failure in 3-ASU

0656

Audio Default Failure

3-ASU

1. 3-ASUMX memory card missing

2. Audio database does not exist

0658

Audio Interface Failure

3-ASU

3-ASU hardware fault

0659

Audio Class Supervision

3-ASU

One riser open or shorted

0670

In Bootloader

3-AADC1

PC connected to card attempting

download

0670

In Bootloader

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

PC connected to card attempting

download

0671

Line Opened or Shorted

3-AADC1

Wiring Fault

0671

Line Opened or Shorted Data

Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Wiring Fault

0672

Map Fault Data Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

1. Mismatch between actual data and

expected data
2. Defective wiring
3. Defective device

0677

Grnd Fault

3-AADC1

Wiring Fault

0677

Grnd Fault Data Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Wiring Fault

0678

Reconstct Line

3-AADC1

N/A

0679

Smoke Power Current Limit

3-AADC1

N/A

0679

Smoke Power Current Limit

Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0680

Internal Failure

3-LDSM

N/A

0681

Line Opened or Shorted Data

Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Wiring Fault

0682

Map Fault Data Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

1. Mismatch between actual data and

expected data
2. Defective wiring
3. Defective device

0687

8.30

Grnd Fault Data Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Wiring Fault

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-20: Local trouble pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0689

Smoke Power Current Limit

Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Defective module

0690

Configuration Mismatch Slot 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

Description

Table 8-21: Local monitor pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

0615

Incoming Ring

3-MODCOM An incoming call was received by the

module.

0622

Outgoing Call in Progress

0650

All Call Active

3-ASU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses the All Call switch

0651

Mic Key Active

3-ASU

Changes to the active state when an

operator presses the push-to-talk
switch on the paging microphone.

0673

Mapping In Progress Data

Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0674

Mapping Disbld Data Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Mapping manually disabled

0675

Device Maint Alert

3-AADC1

N/A

0675

Device Maint Alert Data Card

1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Dirty detector on loop 1

0678

Reconstct Line Data Card 1

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0683

Mapping In Progress Data

Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

0684

Mapping Disbld Data Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Mapping manually disabled

0685

Device Maint Alert Data Card

2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

Dirty detector on loop 2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Dialer is active

8.31

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-21: Local monitor pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0688

Reconstct Line Data Card 2

3-DSDC
3-SSDC1
3-SDDC1

N/A

Table 8-22: Nonsupervised output pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0621

Manual Answer Control

3-MODCOM Answers incoming call

Table 8-23: CRC pseudo points

Address

Label

Event type

Description

SS01

AC Brownout

Access trouble

Sustained low voltage from CRC

supply to device

SS02

Low Battery

Access trouble

CRC battery below specified

voltage

SS03

Tamper

Security alarm

CRC tamper switch was

activated

SS04

Strike Fault

Access trouble

Strike device failed

SS05

Reader Fault

Access trouble

Card reader failed

SS06

RAM Fault or Stack Fault

Access trouble

CRC processor failed

SS07

Code Supervision

Access trouble

CRC executable program corrupt

SS08

Database Supervision

Access trouble

CRC database corrupt

SS09

Communications Fault

Access trouble

CRC lost communication with

3-SAC

SS10

Loop 1

Security alarm
(configurable)

Input device on loop 1 activated

SS11

Loop 2

Security alarm
(configurable)

Input device on loop 2 activated

SS12

Task Failure

Local trouble

Changes to the active state

when a task fails to execute
properly

SS15

Waiting for SDU Download

Local trouble

Database download from the

SDU is in progress or was
incomplete

SS32

CRC Strike Timed

Access output

Activate the strike device for a

specified interval

SS33

CRC Strike Unlock

Access output

Activate the strike device

SS34

CRC Relay Timed

Access output

Activate the CRC relay for a

specified interval

8.32

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-23: CRC pseudo points

Address

Label

Event type

Description

SS35

CRC Relay Open

Access output

Activate the CRC relay

SS36

CRC Inside Reader Disable

Access output

Disable the inside card reader

device (for load shedding)

SS37

CRC Outside Reader Disable

Access output

Disable the outside card reader

device (for load shedding)

SS38

CRC Sounder

Access trouble

CRC sounder base trouble

SS represents the CRC device number, as configured in the SDU.

Table 8-24: KPDISP pseudo points
Address

Label

Event type

Description

SS06

RAM Fault or Stack Fault

Local trouble

KPDISP processor failed

SS07

Code Supervision

Local trouble

KPDISP executable program

corrupt

SS08

Database Supervision

Local trouble

KPDISP database corrupt

SS09

Communications Fault

Local trouble

KPDISP lost communication with

3-SAC

SS12

Task Supervision

Local trouble

Changes to the active state

when a task fails to execute
properly

SS13

Waiting for Download

Local trouble

Database download from the

SDU is in progress or was
incomplete

SS14

User Record Supervision

Local trouble

N/A

SS15

Controller Communication
Fault

Local trouble

KPDISP lost communication with

3-SAC (displayed on KPDISP
only)

SS16

Panel Communication Fault

Local trouble

KPDISP lost communication with

panel (displayed on KPDISP
only)

SS32

Entry Buzzer

Nonsupervised
output

Activates for configured time to

allow the partition to be disarmed
before going into alarm

SS33

Exit Buzzer

Nonsupervised
output

Activates for configured time to

allow the person arming a
partition to exit before signaling
any alarm events

SS represents the KPDISP device number, as configured in the SDU.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.33

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-25: Local relay pseudo points

Address

Label

Source

Description

0002

Amplifier Backup

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects the back up
amplifier input as its signal source.

0003

Channel_1_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 1.

0004

Channel_2_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 2.

0005

Channel_3_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 3.

0006

Channel_4_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 4.

0007

Channel_5_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 5.

0008

Channel_6_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 6.

0009

Channel_7_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 7.

0010

Channel_8_Relay_
Confirmation

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects channel 8.

0011

Page Select

3-ZAxx

Changes to the active state when the

amplifiers input relay selects the Page
channel.

8.34

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Signature data circuit (SDC) operation

The advanced features of the Signature controller module
perform a number of advanced operations. These operations are
not always apparent from the panel controller. Table 8-26 lists a
number of SDC conditions and describes the circuits operation.
Table 8-26: SDC operation
Condition

Operation

Remove a detector, then

re-install the same detector in
the same base.

1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or

address when the detector is removed.

Remove a module or pull

station, then re-install the
same device in the same
location.

1. The system displays a trouble with the modules label or

address when the device is disconnected.

2. The system restores completely when the detector is

re-installed in its original base.

2. The panel restores completely when the device is re-installed

in its original location.

Remove a detector, then

1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or
re-install a different detector of
address when the detector is removed
the same type in the same
2. When the new detector is installed, the Signature controller
base.
module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old
detector with the S/N of the new detector. All the old
detectors sensitivity and verification settings are transferred
to the new detector. The system will return to normal when
mapping is finished.
Remove a module or pull
station, then re-install a
different device of the same
type in the same location.
(SIGA-UM replacement
modules must have jumper
JP1 set in the same position
as the original module.)
Remove a detector, then
re-install a different type
detector in the same base.

1. The system displays a trouble with the devices label or

address when the device is disconnected.
2. When the new device is installed, the Signature controller
module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old
device with the S/N of the new device. If the devices are
modules (not pull stations), the old modules personality
codes are transferred to the new module. The panel will return
to normal when mapping is finished.
1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or
address when the detector is removed.
2. When the new detector is installed, the Signature controller
module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old
detector with the S/N of the new detector. All the old
detectors sensitivity and verification settings (when
applicable) are transferred to the new detector. The new
detector will be operational, however the panel will be in
trouble, indicating a device type mismatch. The System
Definition Utility program must be used to re-assign the device
type to get the system out of trouble.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.35

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-26: SDC operation

Condition
Remove a module or pull
station, then re-install a
different type module or pull
station in the same location.

Operation
1. The system displays a trouble at the devices label or address
when the device is removed.
2. When the new device is installed, the Signature controller
module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old
device with the S/N of the new device. The new module is
NOT operational. The panel will be in trouble, indicating a
device type mismatch. System Definition Utility program must
be used to re-assign the device type to get the panel out of
trouble.
3. If a single address module is replaced with a dual address
module or vice versa, a map fault will be generated by the
address count mismatch.

8.36

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting

Isolating circuit and device problems
The process of isolating a problem on a Signature data circuit is
similar to that used on a conventional fire alarm Initiating Device
Circuit (IDC). An accurate and complete wiring diagram of the
data circuit installation is the best troubleshooting aid available.
When used in conjunction with the information provided by the
control panel, you should be able to easily isolate open
conditions or defective devices. The data circuit shown in Figure
8-5 will be used to illustrate basic troubleshooting techniques.
When troubleshooting Class A circuits, disconnect the circuit
from the return (SIGA/A) terminals, and temporarily jumper
both SIGA/A terminals to the respective SIGA/B terminals.
Then troubleshoot the circuit as a Class B circuit.

Figure 8-5: Normal circuit topology

Open circuit conditions

On a circuit with an open fault, the Signature modules will be
communicating with devices up to the break. The LCD module
will indicate a trouble condition on all devices beyond the break.
This is illustrated in Figure 8-6 where devices 1 through 7
continue to operate while devices 8 through 15 report device
troubles.

Figure 8-6: Break in circuit between devices 6 and 8

Referring again to Figure 8-6, a wire break or intermittent

connection between devices 6 and 8 is the most probable cause

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.37

Service and troubleshooting

of the failure. Other possible but unlikely causes with the same
symptoms include device failure of only devices 9 -15; and
devices 9-15 not loaded in the Signature modules database or
not properly configured using the Signature portion of the data
entry program.

Short circuit conditions

Short circuit conditions require selective isolation of portions of
the data circuit to systematically narrow down the faults
location. A shorted circuit will typically show a trouble condition
on all devices, as illustrated in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7: Wiring Short On device 13

To isolate the short, open the circuit at a location that will

disconnect approximately 50% of the installed devices, as shown
in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8: Isolating circuit short

If some of the devices restore in Figure 8-8, the short is located

on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected. If no
devices restore when the circuit is opened, the short has been
isolated to the first 50% of the circuit.
Re-connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit, and
open the circuit at a new location. If during the first open circuit
test some devices restored, open the circuit at a location
electrically farther from the Signature controller module and
repeat the test. If during the first open circuit test no devices
restored, open the circuit at a location electrically closer to the
module, and repeat the test. Continue to increase or decrease the

8.38

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

number of devices on the opened circuit leg until you eventually

isolate the single device or wire segment that is causing the
problem.
Distinguishing short circuits from off-hook conditions in
telephone risers

If local regulations require the ability to distinguish between a

short circuit and an off-hook condition in a telephone riser, you
must configure the circuit so that it functions as a 4-state
telephone. The table below lists compatible riser selector
modules and compatible telephone sets:
Table 8-27: Devices than can be used to configure a 4-state
telephone
Riser selectors

Telephone modules

SIGA-CC1

Portable handset and receptacle (P/N

68331 and 68303)

SIGA-CC1S
SIGA-MCC1
SIGA-MCC1S

Remote telephone and wall box, Break

Glass Type (P/N 68311 and 68301)
Remote telephone and wall box, Nonbreak
Glass (P/N 68314 and 68301)

For instructions on configuring a four-state telephone, refer to

the installation sheet supplied with the SIGA input or output
module.

Ground fault conditions

Ground fault conditions require selective isolation of portions of
the data circuit to systematically narrow down the faults
location. A circuit with a ground fault (approximately 10 k or
less to ground) will cause the LCD module to light the Ground
Fault LED. Ground fault conditions can occur on the data circuit,
the 24 Vdc smoke power circuit or the input circuits to Signature
series modules. The general location of a ground fault can be
determined using the LCD status command and Table 8-28
below.
Table 8-28: Ground fault indications
LCD

Ground Fault Location

Ground Fault LED ON

No Device Trouble

1. Signature data circuit

Ground Fault LED ON

Device PPCCDDDD Trouble

1. Positive leg of input circuit of

device PPCCDDDD

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

2. 24 Vdc smoke power circuit

8.39

Service and troubleshooting

Figure 8-9: Signature data circuit ground faults

To isolate the ground fault, open the suspect circuit (both

conductors) at a location that will disconnect approximately 50%
of the installed devices. Figure 8-10 illustrates the technique on a
data circuit. A similar technique is used on smoke power or
module input circuits to isolate ground faults.

Figure 8-10: Ground fault isolation

If the LCD Ground Fault LED goes out, the ground fault is
located on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected.
If the LCD Ground Fault LED remains on and no devices
restore, the short has been isolated to the first 50% of the circuit.
Re-connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit, and
open the circuit at a new location. If during the first open circuit
test the Ground Fault LED went off, open the circuit at a location
electrically farther from the Signature controller module, and
repeat the test. If during the first open circuit test the Ground
Fault LED remained on, open the circuit at a location
electrically closer to the 3-SSDC(1), and repeat the test.
Continue to increase or decrease the number of devices on the
opened circuit leg and you will eventually isolate a single device
or wire segment that is causing the problem.
The ground fault detection circuitry requires approximately 30 to
40 seconds to respond when the fault is removed.

8.40

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

The panel performs a ground fault test for 2 seconds at

40-second intervals. If the system is working properly, the
voltage between earth ground and logic negative should be
between 12.3 Vdc and 16.8 Vdc during the 2-second test. The
system reports a ground fault when the voltages are less than
12.3 and more than 16.8. In a non-faulted system, the voltage
outside the 2-second test period may float randomly, but if the
system is faulted the voltage is likely to be a fixed value such as
3 or 19.

Substituting known good Signature series

devices
When substituting a known good detector or module in place
of a suspect device, one of two scenarios can take place.
If the substituted device is the same model as the suspect device,
the system accepts it with no further operator action. When the
substituted device is installed, the system goes into trouble.
When the quantity of devices defined on the circuit is reached,
the system automatically remaps the circuit, stores the revised
information, and returns to normal. This process may take a few
minutes.
If the substituted device is a different model than the suspect
device, when the device count is correct, the Signature controller
module automatically remaps the circuit. A trouble occurs at the
address of the suspect device as the result of a map fault, because
the known good devices parameters differ from those of the
suspect device that was removed from the circuit. You must
accept the parameters of the known good device to remove the
map fault. These can be changed later.
You cannot use device substitution as a troubleshooting
technique for Signature security devices. By design, the
Signature controller does not automatically remap a replaced
security device. This is intended to prevent swapping a security
device with one that has been compromised for criminal
purposes.
Detectors

When one or more devices are removed from a Signature Data

Circuit for servicing, as shown in Figure 8-11, the panel will
display a trouble condition for each device. If the System
Definition Utility program (SDU) were connected to the panel,
the DSDC Status screen would also indicate a trouble condition
and the need to re-map.
If the detector is removed from an isolator base, the isolator will
transfer.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.41

Service and troubleshooting

001
Control Panel Display

Removed for service

IPHS
S/N 33-1

101
IPHS
S/N 33-1
102
IPHS
S/N 34-1

TROUBLE ppmm101
ppmm102

102 PHS
S/N 34-1
CT1
203 S/N 48-1
P-code 02

DSDC Status Screen

COMMON TROUBLE
MAP PENDING

CT2
204 S/N 49-1
P-codes 01/01

[3MAP1.CDR]

Figure 8-11: Detectors removed for service

If these devices are returned to their original locations, as shown

in Figure 8-12, the map supervision function recognizes the
detectors have been returned as originally installed (and
mapped), and takes no additional action.
001
Control Panel Display
The same detectors
returned to service in
their original
locations.

IPHS
101 S/N 33-1

102

PHS
S/N 34-1

203

CT1
S/N 48-1
P-code 02

204

CT2
S/N 49-1
P-codes 01/01

DSDC Status Screen

[3MAP2.CDR]

Figure 8-12: Detectors returned to service in original locations

If the devices are returned to the Signature Data Circuit but are
not returned to their original locations, the map supervision
function recognizes that previously mapped serial numbers
occupy new map locations. Once the mapping supervision
function has recognized the need to re-map the circuit, the panel
is put in the map pending state. Once in the map pending state,
the panel will automatically re-map the circuit when the quantity
of devices re-installed on the circuit is equal to or greater than
the quantity of devices defined in the original map. If the panel
were connected to a computer running the SDU Program, the
DSDC status function would indicate map pending.

8.42

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

In Figure 8-13, The PHS (S/N 34-1) originally installed at

address 102 has been installed in the location originally occupied
by the IPHS (S/N 33-1).
001
Control Panel Display
PHS installed
in new location.

102 PHS
S/N 34-1

TROUBLE ppmm101

IPHS not yet

installed.
101 IPHS
S/N 33-1

DSDC Status Screen

CT1
203 S/N 48-1
P-code 02
CT2
204 S/N 49-1
P-codes 01/01

COMMON TROUBLE
MAP PENDING
[3MAP3.CDR]

Figure 8-13: Partially restored circuit

Until all devices are re-installed on the circuit and the circuit is
automatically re-mapped, the original S/N to panel address
correlation is still valid. Examination of Figure 8-13 shows that
the device address moves with the detector until the circuit is
re-mapped. In this example, relocating the PHS detector
temporarily relocated address 102. Until all devices are installed
and the circuit re-mapped, testing a relocated detector will cause
the panel to respond as though the detector was still installed in
its original location.
During mapping, all devices remain operational and are capable
of initiating an alarm. Figure 8-14 shows that both the IPHS and
the PHS retain their old S/N to address correlations while the
circuit is mapping. Mapping activity is indicated on the front
panel display and the DSDC Status screen, if the data entry
computer is connected.
Once mapped, the mapping supervision function will
automatically correlate a panel address to a specific map location
until manually changed using the data entry program.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.43

Service and troubleshooting

001
Control Panel Display
The same detectors
returned to service in
new locations before
re-mapping.

102

PHS
S/N 34-1

101

IPHS
S/N 33-1

203

CT1
S/N 48-1
P-code 02

204

CT2
S/N 49-1
P-codes 01/01

mpg0

DSDC Status Screen

MAPPING

[3MAP4.CDR]

Figure 8-14: Detectors returned to new locations during

re-mapping

Figure 8-15 shows the resultant map after re-mapping. Note that
the new S/N to panel address correlations have been made, the
IPHS is now correlated with address 102 and the PHS is
correlated with address 101. The relocated devices will now
respond as programmed for the original address location.
001
Control Panel Display
The same detectors
returned to service in
new locations after
re-mapping.

101

PHS
S/N 34-1

102

IPHS
S/N 33-1

203

CT1
S/N 48-1
P-code 02

204

CT2
S/N 49-1
P-codes 01/01

DSDC Status Screen

[3MAP5.CDR]

Figure 8-15: Final map

When a factory-new detector replaces an in-service detector,

until mapped, the new detector is operational with a default
address of 00. When the circuit is re-mapped, the new detector
will be given the address assigned to its map location. If a
factory-new detector is added over and above the expected
number of devices on the circuit, it will be operational with a
default address of 00, however the panel will be in trouble as the
actual map contains one more device than the expected map.

8.44

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Modules

When a module is replaced with another module of the same

type, upon automatic re-mapping, the replacement module will
be assigned the personality code of the module originally
installed at that map location. If a module is replaced with a
module of a different type one of three things can happen.
If you replace a single address module such as the SIGA-CT1, or
SIGA-CC1, with a different type of single input module, the
circuit will re-map all devices; however the new device type will
not operate, due to incompatible personality codes. A map fault
will be generated because the actual device differs from the
expected device. The data entry program must be used to accept
the new device type and clear the map fault.
Notes

Do not replace factory-programmed devices such as pull

stations and MM1 modules with a SIGA-CT1.

For mapping purposes, give all manual pull stations the

device type pull, regardless of their model numbers.

If a dual address module replaces a single address module, the

panel will attempt to re-map all devices, however the circuit will
not be successfully re-mapped. A map fault will be generated
because the actual device differs from the expected device, and
the dual address module will not operate. The data entry program
must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map
fault.
If a dual address module is replaced with a single address
module, the panel will never attempt to re-map all devices
because the panel does not see enough devices (one address less)
to automatically re-map the circuit. The panel remains in the
map pending mode and will not re-map. If the panel could be
forced to re-map all devices, the circuit would still not be
successfully re-mapped, because the actual device count differs
from the expected device count. The panel will be in trouble with
a map fault. The SDU program must be used to accept the new
device type and clear the map fault.
Device type replacement

If a different Signature device model is substituted for the

suspect device, when the device count is correct, the Signature
controller module will automatically re-map the circuit. A
trouble will occur at the address of the suspect device as the
result of a map fault, because the known good devices
parameters differ from those of the suspect device that was
removed from the circuit. You must accept the parameters,
which may be changed later, of the known good device to
remove the map fault.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.45

Service and troubleshooting

Signature series devices require a solid connection at their

terminals. If a wire can be wiggled, it will be subject to contact
resistance variations due to temperature changes, resulting in an
intermittent connection, which will affect communication
between the Signature devices and the control module. Use the
proper size screwdriver and tighten all connections securely.

Tighten terminal
screws securely.

(ABASESCR.CDR)

8.46

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Signature controller modules

Substituting Signature controller modules
When substituting a known good Signature controller module
in place of a suspect rail module, you must download the system
configuration and Signature data circuit information into the
CPU module. This operation requires a PC and the SDU
Program.
The Signature controller module actually has two separate
memories. The first memory contains the firmware that makes
the module operate. If there is a problem with the firmware, or if
an upgrade has been issued, the new firmware is downloaded
into the module. When upgrading the module firmware (code),
you do not need to download the Bootstrap data unless
specifically instructed to do so.
The SDC configuration information is stored in the modules
second memory. If you suspect that the module itself is bad, you
must download the configuration information for the circuit that
will be connected to the substitute module.
The database must be converted before it can be downloaded
into the Signature controller.
Table 8-29: Signature controller module troubleshooting
Problem
Signature Data Circuit Open

Possible cause
1. Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose
2. Defective detector or isolator base
3. Broken conductor
4. Device not installed on circuit
5. Device not entered into SDU databases

Signature Data Circuit Shorted 1. Circuit incorrectly wired (often crossed wires on a device
base)
2. Defective detector, detector base, or module
3. Nicked insulation between conductors
Signature Data Circuit Ground 1. Pinched wire between device and electrical box
Fault
2. Nicked wire insulation

Mapping errors
Table 8-30 provides basic information on mapping errors. For
detailed information on identifying and locating mapping errors,
refer to the SSDC Diagnostic and Status sections found later in
this chapter.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.47

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-30: Mapping errors

Fault

Possible causes

Mapping Error

1.

A discrepancy between the internal map and the devices

installed on the Data Circuit (serial #, personality code, or
device type)

2.

Device ID entered incorrectly into SDU database

3.

More than 124 T-taps on a data circuit

4.

Excessive circuit resistance

5.

Excessive circuit capacitance

1.

An intermittent connection causing one or more devices to

loose then re-establish communication with the Signature
controller module

2.

A defective device or detector base

1.

There is a discrepancy between the device type recorded on

the internal map and the device installed on the Data Circuit

System continues to re-map

data circuit

Device Type Error

8.48

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Device troubleshooting
Each Signature series device has a red and green LED. Their
functions are indicated in Table 8-31. These LEDs are useful
when trying to determine the communication and alarm or active
status of Signature devices.
Table 8-31: Signature device LEDs
LED

Device status

Green flashing

Normal communication

Red flashing

Alarm or Active
(either input of dual input modules)

Red and Green

steady

Stand-alone Alarm or Active

(either input of dual input modules)

Table 8-32 lists common troubles and possible causes for

Signature Series modules. For detailed information on
identifying and locating Signature device problems, refer to the
Signature Diagnostic Tools Section found later in this chapter.
Table 8-32: Signature module troubleshooting matrix
Module not responding correctly
C
C
1

C
C
2

C
R

C
R
R

C
T
1

C
T
2

M
M
1

U
M

W
T
M

Possible Causes

Module installed in wrong location or

improperly addressed

Module not entered into Signature database

Incorrect personality code loaded into

module

Personality code for unused portion of

module not set at 0 (P-codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 13,
14, 16, and 18)

Jumper JP1 set incorrectly (P-code 8)

24 Vdc for smoke power low or missing

(P-codes 3, 14, 18, 20, and 21)

x
x

Inputs 1 and 2 swapped (P-codes 1, 2, 3,

and 4)
Signal sources 1 and 2 swapped (P-code 7)

Ground Fault on data circuit or (-) side of

input / output circuit

Module in trouble on Signature controller module

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.49

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-32: Signature module troubleshooting matrix

x

Module missing or incorrectly wired on

Signature data circuit.

Mapping error. Module not loaded into

Signature database

Ground Fault on input or output circuit

x
x

Output circuit open, shorted, incorrectly

wired, polarized device installed in reverse,
incorrect or missing EOL resistor
x

Missing or incorrect EOL resistor (P-codes 1,

2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 16, 18, 20, 21)
24 Vdc for smoke power low or missing
(P-codes 13, 14, 18, 20, and 21)

Module incorrectly in alarm or active on Signature controller module

x

Initiating device circuit shorted or initiating

device incorrectly installed

Incorrect EOL resistor value (too low)

x = Applicable for module

This table also applies to equivalent M-series components and products that emulate these
module types.
Table 8-33: Signature detector troubleshooting
Symptom

Possible causes

Detector not responding

correctly

1. Detector installed in wrong location or improperly addressed.

2. Detector not entered in system database.
3. Incorrect device response in database.

Detector in trouble on CPU

1. Detector missing or incorrectly wired on Signature data

circuit.
2. Mapping error. Detector not loaded into control module
database.
3. Ground Fault on Signature Data circuit
4. Internal detector fault. Refer to Advanced Techniques
Section.

Detector incorrectly in alarm

on control panel.

1. Detector extremely dirty.

2. Ionization detector installed in area of extremely high airflow.
3. Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke.
4. Defective detector.

8.50

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Signature diagnostic tools

The SDU Signature diagnostic tools are designed to assist the
installing technician in isolating and correcting faults with the
Signature Data Circuit (SDC), detectors and modules. The
troubleshooting techniques described in the basic Signature
troubleshooting section should be tried before using these tools.

Using Signature diagnostics

To access the Signature diagnostic tools, Click Tools on the
main menu bar, then click Signature Series diagnostics.
Signature device circuit selection

The Signature diagnostic tools affect only the SDC circuit that is
specified in the drop down list boxes at the top of the DSDC
Diagnostics window, as shown in Figure 8-16.
Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet
Options Tab

[TSCRN0.CDR]

Click Check Boxes to

Select Download Tables

Click Here to Display Devices by Short Address

Click Here to Display Devices by Serial Number
Click Here to Set Comm Port
Click Here to used 3-DSDC Module Signature Tables Stored in the SDU
Click Here to Download 3-DSDC Module Signature Tables into SDU
Click Here to Set Baud Rate

Figure 8-16: Options Screen

Select the cabinet that houses the Signature controller module

with the trouble condition, using the Cabinet drop-down list.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.51

Service and troubleshooting

Select the label of the Signature controller module with the

trouble condition.
Select the loop (Signature Data circuit) on the module having the
trouble condition, using the loop (SDC) drop down list.
COM port and baud rate

To use the Signature diagnostic tools, the information from the

faulty Signature data circuit or device must first be read
(uploaded) into the System Definition Utility (SDU) program.
Use the COM Port and Baud Rate drop down lists to set the
COM port parameters on the SDU computer that is to be used
during uploading. The suggested baud rate is 19200.
Upload

To upload the Signature data from the Signature controller

module into the SDU program, click the Download DSDC
Tables button. When the Signature data has been downloaded
from the Signature controller module, it is stored as part of the
project. The Signature data can be recalled without being
connected to the module by using the Load Tables from Disk
button.
Serial number or short address

The devices listed in the diagnostic tables can be displayed by

serial number or short address. You can mix short address and
serial number displays using the Requested Diagnostic Table
check boxes and the Device Lists radio buttons in combination.

Signature diagnostic sequence

Table 8-34 lists the suggested sequence when using the
Signature Diagnostic tools to isolate problems on a Signature
Data Circuit and problems with individual Signature devices.
Table 8-34: Signature troubleshooting tool sequence
SDC circuit faults

Signature device faults

1. Mapping Errors

1. Device Tables

2. Device Chains

2. Trouble Tables

3. Message Counters

Displaying mapping errors

Mapping errors prevent the system from generating a successful
Signature Data Circuit map. To display errors generated during
the mapping process, click the Mapping Errors tab. The Mapping

8.52

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Errors text box lists the eight (8) most recent mapping errors.
The Total Errors field lists the total number of mapping errors
that have been identified. Clicking on an error in the list
highlights the error, and displays the appropriate troubleshooting
tip in the lower Troubleshooting Tips text box.
Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet

Mapping Errors Tab

Mapping Error Window

Troubleshooting Tips
Window
Total Errors Field

[TSCRN1.CDR]

Figure 8-17: Mapping errors dialog box

Table 8-35: Mapping error messages

Message

Suggested corrective action

The mapping command failed because the

Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit, or a
sensor did not draw current or it was not
faulty device.
possible to obtain stable mapping data from the
1. Verify correct wiring.
SDC.
2. Verify operational devices.
3. Review the Chain Response List.
4. Review the Device Response List.
While mapping a chain from a device back to
the Signature controller module, the chain was
built with holes in it.

Indicative of devices not operating consistently.

1. View the Chain and Device Response Lists
to see a list of the devices that are present
in the chain being processed.
2. Compare the serial numbers in the above
lists with the actual wiring to identify a
conflict.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.53

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-35: Mapping error messages

Message

Suggested corrective action

The map tables are inconsistent.

1. Upload the current map.

2. Compare current map with expected map.
3. Write the map back to the Signature
controller module.

The actual SDC map does not match the stored 1. Upload the current map.
expected map.
2. Compare current map with expected map.
3. Write the map back to the Signature
controller module
Setting the Address in the device failed.

1. Review the Serial Number or Short

Address. If missing, replace the device.
2. Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring
fault.

Map supervision failure. The map in use has

invalid data. This error initiates an automatic
reconstruction of the map.

1. Please wait for automatic map

reconstruction to complete before
continuing.

Mapping supervision detected a change on the

SDC. A rebuild of the map was scheduled.

1. Please wait for automatic map

reconstruction to complete before
continuing.

Mapping supervision detected that the device

address or the short address of the device
being supervised has changed. A rebuild of the
map was scheduled.

1. Please wait for automatic map

reconstruction to complete before
continuing.

The mapping command failed, the sensor did

1. Please wait for the automatic map
not draw current or it was not possible to obtain
reconstruction to complete before
stable mapping data from the SDC. A rebuild of
continuing.
the map was scheduled.
Mapping was aborted by an external event,
such a new start on a device. A rebuild of the
map was scheduled.

1. Please wait for the automatic map

reconstruction to complete before
continuing.

Mapping supervision detected that the Device

Type of the Device being supervised has
changed. A Map Fault was flagged.

1. Replace the device.

Mapping was aborted because there is short or

open on the SDC wiring.

1. An open or short on a Class A circuit.

2. Correct the Signature controller module

programming.
2. A short across the entire Class B circuit.
3. A Reset may be needed to restart mapping.

Unable to recreate current map at panel

1. Please wait for the automatic map
startup. The panel will re-map to reconstruct the
reconstruction to complete before
map.
continuing.

8.54

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-35: Mapping error messages

Message

Suggested corrective action

Assignment of a short address to a device

failed. This could lead to duplicate short
addresses and mapping failures.

1. View the Chain and Device Response Lists

to see
a list of the devices that are present in the
chain
being processed and identify the failed
device.
2. Replace the device.
3. Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring
fault.

Mapping has been disabled.

1. Enable mapping.

While mapping a chain from a device back to

the Signature controller module, the chain
appears to have 2 devices at the same location
in the chain.

1. Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit, or a

faulty device.

More than 125 End of Line devices have been

found on the SDC.

1. Correct the wiring.

2. Review the Chain and Device Response

lists to identify the conflict.
2. Re-map the circuit.

While mapping a chain from a device back to

1. Click the Device Chains tab to see a list
the Signature controller module, the chain was
of the devices that are present in the chain
found to have a device present past the end of
being processed.
the chain. This indicates that at least one
2. Compare the serial numbers or short
device is responding improperly to the mapping
addresses
commands.
with the actual wiring to identify the
problem.
Mapping has detected a difference between the This indicates that devices not communicating
device at the end of line and the devices in its
properly.
chain.
1. Click the Communication List tab to see a
list of the devices that are communicating.
2. Compare the serial numbers or short
addresses with the actual wiring, in order to
identify the conflict.

Displaying device chain errors

A chain is a list of devices connected between the Signature
controller module and a device being interrogated during circuit
mapping. The chains and sub-chains created during the mapping
process evolve into the circuit map.
Should a circuit fail to map properly, further insight into the
problem may be gained by investigating the devices making up
individual chains and sub-chains.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.55

Service and troubleshooting

To display a chain generated during the failed mapping process,

click the Device Chains tab. Four categories of device chains are
listed. Each list displays the short address or serial number of the
devices in the chain. The total number of entries in each list is
indicated at the bottom of the list. To determine the position of a
specific Signature device in the chain, click the small data entry
box at the top of each column and enter the devices short
address or serial number. The position field at the bottom of the
column will indicate the selected devices chain position and the
cursor will move over that device entry in the main list.
Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet

Device Chains Tab

Click Here to Enter

a Specific Device
Current Chain List
Chain Response List
Device Response List
Communicating List
Column Totals
Selected
Device's Position
[TSCRN2.CDR]

Figure 8-18: Device chains dialog box

Current chain list

The Current Chain List displays the sequence of Signature

devices in the chain or sub-chain that was being created when
the mapping failure occurred.
Chain response list

The Chain Response List displays the sequence of Signature

devices in the main chain, when the mapping failure occurred.
Device response list

The Device Response List displays the sequence of Signature

devices in a sub-chain that was being created when the mapping
failure occurred.

8.56

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Communicating list

The Communicating List displays a list of all Signature devices

seen by the Signature controller module.

Using the chain lists

An element in the displayed chain caused the map fault.
Examine the chain and look for gaps within the short address or
serial number lists of a chain or sub-chain.

Gaps in the list indicate areas that were not successfully

mapped. A gap within the chain does not mean that the
missing device has a problem, only that that device was not
successfully mapped.

Compare the Chain and Device response lists. All the

devices on the Device Response list should also appear on
the Chain Response list.

Look for duplicate short addresses or serial numbers on the

same list.

Failure of a device to successfully map may be the result of a

problem with another device, or wiring in a chain or sub-chain
not directly connected to the unmapped device. Although the
missing or duplicate devices are not always the cause of map
failure, good troubleshooting technique suggests that these
devices be examined for defects, wiring errors, and duplicate
entries in the SDU program, etc.

Displaying message counters

During normal operation, the Signature controller module issues
numerous communication messages to the Signature devices on
its SDCs. The message counters indicate how many times a
communication message has been issued and the number of
successful return messages.
To display the message counters, click the Message Counters
tab.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.57

Service and troubleshooting

Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet

Message Counters Tab

Message
Total Messages Sent
Incorrect Message Count
Percentage of
Valid Messages

[TSCRN3.CDR]

Figure 8-19: Message counters dialog box

The message command appears in the left column, followed by

the number of times it has been issued, the number of errors
received after the message was issued, and the percentage of
correct responses. During normal operation, the percentage of
messages received correctly should exceed 99%.
Intermittent device or wiring problems are indicated by a low
successful message rate. If successful message rates are tracked
over time, one can generate base line information for each
circuit. From the base line information, any changes from the
norm can be quickly identified, and preventive measures taken,
before a communication problem develops. Table 8-36 lists the
messages sent and received by the Signature driver controller
module.
Table 8-36: Signature controller module Internal Messages
Query End Of Line

Query Relay Status

Find New Start

Query Isolator

Ground Fault Check

Find New Active

Query Status

Query Device Mask

Find New Unused2

Pulse Visible LED

Query Group Mask

Find New Unused3

Query Map Result

Module PFX

Reset Device

Query Alarm Status

Query Ready Comm

Enable Device

Query PreAlarm Status

Find Serial Number

Disable Device

Query Normal Status

Find New Alarm

Start Device

8.58

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-36: Signature controller module Internal Messages

Query Trouble Status

Find New PreAlarm

Enable Visible LED

Query New Start Status

Find New Normal

Disable Visible LED

Query Active Status

Find New Trouble

Enable External Output

Disable External Output

Assign All Address

3-SDC Processor Status Query

Open Line Isolator

Relay Control

3-SDC Enable Loop

Close Line Isolator

Read Software Version

3-SDC Disable Loop

Reset Device Status

Read Device Status

3-SDC Line Initialization

Complete

Move EEPROM to RAM

Read Sensor Values

3-SDC Send a Device Msg.

Assign Short Address

Read Specific Trouble

3-SDC Get a Device Reply

Assign Group Address

Read Value From RAM

3-SDC Configure Loop

Enter Service Mode

Send Value to Visible LED

3-SDC Query Current

Configuration

Select Sensors

Query New Status

3-SDC Send Signal Rate

Write Value to RAM

3-SDC Command Initiate

Reset

3-SDC Query Signal Status

Write Value to EEPROM

3-SDC Command Initiate

Restart

Displaying device trouble

Each Signature device is equipped with a 32-bit trouble register.
Should a devices trouble bit be set at any time in the devices
history, the device and the nature of the trouble will appear in the
Latching Troubles By Device Address window. Clicking on the
device will reveal a list of the trouble conditions affecting that
device. Click the device a second time to remove the trouble
listing.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.59

Service and troubleshooting

Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet

Device Trouble Tab

Device Trouble Message

[TSCRN4.CDR]

Figure 8-20: Device trouble dialog box

Table 8-37 below lists the Signature Detector trouble messages,

and possible causes and solutions. Table 8-38 lists the Signature
Module trouble messages, and possible causes and solutions.
Table 8-37: Signature detector trouble messages
Trouble message

Possible cause

Possible solution

External Device Line Short

Defective Detector

Replace Detector

External Device Line Open

Defective Detector

Replace Detector

Error XMIT Light

Detector Dirty

Clean detector

Device switched to short after

isolator relay operated

Short on Signature data

circuit

Locate and remove cause of

short.

ESK Value Too Low

1. Dirty Detector

1. Clean Detector

2. Bad Ion Chamber

2. Replace Detector

1. Dirty Detector

1. Clean Detector

2. Bad Ion Chamber

2. Replace Detector

1. Dirty Detector

1. Clean Detector

2. Bad Ion Chamber

2. Replace Detector

Devices on the Signature

data circuit are drawing too
much current during the
mapping process.

Place a short or low resistance

shunt across the data circuit.

ESK Slope Too High

ESK Slope Too Low
Quiescent Too Large

8.60

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-37: Signature detector trouble messages

Trouble message

Possible cause

Possible solution

Quiescent Too Small

Devices on the Signature

data circuit are not drawing
enough current during the
mapping process.

Check the device wiring or

replace the device.

Short on Relay Base

Bad Relay Base

Replace Relay Base

External or Isolator Relay

Failure to Switch

Bad Base

Replace Base

External or Isolator Relay

Switched

1. Bad Relay Base

1. Replace Relay Base

2. External Electrical Noise

2. Remove or Shield Noise

Source

O Value Too Small

Bad Base

Replace Base

Ion Rate-of-Rise Too High

Bad Ion Chamber

Replace Detector

Ion Quiescent Too High

Dirty Detector

Clean Detector

Ion Quiescent Too Low

Dirty Detector

Clean Detector

Ion Value Too Low

Defective Detector

Replace Detector

Thermal Value Too High

Bad Base

Replace Base

Thermal Value Too Low

Bad Base

Replace Base

A/D Converter Fault

Defective A/D converter

Replace Detector

EEPROM Checksum Error

Bad EEPROM

Replace Detector

EEPROM Write Time-out

Bad EEPROM

Replace Detector

Unknown Device Type

Bad EEPROM

Replace Detector

EEPROM Write Verify Fault

Bad EEPROM

Replace Detector

Ambient Light Too High

1. Dirty Detector

1. Clean Detector

2. Outside light reaching

detector chamber

2. Eliminate light source

Photo Quiescent Too High

Dirty Detector

Clean Detector

Photo Quiescent Too Low

Dirty Detector

Clean Detector

Photo Value Too High

Bad Base

Replace Base

Table 8-38: Signature module trouble messages

Trouble message

Possible cause

Possible solution

Open data Circuit

See Table 8-32

See Table 8-32

Shorted data Circuit

See Table 8-32

See Table 8-32

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.61

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-38: Signature module trouble messages

Trouble message

Possible cause

Possible solution

Relay switched

Relay toggled from actual

state

Manually reset relay

Replace Module

Data circuit ground fault

See Table 8-32

See Table 8-32

Vector Current Too Large

Devices on the Signature

data circuit are drawing too
much current during the
mapping procedure.

Short or low resistance shunt on

Signature data circuit

Vector Current Too Small

Devices on the Signature

data circuit are not drawing
enough current during the
mapping procedure.

Excessive circuit resistance

Defective base
Defective wiring

EEPROM Not Initialized

EEPROM not properly

programmed

Replace module

EEPROM Write Time-out

Bad EEPROM

Replace module

A/D Time-out

Defective A/D converter

Replace module

EEPROM Write Verify Fault

Defective EEPROM

Replace module

Line Monitor Trouble

Signature data circuit voltage

low

Check Signature data circuit

Class A Trouble

Open or shorted input or

output circuit

Check input / output circuit wiring

3rd Wire Trouble

Voltage is out of range on the Check power supply output

wire that supplies 24 Vdc
Check wiring
power to SIGA-UM.

3rd Wire Trouble

Voltage on the wire supplying Check power supply output.

24 Vdc smoke power to
Check wiring
SIGA-UM is out of range.

RAM Not Programmed

Bad RAM

Replace Module

Displaying trouble tables

The Trouble Tables display eight categories of active device
trouble. Each list displays the short address or serial number of
the devices experiencing that trouble condition. The total number
of devices in each list is indicated at the bottom of the list.
The active troubles displayed in the Trouble Tables should be
compared with a devices trouble history displayed in the
Display Device Trouble lists, to determine any possible trouble
pattern.

8.62

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics
Click Here to Select SDC Circuit
Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card
Click Here
to Select Cabinet

Trouble Tables Tab

Internal Fault List

Device Type Fault List
Personality Fault List
Unexpected Fault List
Click Here to Reveal
Additional Fault Lists
Total Column
Fault Count
[TSCRN5.CDR]

Figure 8-21: Trouble Tables dialog box

Internal fault

The Internal Fault List indicates an internal problem with a

Signature Device or Module. Refer to the Displaying Device
Trouble section to determine the specific cause.
Device type fault

The Device Type Fault List indicates that the device type entered
in the SDU does not agree with the device type installed on the
SDC.
Personality fault and sensitivity fault

The Personality Fault List indicates that the personality code

(p-code) of a Signature module entered in the SDU does not
agree with the p-code of the module actually installed on the
circuit. The Sensitivity Fault List indicates that the sensitivity of
a Signature detector entered in the SDU does not agree with the
sensitivity of the detector actually installed on the circuit.
Personality and sensitivity faults should be corrected by the
system, and these faults should clear automatically.
Unexpected fault

The Unexpected Fault List displays the serial number of devices

which appear on the actual circuit, but which were not listed in
the SDU program.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.63

Service and troubleshooting

Communication fault

The Communication Fault List indicates those Signature devices

that are not communicating with the Signature controller
module.
Open fault

The Open Fault List indicates those Signature modules with an

open on their input or output circuits (all p-codes except 8.)
Ground fault

The Ground Fault List indicates those Signature modules with a

ground fault on their input or output circuits (all p-codes except
8.)
Short fault
North American marketplaces: The Short Fault List indicates

those Signature modules with a short on their supervised output

circuits (p-codes 5, 7, 15, 16.)
European marketplace: The Short Fault List indicates those

Signature modules with a short on their supervised input circuits

(p-codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 20, 21) and those
Signature modules with a short on their supervised output
circuits (p-codes 5, 7, 15, 16.)
Brand fault

Incorrect brand of Signature devices installed on SDC.

8.64

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

DSDC status
Introduction
The DSDC status function is used to determine the real-time
status of a Signature Data Circuit (SDC). This function is useful
in isolating and correcting faults on an SDC. The DSDC status
function is useful in conjunction with the download and DSDC
diagnostic functions.

Setting up the System Definition Utility program

In order to use the DSDC Status function, the computer running
the SDU program must be connected to the 3-SSDC(1). The
appropriate communication port must be connected to the
modular phone jack on the Signature controller module or on the
CPU module.
Com port and baud rate settings can be made directly from the
DSDC Status window. The default baud rate is 9600 baud.

Using DSDC status

To access the DSDC Status function, click Tools > Signature
Status.
Select the SDC to be monitored by using the Cabinet, SSDC, and
Loop drop down lists.
The Delay drop down box sets the interval at which the status
screens receives updated information from the Signature
controller module. The default value is 3 seconds. Increasing the
delay time permits the module to process more information
between reports to the SDU, thus decreasing the overall time it
takes to generate a full status report.
To start the DSDC Status function, click the Start Status Button.
Should the Confirm window appear after a short delay, the SDU
computer is not communicating with the 3-SSDC(1).
Verify the module address, download wiring, COM port, and
baud rate are set correctly and click the retry button. If
communications fail when connected to the module via the CPU,
try connecting directly to the modular phone jack on the
Signature controller module.

Displaying the current SDC status

Click the Current Status Tab at the bottom of the window to
display an annunciator panel showing the real-time status of the
connected SDC. Refer to Table 8-39 to interpret the indicators.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.65

Service and troubleshooting

Select COM port here

Select baud rate here

Select data circuit from

list displayed here
Select controller from
list displayed here
Select cabinet from
list displayed here

Data sheet displays 31 separate

parameters on selected controller
card. A lit LED indicates trouble.

Click here to start receiving

status information

[LPCSTAT1.CDR]

Click here to reinitialize the

selected controller card

Click here to disable mapping on

the selected controller card
Select display refresh
rate here
Click here to enable mapping on
the selected controller card

Figure 8-22: DSDC Status dialog box

Table 8-39: Current status parameters

8.66

Indicator

Function

Internal Fault

Signature controller module

hardware problem

Data Checksum Trouble

Configuration data bad

I/F Fault

3-SDC Card hardware problem

Line Fault

SDC open or shorted

Map Fault

Memory contents differ from actual

SDC device conditions.

Mapping in Progress

The Signature controller module is

currently mapping the SDC

Map disabled

The mapping process has been

manually turned off

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-39: Current status parameters

Indicator

Function

Dirty Device

A dirty smoke detector has been

identified

Unconfigured Alarm

The module has detected an alarm

on a device which is not in its
database

Line Initialization

SDC power on phase, devices not

supervised

Serial Table Full

Indicates when data controller card

needs to be reinitialized

I/F Communication Fault

Signature controller module to

3-SDC communication problem

I/F Internal Fault

3-SDC card hardware problem

Balanced Map

Two or more device strings appear

identical to the system.

Programming Mode

Signature controller module in

upload or download mode

RAM Fault

Internal memory problem

Stack Fault

Internal program error

Map Pending

Ready to map SDC when SDC

conditions warrant

Dev. New Starts in

Progress

The Signature controller module is

processing a new SIGA device start
up

Stand Alone

The SDC is in the stand alone mode

Stand Alone Alarm

The module has detected an alarm

while in the stand alone mode

Ground Fault

The SDC wiring has low resistance

continuity to ground

Device Ground Fault

A SIGA module IDC/NAC has low

resistance continuity to ground

Delta suspended

Module in reset phase. No changes

reported by Signature controller
module

Displaying a log of current SDC status events

Click the Status Log Tab at the bottom of the window to display
a chronological list of the events that occurred on the SDC after
the Start Status Button was activated.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.67

Service and troubleshooting

Select COM port here

Select baud rate here

Select data circuit from

list displayed here
Select controller from
list displayed here
Select cabinet from
list displayed here

A listing of status messages

displayed here

Click here to start receiving

status information

[LPCSTAT2.CDR]

Click here to reinitialize the

selected controller card

Click here to disable mapping on

the selected controller card
Select display refresh
rate here
Click here to enable mapping on
the selected controller card

Figure 8-23: DSDC status event log

Displaying the SDC in-process progress chart

Click the Progress Tab at the bottom of the window to display a
graphical presentation of the five major processes that take place
during SDC configuration:

Finding device serial numbers

Communicating with individual devices
Mapping the devices
Verifying the End Of Line (EOL) status of a device
Programming parameters into a devices memory

This display is useful in determining an overall picture of SDC

configuration activity.

8.68

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Select COM port here

Select baud rate here

Select data circuit from

list displayed here
Select controller from
list displayed here
Select cabinet from
list displayed here

Graphical representation of devices

remaining to be processed
Graphical representation of devices
already processed

Click here to start receiving

status information
Click here to reinitialize the
selected controller card

[LPCSTAT3.CDR]

Click here to disable mapping on

the selected controller card
Select display refresh
rate here
Click here to enable mapping on
the selected controller card

Figure 8-24: DSDC in-process progress chart

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.69

Service and troubleshooting

Addressable analog diagnostic tools

The SDU addressable analog diagnostic tools are designed to
assist in isolating and correcting faults with addressable analog
circuits, detectors, and modules.

System definition utility

The quickest method for isolating most common problems is
with the Systems Definition Utility (SDU) diagnostic tools.
1. Connect the computer that runs the SDU to the system, and
open the appropriate project.
If the actual project is not available, create a phantom project
with an empty 3-AADC1 circuit and connect directly to the
module in question.
2. From the menu bar, select Tools > System Sensor >
Diagnostics.
3. On the Options tab, clear the selection from Message
Counters, and upload. Trouble Tables, Ready
Communication, and Display as Device Addresses should be
selected.
4. Click: Upload AADC Tables.
5. Select the Status Tables tab when the table upload is
complete.
Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation

Each table lists the addresses for the modules and sensors
reporting the associated condition with a total at the bottom.
When displayed as Device Addresses, sensor addresses
correspond with the rotary switch setting, and modules are
reported as 100 plus the rotary switch setting. Multiple faults
will make the process more difficult but the addresses noted in
the fault tables make an excellent starting point
Table 8-40: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation
Table Name

Description

Possible causes

Communicating
Devices

Lists sensor and module

addresses talking to the
3-AADC1.

Total number of communicating devices

should equal number of installed devices.
If total is low, see Communication Fault
table for missing or not connected
device(s).
If total is high, see Unexpected Fault table
for extra device(s) installed on circuit.

Internal Fault

8.70

Devices reporting an internal

failure

Replace device

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-40: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation

Table Name

Description

Possible causes

Device Type
Fault

The wrong device type for the Photo detector installed for ion detector
current configuration.
Ion detector installed for photo detector
Monitor module installed for control
module
Control module installed for monitor
module
Two device addresses are transposed.

Unexpected
Fault

A device is reporting at an
unconfigured address.
All unconfigured addresses
are polled at startup and at
10-minute intervals thereafter.

Duplicate Device
Fault

Two or more devices have

the same address.

If the total number of Communicating

Devices is correct, and a Communication
Fault is reported, the Unexpected Fault
device should be set to the address listed
as a Communication fault.
If the total number of Communicating
Devices shown in the table is correct, a
device has been assigned the same
address as a configured device.
If the total number of Communicating
Devices is too low, and a Communication
Fault is reported, the device in the
Communication fault table is addressed at
the location shown in the Duplicate Device
table.

Communication
Fault

Missing device.

Wiring error or device not installed

If Communicating Devices table short by
one and Duplicate Device fault exists, then
address shown in Comm Fault table is
addressed at location shown in Duplicate
Device table.
OR
If Communicating Devices table OK and
Unexpected Fault exists, then the
Unexpected Fault device should be set to
the address shown in the Communication
Fault table.

Open Fault

Module field wiring is open.

Short Fault

Module field wiring is shorted. Circuit incorrectly wired

Defective detector, detector base, or
module
Nicked insulation between conductors

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose

Defective detector or isolator base
Broken conductor
Device not installed on circuit
Device not entered into SDU databases

8.71

Service and troubleshooting

Table 8-40: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation

Table Name

Description

Possible causes

Compatibility Fault

Incorrect brand of device

installed, replace device.

SIGA, GSX, or XLS brand devices

intermixed on circuit.

Problem solving hints

Addressing faults

Most addressing faults are quickly located because the wrong

address gives a clue as to the fault location. For example module
164 is duplicated while module 174 is missing. The device at
location 174 probably has its tens digit addressing switch off by
one position.
Duplicate device faults are harder to locate, e.g. the carpenter put
up a partition hiding sensor 53, then the electrician noticed it was
missing and spliced in a new base and now there are two sensors
at address 53.
To identify devices with duplicate addresses, remove one of the
suspected duplicate sensors. The duplicate fault should clear
within 30 seconds if the sensor removed is a duplicate.
Disconnect half of the circuit. Allow a minute or so for the
circuit to stabilize and the faults to report. Upload the Ready
Communication diagnostics table only. The remaining duplicate
sensor, 53, should still appear, as if it is physically connected
between the circuit controller and the wiring break. Continue to
add or remove segments of the circuit in gradual increments
repeating the diagnostics upload until the physical location of the
problem detector is located.
Intermittent communication and wiring faults

EST3 counts of the number of communications and errors

associated with each device. You can use this information to
diagnose problems.

A message counter tracks the number of communications

sent between each device and the 3-AADC1 controller.

An error counter tracks the number of communications

failures occurring between each device and the 3-AADC1
controller

Both counts return to 0 each time the controller is restarted. You

can use these To help to isolate a problem, compare the number
of messages sent to a specific device to the number sent to a
neighboring device of the same type.
Devices are polled each time the system is started, and any time
an object reports its status as trouble or alarm. Polling frequency

8.72

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

differs for different objects and circumstances. Pull stations are

polled much more frequently than detectors or modules. Devices
that report communication failure are polled more often than
devices that are not experiencing the failure.

Devices with high message counts but few errors may be

pull stations or devices that change state regularly such as
monitor modules.
Devices that have increased error counts and only marginally
increased message counts may indicate wiring or device
problems.
Devices with low message counts and an equal number of
errors are non-existent devices.
All 198 addressed are polled occasionally to identify any
devices that may have been installed and not configured.

If the message and error counts are confused because of the

length of time the circuit has been running, restarting the panel
will cause a restart of the circuit and the zero the counters. You
may need to monitor the circuit for twenty minutes or more
before a trend in messages becomes apparent. Locating
intermittent faults may require extended operating periods.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.73

Service and troubleshooting

3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller

Substituting 3-AADC1 local rail modules
When substituting a known good 3-AADC1 rail module in place
of a suspect rail module, you must download the system
configuration and Addressable Analog circuit data circuit
information into the CPU module. This operation requires a PC
and the SDU Program.
The 3-AADC1 actually has two separate memories. The first
memory contains the firmware that makes the module operate. If
there is a problem with the firmware, or if an upgrade has been
issued, the new firmware is downloaded into the module using
the 3-AADC1 Code tab, which is found in the Version Control
(Code) function of the Tools, Download menu. When upgrading
the module firmware (code), you do NOT need to download the
Bootstrap data unless specifically instructed to do so.
The SDC configuration information is stored in the modules
second memory. If you suspect that the module itself is bad, you
must download the configuration information for the circuit that
will be connected to the substitute module, using the 3-AADC1
Database tab, which is found in the Version Control (Database)
function of the Tools, Download menu.
Connect the PC to the CPU RS-232 connector J5.
Table 8-41: 3-AADC1 Local Rail Module troubleshooting
Problem

Possible cause

Analog Circuit Open

1. Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose

2. Defective detector or isolator base
3. Broken conductor
4. Device not installed on circuit
5. Device not entered into SDU databases

Analog Circuit Shorted

1. Circuit incorrectly wired

2. Defective detector, detector base, or module
3. Nicked insulation between conductors

Analog Circuit Ground Fault

1. Pinched wire between device and electrical box

2. Nicked wire insulation

8.74

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Addressable analog device troubleshooting

Each addressable analog device has an integral Red LED. The
function of this LED is indicated in Table 8-42. The LED is
useful when trying to determine the communication and alarm or
active status of a device.
Table 8-42: Addressable analog device LEDs
LED

Device status

Flashing Red

Polling device

Steady Red

Alarm or Active

Table 8-43 lists common troubles and possible causes for

addressable analog modules.
For detailed information on identifying and locating these errors,
use the SDU programs Addressable Analog Diagnostic Tools.
Information about these tools appears later in this chapter.
Table 8-43: Addressable analog module troubleshooting matrix
Module not responding correctly
M500
MF

M501
MF

M500
CF

M500 Possible Causes

XF

Module is installed in the wrong location or is improperly

addressed

Module has not been entered into 3-AADC1 database

Break-off tab is set incorrectly

A ground fault has occurred on data circuit or (-) side of input /

output circuit

Module in trouble on 3-AADC1 circuit

x

Module is missing or is incorrectly connected to the circuit

ID error. Module has not been loaded into the 3-AADC1

database.

A ground fault has occurred on input or output circuit

The output circuit may be open, shorted, or incorrectly wired. A

polarized device may be installed in reverse. The EOL resistor
may be missing or incorrect

Missing or incorrect EOL resistor

Module incorrectly in alarm or active on CPU/LCD module

x

Initiating Device Circuit may be shorted, or an initiating device is

incorrectly installed

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.75

Service and troubleshooting

EOL resistor value is too low

x = Applicable
- = Not applicable
Table 8-44: Addressable analog detector troubleshooting
Symptom

Possible causes

Detector not responding

correctly

1. Detector installed in wrong location or improperly addressed

2. Detector not entered into system database
3. Incorrect device response in database

Detector in trouble on
CPU/LCD

1. Detector missing or incorrectly wired on circuit

2. ID error. Detector not loaded into 3-AADC1 module
database.
3. Ground Fault on circuit
4. Internal detector fault

Detector incorrectly in alarm

on CPU/LCD

1. Detector extremely dirty

2. Ionization detector Installed in area of extremely high airflow
3. Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke
4. Defective detector

For detailed information on identifying and locating device

problems, refer to topic Addressable analog diagnostic tools,
earlier in this chapter.

8.76

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Service and troubleshooting

Wiring problems
There are three basic causes of wire-related erratic Addressable
Analog circuit operation:
Excessive wiring resistance

Rarely is excessive wiring resistance the sole cause of

Addressable Analog circuit problems. For any length of cable,
the amount of resistance and capacitance per foot doesnt change
and the Addressable Analog circuit capacitance limits are usually
reached before the resistance limits. The digital signal operates
between 0 and 24 Vdc. Excessive circuit resistance causes the
signal to shrink from a maximum of 23 Vdc to a lower voltage,
for example 20 Vdc. The 3-volt drop in the wiring is due to wire
resistance.
To measure Addressable Analog circuit voltage drop, use an
oscilloscope to measure the peak voltage at the Addressable
Analog module and at each analog addressable device. If the
voltage difference is greater than 2 Vdc, the resistance in the
wire run is excessive. Too much resistance in the Addressable
Analog wire run is typically caused by small wire size or a bad
connection.
If the wire size is too small for the run length, the only remedies
are to replace the wire with a larger size, or install additional
Addressable Analog modules, dividing the circuit into acceptable
lengths. Breaks or bad connections in the Addressable Analog
circuit wiring can be identified by comparing the calculated
circuit resistance value (described earlier) with the measured
circuit resistance value. The measured wiring circuit resistance
should not be different from the calculated circuit resistance by
much more than a few ohms.
Excessive wiring capacitance

The second cause of erratic Addressable Analog circuit operation

is too much capacitance in the Addressable Analog circuit
wiring. Capacitance distorts the digital signal. As wiring
capacitance increases, the square edges of the digital waveform
start to curve. Excessive wiring capacitance causes the waveform
to curve beyond the point where a device can recognize the
waveform and respond when polled.
Wiring capacitance also effects the turn-on current spike. If the
turn on current spike is not present in the digital sequence, there
is a high probability the analog addressable devices
communication will not be understood by the Addressable
Analog communication module.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

8.77

Service and troubleshooting

Addressable Analog circuit capacitance problems are typically

caused by long wire runs, ground faults on the Addressable
Analog circuit, improper T-taps, or improper shielding.
If shielded wire is used, the shield must be treated as a third
conductor. It must be free of all ground faults and have
continuity throughout. If the wire capacitance is too large for the
run length, the only remedies are to replace the wire with a cable
having a lower capacitance per foot or install additional
Addressable Analog modules, dividing the circuit into acceptable
lengths.
Ground faults

Eliminating ground faults on the Addressable Analog circuit

reduces the amount of capacitance on the Addressable Analog
wiring.
Verify the Addressable Analog circuit is free of ground faults.

Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring

problems
If the Addressable Analog circuit is wired with improper T-taps
or excessive capacitance, corrective measures include:

8.78

Designing the Addressable Analog circuit properly and

re-pulling the wire

Balancing the circuit. Balancing the circuit can help in some

cases but is not a substitute for proper wiring practice. If
circuit balancing is required, call Technical Services for
additional information.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Appendix A

System addresses

Summary

This appendix provides a quick reference for interpreting the

mapping of system addresses.
Content
Address format A.2
LRM addresses A.4
Control / display module addresses A.9
Device addresses A.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

A.1

System addresses

Address format
The system derives the addresses it assigns from the panels
cabinet number and the LRMs location within the panel (see
Figure A-1). The basic address format is PPCCDDDD, where:
PP is the panels cabinet number. The cabinet number is
assigned when the installer downloads the CPU database into the
panel.
CC is the LRMs slot address. The cabinet number and the slot
address make up the LRMs logical address.
DDDD is the devices point address. The LRMs logical address
and devices point address make up the device or circuits logical
address.
The CRC Card Reader Controller and KPDISP Keypad Display
are devices supported by a 3-SAC module. However, they also
act as independent processors, and have their own pseudo points.
For this reason, their device numbers are further subdivided.
You can think of a SAC device as having this address format:
PPCCSSDD: SS is the CRC or KPDISP device number, as
assigned during LRM configuration. DD is a pseudo point within
the device.

A.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System addresses
Signature detectors
01020001 - 01020125

0102

Cabinet #1

Signature modules
01020126 - 01020250

01360129

B
+

B
-

S
H

SIGA1

A
+

A SP
- MW
KR
1

SIGA1

B
+

01370001

B
-

SIGA1

O UTPUT MODULE

SIGA2
B
-

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

B
+

2
SP
MW
KR

SIGA2
A
-

A
+

SIGA2
S
H

Slot 4

B
-

B
+

Slot 5

Slot 6
01360152

Slot 7
01370012
[SYS_ADDR_EX1.CDR]

Figure A-1: Addressing example

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

A.3

System addresses

LRM addresses
Figure A-2, Figure A-3, and Figure A-4 show the logical
addresses that the system assigns to LRMs based on the panel
configurations. Figure A 5 shows the effect of using a wide LCD
module, such as the 3 LCDXL1 Main LCD Display.

A.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System addresses
PP00

N
C N
O
C
TROUB LE

N
O

PP01

C
N
A
ALARM

N
C

N
O

PP02

PP03

PP34

PP35

PP04

PP05

PP36

PP37

N
C

SU P
TB1

Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail
cabinets

J1

A
+

NE TWO RK
OUT
A B IN B
- +
-

AU DIO
A IN
-

AU DIO AU DIO
BIN
A OU T
+
- +
-

AU DIO
B OUT
+
-

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

PP32

AUXILIARY PO WER
1
2

PP33

PP07

PP06

Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets

PP08

PP09

PP10

PP11

PP12

PP13

PP14

PP40

PP41

PP42

PP43

PP44

PP45

PP46

Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets

[LRM_ADDR_01.CDR]

Figure A-2: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/FT, 3-CHAS7 configuration

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

A.5

System addresses
PP01

PP00

N
C N
O
C
TROUB LE

N
O

C
N
A
ALARM

N
C

N
O

PP02

PP03

PP04

PP05

PP34

PP35

PP36

PP37

PP07

PP08

PP09

PP10

PP39

PP40

PP41

PP42

N
C

SU P
TB1

Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail
cabinets

J1

A
+

NE TW ORK
AU DIO
OUT
A IN
A B IN B
- +
- +

AU DIO AU DIO
B IN
A OU T
+
- +
-

AU DIO
B OU T
+

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

PP32

AUXIL IARY PO WER

1

PP33

PP06

Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets

PP11

PP12

PP13

PP14

PP15

PP16

PP17

PP43

PP44

PP45

PP46

PP47

PP48

PP49

Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets

[LRM_ADDR_02.CDR]

Figure A-3: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/CHAS4, 3-CHAS7 configuration

A.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System addresses
PP00

N
C N
O
C
TROUB LE

N
O

PP02

PP03

PP04

PP05

PP33

PP34

PP35

PP36

PP37

PP01

C
N
A
ALARM

N
C

N
O

N
C

SU P
TB1

Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail
cabinets

J1

A
+

NE TW ORK
AU DIO
OUT
A IN
A B IN B
- +
- +

AU DIO AU DIO
B IN
A OU T
+
- +
-

AU DIO
B OU T
+

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

PP32

AUXIL IARY PO WER

1

PP06

PP07

PP08

PP09

PP10

PP11

PP12

PP38

PP39

PP40

PP41

PP42

PP43

PP44

PP13

PP14

PP15

PP16

PP17

PP18

PP19

PP45

PP46

PP47

PP48

PP49

PP50

PP51

Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets

Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets

[LRM_ADDR_03.CDR]

Figure A-4: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7 configuration

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

A.7

System addresses
PP00

N
C
N
O
C
TROUB LE

N
O

PP01

N
C
A
ALARM

N
C

N
O

PP02

PP03

PP04

PP05

PP35

PP36

PP37

N
C

SU P
TB1

Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail
cabinets

J1

A
+

NE TW ORK
AU DIO
A IN
OUT
IN
A B
B
- +
- +
-

AU DIO AU DIO
A OUT
B IN
+
- +
-

AU DIO
B OU T
+
-

R
X
1

T
X
1

R
T
S
1

C
O R
M X
1 2

T
X
2

R
T
S
2

C
O
M
2

PP32

AUXIL IARY PO WER

1
2

Figure A-5: LRM addresses when using a 3-LCDXL1 Main LCD Display

A.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System addresses

Control / display module addresses

Figure A-6 shows the device logical addresses that the system
assigns the control/display modules.
PPCC0129
PPCC0130
PPCC0131
PPCC0132
PPCC0133
PPCC0134
PPCC0135
PPCC0136
PPCC0137
PPCC0138
PPCC0139
PPCC0140
PPCC0141
PPCC0142
PPCC0143
PPCC0144
PPCC0145
PPCC0146
PPCC0147
PPCC0148
PPCC0149
PPCC0150
PPCC0151
PPCC0152

PPCC0129
PPCC0130
PPCC0131

PPCC0001
PPCC0002
PPCC0003

PPCC0132
PPCC0133
PPCC0134

PPCC0004
PPCC0005
PPCC0006

PPCC0135
PPCC0136
PPCC0137

PPCC0007
PPCC0008
PPCC0009

PPCC0138
PPCC0139
PPCC0140

PPCC0010
PPCC0011
PPCC0012

PPCC0141
PPCC0142
PPCC0143

PPCC0013
PPCC0014
PPCC0015

PPCC0144
PPCC0145
PPCC0146

PPCC0016
PPCC0017
PPCC0018

24 LEDs

PPCC0129
PPCC0130
PPCC0131
PPCC0132
PPCC0133
PPCC0134
PPCC0135
PPCC0136
PPCC0137
PPCC0138
PPCC0139
PPCC0140
PPCC0141
PPCC0142
PPCC0143
PPCC0144
PPCC0145
PPCC0146
PPCC0147
PPCC0148
PPCC0149
PPCC0150
PPCC0151
PPCC0152

6 groups of 3 switches
and 3 LEDs

PPCC0001
PPCC0002
PPCC0003
PPCC0004
PPCC0005
PPCC0006
PPCC0007
PPCC0008
PPCC0009
PPCC0010
PPCC0011
PPCC0012

12 switches and
24 LEDs

PPCC0129

PPCC0001

PPCC0130

PPCC0002

PPCC0131

PPCC0003

PPCC0132

PPCC0004

PPCC0133

PPCC0005

PPCC0134

PPCC0006

PPCC0135

PPCC0007

PPCC0136

PPCC0008

PPCC0137

PPCC0009

PPCC0138

PPCC0010

PPCC0139

PPCC0011

PPCC0140

PPCC0012

12 switches and
12 LEDs
[DEV_ADDRESS_01.CDR]

Figure A-6: Control/display module switch and LED device addresses

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

A.9

System addresses

Device addresses
Figure A-7 shows the device logical addresses that the system
assigns to various rail modules.
PPCC0001
UN USED UN USED UN USED

24VD C
NAC /B
+
-

PPCC0002
PPCC0001

PPCC0003
PPCC0004
IDC /NAC IDC /NAC
1
2

UN USED

T B1

IDC
3

IDC
4

NAC IN
1/2

T B1

JP 2
JP1

J4

J1

J3

JP 4
JP3

J P1
1

J P2

1
T B2
BACK- UP
-

NAC /A
+

T B2

NAC /B
+

IDC /NAC IDC /NAC

5
6

IDC
7

IDC
8

NAC IN
5/6

PPCC0005
PPCC0006

Zoned amplifier
modules

PPCC0008
PPCC0007

Initiating device circuit

module

Sensors
PPCC0001 - PPCC0099

SIGA1

SIGA1

Signature detectors
PPCC0001 - PPCC0125

SP B
B
MW
KR
SIGA1
1

S
H

LOOP1

N/C B

B N/C

LOOP1

O UT PUT MO DULE

O UT PUT MO DUL E

Signature modules
PPCC0126 - PPCC0250

LOOP1

Modules
PPCC0101 - PPCC0199

Signature modules
PPCC0376 - PPCC0500
SIG A2
B

2
SP
MW
KR

SIG A2
A

SIG A2
S
H

Signature detectors
PPCC0251 - PPCC0375

Signature controller
module

Addressable analog
controller module
[DEV_ADDRESS_02.CDR]

Figure A-7: Rail module device addresses

A.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Appendix B

System calculations

Summary

This appendix provides worksheets for calculating system

parameters, such as wire distance, battery capacity, and memory.
Content
Network data riser limits B.2
Overview B.2
Data network specifications B.2
Cable properties B.3
Calculating a maximum length B.3
Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot B.4
Signature data circuit wire length B.5
Determining the maximum allowable branch length B.5
Determining the total loop length B.10
Notification appliance circuit calculations B.11
Introduction B.11
What youll need B.11
Worksheet method B.13
Equation method B.14
25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length B.17
Addressable analog circuit wire length B.19
Cabinet battery B.20
SAC bus power B.21
Determining the need for a remote power supply B.21
Providing adequate voltage for devices B.23
CPU memory B.26
Fiber optic cable worksheet B.28

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.1

System calculations

Network data riser limits

Overview
Cumulative data network capacitance refers to the total
capacitance of all copper wire used for the data riser. The
cumulative capacitance of data networks must be within certain
limits to permit stable network communications.
Audio networks are not affected by cumulative capacitance, due
to the method of retransmitting data. The audio network
retransmits data byte-by-byte, so the individual bit times of a
byte are restored at each node in the network.
The data network retransmits data bit-by-bit. This method of
retransmitting data restores the amplitude of a bit at each node,
but any distortions in bit timing are passed through to the next
node. Data network communication faults begin to occur at
about 23% distortion of bit timing.
Cumulative data network capacitance induces bit timing
distortion.
A fiber link in a data network electrically isolates two nodes, but
distortions in bit timing are not restored by the fiber segment.
Distortions in bit timing are passed through the fiber to the next
node. The bit transition time of model 3-FIB fiber cards is fast
enough to be neglected in determining the maximum wire length
that can be used in the data network.

Data network specifications

Here are the maximum allowed values between any three nodes
of a network.

Resistance: 90 ohms ()
Capacitance: 0.3 microfarads (F)
Distance: 5,000 feet

The following table lists the maximum cumulative capacitance

for the entire data network given various wire sizes and
transmission rates. Maximum cumulative capacitance is the total
capacitance of all installed copper wire used in the data network.
Maximum cumulative capacitance in microfarads

B.2

Wire size (AWG)

At 38.4 Kbaud

At 19.2 Kbaud

18

1.4

2.8

16

1.8

3.6

14

2.1

4.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Cable properties
Data and audio networks in an EST3 system do not require the
use of shielded cable, and networks designed with twisted-pair
can be about twice as long as those designed with shielded cable.
The maximum length of a data network varies with the
properties of the wire used. Wire manufacturers typically
provide specifications for wire resistance and capacitance.
Resistance is generally specified in ohms per 1,000 feet, and
must be doubled for 1,000 feet of a twisted-pair cable.
Capacitance is specified in picofarads per foot (pF/ft).
The capacitance between conductors of a twisted-pair is
commonly referred too as conductor-conductor or mutual
capacitance. Shielded cable has an additional capacitance
between each conductor and the shield. The capacitance of either
conductor to shield is typically twice the value of mutual
capacitance, and the highest value of capacitance must be used
when calculating the maximum length of a data network.
The overall length of data networks designed with twisted-pair
cable is about twice as long as data networks designed with
shielded cable due to the additional capacitance resulting from
the shield.

Calculating a maximum length

The maximum length of a data network can be calculated by
dividing the maximum cumulative capacitance allowed by the
highest capacitance rating of the selected cable.
For example, say you wanted to determine maximum length of a
data network using 18 AWG cable that is rated at 25 pF per foot.
The network will communicate at 38.4 Kbaud.
The maximum length equals the maximum cumulative
capacitance divided by the capacitance per foot. In equation
form:
ML = MCC / CPF
Where:
ML = Maximum length
MCC = Maximum cumulative capacitance
CPF = Capacitance per foot
In our example:
ML = 1.4 F / 25 pF/ft
ML = 56,000 ft

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.3

System calculations

Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot

The capacitive property of twisted-pair cable varies and the cost
of cable generally increases as the capacitance per foot
decreases. Following is a sample calculation for determining the
maximum capacitance per foot that a cable can have for a given
network length.
The maximum capacitance per foot equals the maximum
cumulative capacitance divided by the total network length. In
equation form:
MCPF = MCC / TNL
Where:
MCC = Maximum cumulative capacitance, from the table given
in this topic
TNL = Total network length, the sum of the lengths of
individual copper runs in the network
Heres an example. The total copper distance of a network is
26,000 feet. Calculate the maximum capacitance per foot that
can be used for 18 AWG twisted-pair cable at 38.4K baud.
MCPF = MCC / TNL
MCPF = 1.4 F / 26,000 ft
MCPF = 53.8 pF/ft

B.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Signature data circuit wire length

Circuit resistance and capacitance determines the maximum
length of a Signature data circuit. Circuit resistance affects the
wire length of the longest circuit branch. Circuit capacitance
affects the total amount of wire that can be used on the circuit.
Notes

The design of the Signature data circuit must not exceed either of
the two measurements.
There are no restrictions placed on the wiring used for the
Signature data circuit. Longer wire runs may be obtained using
standard (non-twisted, non-shielded) wire pairs.

Determining the maximum allowable branch

length
The maximum branch length is the wire distance measured from
the Signature controller module to the last device on the longest
circuit path as shown below.
Signature
Controller Module

10

12
[WIRECALC2.CDR]

Several factors influence the maximum allowable branch length:

Wire gauge and type

Number of Signature detectors and modules installed on the

branch

Number of SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smoke

detectors installed on the branch

Table B-1 through Table B-3 provide the maximum allowable

branch length for any detector, module, SIGA-UM, and wire
gauge combination. Using the wire distances specified in the
tables ensures that the circuit does not exceed the maximum
circuit resistance of the Signature data circuit.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.5

System calculations
Note: To calculate the wire distance with respect to circuit
resistance, the tables assume that the circuit is end-loaded (all
devices are clustered more towards the end of the circuit) and the
circuit uses standard non-shielded wire.
To determine the maximum allowable length of a Signature
data circuit branch:

1. Identify the device located farthest from the Signature

controller.
2. Determine the number of Signature detectors, modules, and
SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes that lie on the
same conductive path between the device identified in step 1
and the Signature controller.
3. Calculate the number of detector and module addresses.
Some Signature modules require two addresses.
4. Determine the size of the wire used to construct the circuit.
5. Find the maximum allowable wire distance for the longest
branch in the lookup tables as follows:
If no SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-1.
If 1 to 5 SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-2.
If 6 to 10 SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-3.

B.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Table B-1: Maximum branch length with 0 SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes
Signature
detector
addresses

Signature
module
addresses

Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs

18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

ft

ft

ft

125

7437

2267

11815

3601

18792

5728

2650

7038

2145

11180

3408

17782

5420

5175

6638

2023

10545

3214

16772

5112

76100

6238

1901

9910

3021

15762

4804

101125

5839

1780

9275

2827

14752

4497

125

7267

2215

11544

3519

18361

5597

125

125

6867

2093

10909

3325

17351

5289

2650

125

6467

1971

10275

3132

16342

4981

5175

125

6068

1849

9640

2938

15332

4673

76100

125

5668

1728

9005

2745

14322

4365

101125

125

5268

1606

8370

2551

13312

4057

2650

6697

2041

10639

3243

16921

5157

125

2650

6297

1919

10004

3049

15911

4850

2650

2650

5897

1798

9369

2856

14901

4542

5175

2650

5498

1676

8734

2662

13891

4234

76100

2650

5098

1554

8099

2469

12881

3926

101125

2650

4698

1432

7464

2275

11871

3618

5175

5906

1800

9383

2860

14923

4549

125

5175

5250

1600

8340

2542

13265

4043

2650

5175

4633

1412

7360

2243

11707

3568

5175

5175

4051

1235

6435

1961

10235

3120

76100

5175

3498

1066

5558

1694

8839

2694

101125

5175

2973

906

4723

1440

7512

2290

76100

3931

1198

6245

1903

9932

3027

125

76100

3404

1037

5407

1648

8601

2621

2650

76100

2899

883

4605

1404

7324

2232

5175

76100

2413

735

3833

1168

6096

1858

76100

76100

1945

593

3089

942

4913

1498

101125

76100

1493

455

2371

723

3771

1149

101125

2631

802

4180

1274

6649

2027

125

101125

2165

660

3439

1048

5470

1667

2650

101125

1713

522

2721

829

4328

1319

5175

101125

1274

388

2023

617

3218

981

76100

101125

847

258

1345

410

2140

652

101125

101125

431

131

685

209

1089

332

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.7

System calculations

Table B-2: Maximum branch length with 1 to 5 SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes
Signature
detector
addresses

Signature
module
addresses

Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs

18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

ft

ft

ft

125

6778

2066

10768

3282

17126

5220

2650

6131

1869

9741

2969

15492

4722

5175

5501

1677

8739

2664

13899

4236

76100

4885

1489

7760

2365

12342

3762

101125

4282

1305

6802

2073

10819

3298

125

5353

1632

8504

2592

13525

4122

125

125

4720

1439

7498

2286

11926

3635

2650

125

4100

1250

6513

1985

10359

3157

5175

125

3491

1064

5546

1691

8821

2689

76100

125

2893

882

4597

1401

7311

2228

101125

125

2306

703

3663

1116

5826

1776

2650

3776

1151

5999

1829

9542

2908

125

2650

3153

961

5009

1527

7966

2428

2650

2650

2539

774

4034

1230

6416

1956

5175

2650

1935

590

3075

937

4890

1491

76100

2650

1340

409

2130

649

3387

1032

101125

2650

754

230

1197

365

1905

581

5175

2491

759

3957

1206

6293

1918

125

5175

1868

569

2967

904

4720

1439

2650

5175

1254

382

1992

607

3168

966

5175

5175

648

198

1030

314

1638

499

50

15

80

24

126

39

76100

5175

101125

5175

76100

1386

422

2201

671

3501

1067

125

76100

760

232

1208

368

1921

586

2650

76100

143

44

227

69

361

110

5175

76100

76100

76100

101125

76100

101125

125

101125

2650

101125

5175

101125

76100

101125

101125

101125

B.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Table B-3: Maximum branch length with 6 to 9 SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes
Signature
detector
addresses

Signature
module
addresses

Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs

18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

ft

ft

ft

125

5045

1538

8015

2443

12748

3886

2650

4494

1370

7139

2176

11355

3461

5175

3950

1204

6275

1913

9981

3042

76100

3414

1040

5423

1653

8625

2629

101125

2884

879

4581

1396

7286

2221

125

4106

1252

6523

1988

10375

3162

125

125

3542

1080

5627

1715

8950

2728

2650

125

2985

910

4742

1445

7542

2299

5175

125

2435

742

3868

1179

6152

1875

76100

125

1891

576

3004

916

4778

1456

101125

125

1353

412

2150

655

3419

1042

2650

2869

874

4557

1389

7248

2209

125

2650

2296

700

3648

1112

5802

1768

2650

2650

1730

527

2749

838

4372

1332

5175

2650

1170

357

1859

567

2957

901

76100

2650

617

188

979

299

1558

475

101125

2650

68

21

108

33

172

53

5175

1796

547

2853

869

4537

1383

125

5175

1214

370

1929

588

3067

935

2650

5175

638

195

1014

309

1613

492

5175

5175

69

21

109

33

173

53

76100

5175

101125

5175

76100

833

254

1323

403

2105

642

125

76100

242

74

385

117

613

187

2650

76100

5175

76100

76100

76100

101125

76100

101125

125

101125

2650

101125

5175

101125

76100

101125

101125

101125

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.9

System calculations

Determining the total loop length

The total loop length is the sum of the lengths of all the wire
segments installed in the data circuit.
Signature
Controller Module

10

12
[WIRECALC3.CDR]

The total length of all the cable installed in the Signature data
circuit can not exceed the values listed below:
Wire Size
Wire type

14 AWG

16 AWG

18 AWG

Twisted pair

13,157 ft
(4,010 m)

13,888 ft
(4,233 m)

20,000 ft
(6,096 m)

Twisted-shielded
pair

5,952 ft
(1,814 m)

6,098 ft
(1,859 m)

8,621 ft
(2,628 m)

Non-twisted,
non-shielded pair

20,000 ft
(6,096 m)

20,000 ft
(6,096 m)

20,000 ft
(6,096 m)

If the cable manufacturers data indicates the capacitance per

foot of the cable, the following method may be used to determine
the maximum total loop length.
Note: In no case may the total loop length of a Signature data
circuit exceed 20,000 feet (6,098 meters).

Lmax = 500,000 / Cpf

where:

Lmax = maximum total cable length in feet

Cpf = Cable capacitance in picofarads per foot

Note: A short circuit on a Signature data circuit can disable the

entire circuit. In order to limit the effect of a single short circuit
on the SDC, SIGA-IB Isolator Bases or SIGA-IM Isolator
modules can be installed at strategic points in the circuit.

B.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Notification appliance circuit calculations

Introduction
This topic shows you how to determine the maximum cable
length of a notification appliance circuit (NAC) for a given
number of appliances.
Two methods are presented: worksheet and equation. The
worksheet method is simpler, but your installation must meet the
criteria listed on the worksheet. If your installation does not meet
these criteria, you need to use the equation method.
The methods given here determine cable lengths that work under
all operating conditions. The calculations ensure that the
required operating voltage and current will be supplied to all
notification appliances. To do this, we assume these two worstcase conditions:

The voltage at the NAC terminals is the minimum provided

by the power supply

The notification appliances are clustered at the end of the

NAC cable

Other, more detailed methods that distribute the appliance load

along the NAC cable may indicate that longer cable runs are
possible.

What youll need

Appliance and cable values

Whether you use the worksheet method or the equation method,

youll need to know:

The minimum operating voltage required for the appliances

The maximum operating current drawn by each appliance

The resistance per unit length of the wire used (/ft)

This information can be found on the appliance installation

sheets, and on the cable specification sheet.
Power supply values

For either method, youll need some fixed or calculated

operating values for your specific power supply. The fixed
values are:

Maximum voltage = 27.4 V

Rated voltage = 20.4 V
Load factor = 0.37 V/A
Power type = DC

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.11

System calculations

The maximum voltage is the highest voltage measured at the

NAC terminals. This value is not used in the calculations, but is
given so you can ensure appliance compatibility.
The rated voltage is the theoretical operating minimum for the
power supply, and is calculated as 85% of 24 volts.
The load factor is a measure of how the power supply voltage
reacts when a load is applied. The load factor measures the
voltage drop per ampere of current drawn by the load.
The power type reflects the type of power supplied to the NAC
terminals at minimum voltage. The current draw of notification
appliances can vary substantially with the type of power
supplied: full-wave rectified (Vfwr) or direct current (Vdc). It is
important to know the power type at minimum terminal voltage.
Youll need to calculate the following values relating to your
power supply and to the NAC circuit current. These are:

Minimum voltage
Voltage drop

The minimum voltage is the lowest voltage measured at the NAC

terminals when the power supply is under the maximum load for
that circuit (i.e. for the appliances that constitute the NAC.)
The voltage drop is the difference between the minimum voltage
and 16 V. This value is for use with the worksheet only.

B.12

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Worksheet method
Use this worksheet to determine the maximum cable length of a
notification appliance circuit for a given number of appliances.
Use this worksheet only if all the appliances are regulated. That
is, they must have a minimum operating voltage of 16 V.
Worksheet 1: NAC cable length
NAC1

NAC2

NAC3

NAC4

Total operating current [1]

Load factor

Load voltage drop

Rated voltage

0.37

0.37

0.37

0.37

V/A
V

20.4

20.4

20.4

20.4

Load voltage drop

Minimum voltage

Regulated appliance voltage

Voltage drop [2]

Total operating current

Maximum resistance

Wire resistance (/ft) [3]

Maximum wire length

Maximum cable length

16.0

16.0

16.0

16.0

ft
2

ft

[1] Total of the maximum operating currents for all appliances as specified for DC power. See
the appliance installation sheets for operating currents.
[2] This voltage drop is valid for regulated notification appliances only. For unregulated
appliances, see Equation method, later in this topic.
[3] Use the manufacturers published wire resistance expressed in ohms per foot. For typical
values, see Table 4, later in this topic.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.13

System calculations

Equation method
Appliance operating voltage and current

Regulated notification appliances have an operating range from

16 V to 33 V. Use 16 V as the minimum appliance voltage when
using regulated notification appliances.
When using unregulated notification appliances, refer to the
installation sheets to determine the minimum appliance voltage
required.
What if there are different types of appliances in the NAC, and
each type has a different minimum operating voltage? In this
case, use the highest minimum voltage required by any
appliance.
The total current requirement for the appliances will be the sum
of the individual maximum currents drawn by each appliance
when using DC power. Use the maximum current for the
appliance over the 16 V to 33 V range.
If all appliances draw the same maximum current, the total
current is the maximum current multiplied by the number of
appliances. If different appliance types have different maximum
currents, the total current is the sum of the maximum current for
each appliance type multiplied by the number of appliances of
that type.
Wire resistance

Typical wire resistances are shown in the following table.

Table 4: Typical wire resistances
Wire
gauge
(AWG)

Resistance
1 strand uncoated
copper

Resistance
7 strand uncoated
copper

per foot

per meter per foot

per meter

12

0.00193

0.00633

0.00198

0.00649

14

0.00307

0.01007

0.00314

0.01030

16

0.00489

0.01604

0.00499

0.01637

18

0.00777

0.02549

0.00795

0.02608

When performing these calculations, always refer to the actual

cable supplier documentation and use the actual /ft (or /m)
for the cable being used.

B.14

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Calculating cable length

To calculate the maximum NAC cable length:

1. Calculate the total current (Itot) as the sum of the maximum

operating currents for all the appliances.
Itot = Ia
Where:
Ia = appliance maximum current
See the appliance installation sheets for Ia. Remember to use
the maximum operating current specified for DC power.
2. Calculate the minimum voltage (Vm).
Vm = Vr (Itot K)
Where:
Vr = rated voltage
Itot = total current (from above)
K = load factor
For the power supply, Vr is 20.4 V and K is 0.37 V/A.
3. Calculate the allowable voltage drop (Vd) between the
power supply and the appliances.
Vd = Vm Va
Where:
Vm = minimum voltage (from above)
Va = appliance minimum voltage
For regulated notification appliances, Va is 16 V. For
unregulated notification appliances, Va is the lowest
operating voltage specified on the appliance installation
sheet.
4. Calculate the maximum resistance (Rmax) the wire can
have.
Rmax = Vd / Itot
Where:
Vd = voltage drop
Itot = total current
5. Calculate the maximum length of the cable (Lc), based on
the maximum resistance allowed, the resistance of the wire,
and the number of wires in the cable (two).
Lc = (Rmax / Rw) / 2
Where:
Rmax = maximum resistance
Rw = wire resistance factor

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.15

System calculations
Example: Youre using regulated notification appliances.
Assume that the maximum operating current for each appliance
is 100 mA for DC power, and that 20 appliances will be placed
on the NAC. The cable is 12 AWG wire, and the manufacturer
specifies a wire resistance factor of 0.002 /ft.

Itot = Ia
= 20 0.1 A
=2A
Vm = Vr (Itot K)
= 20.4 V (2 A 0.37 V/A)
= 20.4 V 0.74 V
= 19.66 V
Vd = Vm Va
= 19.66 V 16.0 V
= 3.66 V
Rmax = Vd / Itot
= 3.66 V / 2.0 A
= 1.83
Lc = (Rmax / Rw) / 2
= (1.83 / 0.002 /ft) / 2
= (915 ft) / 2
= 457.5 ft
So the maximum wire run for this NAC would be 457 ft
(rounding down for safety).

B.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length

The maximum allowable wire length is the farthest distance that
a pair of wires can extend from the amplifier to the last speaker
on the notification appliance circuit without losing more than 0.5
dB of signal. Calculating the maximum allowable wire length
using this method ensures that each speaker operates at its full
potential.
Several factors influence the maximum allowable wire length:

Wire size
Output signal level of the amplifier driving the circuit
Number of speakers installed on the circuit

To calculate the maximum allowable wire length for a 0.5 dB

loss, use the following formula:
Max length =

59.25 X Amplifier output 2

Wire resistance X Circuit load

where:

Amplifier output is the signal level in Vrms supplied by the

amplifier driving the circuit

Circuit load is the total watts required by the audio circuit

Wire resistance is the resistance rating of the wire per 1000

ft pair, see Table B-5.

For example, the maximum allowable wire length for an audio

circuit consisting of a 30 W, 25 Vrms amplifier driving thirty
1-watt speakers, using 18-guage wire would be 95 ft.
94.95 =

59.25 X 25
13 X 30

Table B-5: Wire resistance ratings

Wire Size

Resistance per 1,000 ft pair

(ohms)

18 AWG (0.75 sq mm)

13.0

16 AWG (1.0 sq mm)

8.0

14 AWG (1.50 sq mm)

5.2

12 AWG (2.5 sq mm)

3.2

Table B-6 and Table B-7 give the maximum allowable wire
lengths for various wire sizes and loads. Use Table B-6 when
designing circuits for amplifiers set for 25 Vrms output. Use

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.17

System calculations

Table B-7 when designing circuits for amplifiers set for a 70

Vrms output.
Table B-6: Maximum allowable length at 25 Vrms, 0.5 dB loss
Circuit load requirement
15 W

Wire size

20 W

30 W

40 W

95 W
ft

120 W

ft

ft

ft

ft

ft

18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm)

190

58

142

43

95

29

71

22

Over max
current limit

16 AWG
(1.0 sq mm)

309

94

231

70

154

47

116

35

48.7

15

39

12

14 AWG
(1.5 sq mm)

475

145

356

109

237

72

178

54

75

23

59

18

12 AWG
(2.5 sq mm)

772

235

579

176

386

118

289

88

121.8

37

96

29

Over max
current limit

Table B-7: Maximum allowable length at 70 Vrms, 0.5 dB loss

Circuit load requirement
15 W

Wire size

20 W

30 W

40 W

120 W

95 W

ft

ft

ft

ft

ft

ft

18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm)

1489

454

1117

340

744

227

558

170

235

72

186

57

16 AWG
(1.0 sq mm)

2420

738

1815

553

1210

369

907

276

382

116

302

92

14 AWG
(1.5 sq mm)

3722 1134 2792

851

1861

567

1396

426

588.7

180

465

142

12 AWG
(2.5 sq mm)

6049 1844 4537 1383 3024

922

2268

691

955

291

756

230

B.18

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Addressable analog circuit wire length

Table B-8 lists the maximum wire distances allowed for
Addressable Analog circuits.
Notes

Maximum wire resistance can not exceed 50 ohms.

Maximum wire capacitance can not exceed 0.05 microfarads.
Table B-8: Maximum allowable wire distance for Addressable Analog circuits
Twisted,
non-shielded
Wire
gauge

18

16

14

Twisted,
shielded

Non-twisted,
non-shielded

Max loop
Capacitance

ft

ft

ft

0.01 F

4000

1219

1724

525

5000

1524

0.02 F

8000

2438

3448

1051

10000

3048

0.03 F

12000

3658

5172

1576

15000

4572

0.04 F

16000

4877

6896

2102

20000

6096

0.05 F

20000

6096

8620

2627

25000

7620

0.01 F

2777

846

1219

372

5000

1524

0.02 F

5555

1693

2439

743

10000

3048

0.03 F

8333

2540

3658

1115

15000

4572

0.04 F

11111

3387

4878

1487

20000

6096

0.05 F

13888

4233

6097

1858

25000

7620

0.01 F

2631

802

1190

363

5000

1524

0.02 F

5263

1604

2380

725

10000

3048

0.03 F

7894

2406

3571

1088

15000

4572

0.04 F

10526

3208

4761

1451

20000

6096

0.05 F

13157

4010

5952

1814

25000

7620

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.19

System calculations

Cabinet battery
Use the following method to calculate the minimum amperehour capacity of a battery required in order to operate a panel in
the absence of AC power. Battery calculations must be
performed separately for each cabinet in the system.
Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by
all of the components that derive power from the battery while
the panel is in standby mode. Multiply the total amount of
standby current by the number of hours that the panel is required
to operate in standby mode while on battery power.
Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by
all of the components that derive power from the battery while
the panel is in alarm mode. Multiply the total amount of alarm
current by the number of minutes that the panel is required to
operate in alarm mode while on battery power. Divide the result
by 60 to convert minutes to hours.
Add the total amount of standby current and the total amount of
alarm current then divide the result by 1000 to convert to
ampere-hours. Multiply this number by 1.2 to add a 20% safety
factor to the calculations.
EST3 is UL Listed for battery operation durations as follows:

B.20

Standby: 60 hours max.

Alarm: 30 minutes max.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

SAC bus power

This topic provides information to help you determine whether:
A power supply must be added to the SAC bus
Adequate voltage will be available to CRCs and KPDISPs on the
SAC bus
The standby battery in each CRC is properly sized

Determining the need for a remote power supply

The need for additional power is dictated by the current drawn
by the devices on the SAC bus. Each 3-PPS/M can supply a total
of 7 A through two 3.5 A outputs. Each SAC line can therefore
draw a maximum of 3.5 A. This consists of the current drawn by
the CRCs and KPDISPs plus any readers, strikes, or maglocks.
If the load on the 3-PPS/M supply is greater than 3.5 A, youll
need to split the devices over two SAC busses, or add a remote
power supply.
To determine the total load on the 3-PPS/M:

1. Complete Form A (below) to calculate the system alarm and

standby load current.
2. Total the columns to determine the Total Alarm Load and
Total Amp Hours. These two totals will be used in later
calculations.
3. If the Total Alarm Load is greater than 3.5 A, the devices
must be divided between two SAC busses, each with a
separate supplyORa remote power supply must be
installed.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.21

System calculations

Form A: 3-SAC alarm and standby load

Device

Qty

Alarm
current
(mA)

Total alarm Standby

current
current
(mA)
(mA)

KPDISP

100

35

CRC

950

940

CR-5355

72

70

CR-5365

31

25

CR-5395

24

20

CR-6005

20

20

Reader sounder

CRCSND

100 mA @ 12 V

33

150 mA @ 12 V

40

200 mA @ 12 V

42

250 mA @ 12 V

47

300 mA @ 12 V

51

35 mA @ 12 V

55

400 mA @ 12 V

58

450 mA @ 12 V

63

500 mA @ 12 V

65

100 mA @ 12 V

80

80

150 mA @ 12 V

126

126

200 mA @ 12 V

156

156

250 mA @ 12 V

187

187

300 mA @ 12 V

233

233

350 mA @ 12 V

283

283

400 mA @ 12 V

376

376

450 mA @ 12 V

436

436

500 mA @ 12 V

470

470

Total
standby
current
(mA)

Standby
time
(Hours)

Amp
hours
(mAH)

Strike rating

Maglock rating

Total alarm load (must be < 3.5 A)

Total amp hours (Battery)

Note: Standby time = length of time that the device will draw standby current from battery. There
is no minimum standby time for access control.

B.22

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Providing adequate voltage for devices

To determine whether each CRC and KPDISP will have
adequate input voltage, calculate the voltage drops along the
SAC bus. Voltage drops can be estimated or actual.
Estimated voltage drop

To estimate the voltage drop use Table B-9 and Table B-10,
which show the maximum wire length for a given number of
doors at a given current load. The tables assume even spacing
between the doors and an equal load at each door.
1. First, determine the load per door by adding the alarm
currents of the CRC, door lock, card reader, and sounder.
2. Determine the number of doors you need to secure. Find the
number of doors Table B-9 then search across that row for
the column with the current you calculated in step 1.
3. The intersection gives the maximum distance from the
3-PPS/M or remote power supply to the last door.
4. If the distance to the last door in your installation is less than
this distance no further calculations are needed.
5. If the distance to the last door in you installation is greater
than this distance check Table B-10 using steps 1 through 4.
6. If changing the gauge of the wire does not work, you must
run a second power line, or divide the SAC bus and add a
remote power supply. In either case, recheck your estimates.
For example: You are putting a CRC, a strike rated at 250 mA @
12 Vdc, a CR-5395 and a CRCSND at 8 doors. The furthest door
is 500 feet from the control.
Using step 1 above, you determine that the total alarm current for
this door is 149 mA. In Table B-9 (for 16 AWG), find 8 in the
Doors column, go across this row to the 150 mA column. The
intersection shows a maximum length of 584 feet. Since the
distance from the control panel to the last door is less than 584
feet, no further calculations are needed.
Actual voltage drop

To calculate the actual voltage drop based on the actual load for
each device and the actual distance between each device, follow
these steps:
1. Start the EST3 System Builder and select the 16 AWG check
box.
2. Enter the actual alarm load for the first device and the
distance from the control panel to that device. The system
will calculate the voltage drop and indicate whether it is OK
to continue.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.23

System calculations

3. Continue by adding the actual alarm load and the distance

from the previous device for each device on the SAC bus.
4. If you successfully enter all devices with no error messages,
no further calculations are required. The panel supply will be
adequate and each device will receive sufficient voltage.
5. If an error message occurs, you have the following options:
Repeat the process using 14 AWG in step 1
Run a second power supply line
Divide the SAC bus and add a remote power supply
SAC bus wire length tables
Table B-9: SAC bus wire length for number of doors vs. current loads using 16 AWG wire
Load (mA)
Doors

70

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

650

4000 4000 2650 2000 1600 1300 1140 1000

885

800

720

665

616

3800 2660 1776 1300 1060

880

760

666

594

532

484

444

410

2850 1950 1320

990

780

660

570

498

444

399

363

333

306

2240 1600 1040

800

624

520

452

400

355

320

288

266

244

1875 1350

885

650

525

435

375

333

296

266

242

222

205

1620 1140

756

558

450

378

324

286

254

228

207

190

1400

980

665

497

392

329

285

250

222

199

1240

880

584

440

352

288

253

222

197

1125

810

522

396

315

261

228

200

10

1030

730

480

360

290

240

207

11

946

660

440

330

264

220

12

876

600

408

300

240

13

806

559

377

273

14

756

518

350

15

705

495

330

16

672

464

304

17

629

442

18

576

414

19

570

399

20

540

380

Note: All distance measurements given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these
devices at any distance.

B.24

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Table B-10: SAC bus wire length for number of doors vs. current loads using 14 AWG wire
Load (mA)
Doors

70

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

650

4000 4000 4000 3000 2400 2000 1750 1500 1360 1200 1100 1000

940

4000 4000 2700 2000 1600 1360 1160 1000

900

800

740

680

620

4000 3000 2040 1500 1200 1020

870

750

660

600

555

510

471

3480 2400 1600 1200

960

800

700

600

544

480

436

400

376

2900 2000 1365 1000

800

675

575

500

455

405

365

335

315

2460 1710 1140

870

690

582

492

438

390

348

312

2170 1505 1015

756

602

511

434

378

336

301

1920 1360

904

680

544

448

384

336

1710 1215

810

612

477

405

351

10

1550 1100

740

550

440

370

310

11

1430 1012

682

506

407

341

12

1344

936

624

468

372

13

1248

858

585

429

351

14

1162

812

532

406

322

15

1095

750

510

375

16

1024

720

480

352

17

969

680

442

340

18

918

630

414

19

874

608

399

20

820

580

380

Note: All distance measurements given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these
devices at any distance.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.25

System calculations

CPU memory
Use the CPU memory calculation worksheet, Table B-11, to
determine if a CPU requires additional memory. Each line in the
worksheet is a system variable and is referenced by a line
identification (ID) letter. The line IDs also appear in the formula
column. The result of solving a formula is then placed in the
Results column.
Enter the values for each variable in the # column on the same
line.
Replace the variables in the formula by the value entered in the
# column having the same letter as the formula.
Calculate the formula and put the results in the Results
column.
Determine the memory size required as indicated at the bottom
of the worksheet.
Note: The Systems Definition Utility will prevent you from
downloading if the compiled project database exceeds the
amount of memory on the CPU.

B.26

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

System calculations

Table B-11: CPU memory calculation worksheet

Line

Variable

Formula

Result

Base usage

N/A

N/A

70,000

Label usage

N/A

48+(22 x (H+K+L+N+Q+S+T))

Average number of characters in a

message

Between 0 and 42

Average number of characters in a

rule

Between 4 and 10 per controlled

output

Number of routing definitions

2 + (E x 8)

Number of rail modules other than

Signature controller modules

F x 916

Number of Signature controller

modules

G x 1,776

Number of zones

H x (22 + C + (J x 4) + (D x 2))

Average number of devices in typical

zone

N/A

Number of Service groups

K x (14 x C + (2 x D))

Number of AND groups

L x (22 + C + (D x 2) + (M x 4))

Average number of devices in AND

Group

N/A

Number of Matrix groups

N x (22 + C + (2 x D) + (4 x P))

Average number of devices in a

Matrix Group

N/A

Number of Check-In groups

Q x ((24 + C) + (2 x D) + (4 x R))

Average number of devices in CheckIn Group

N/A

Number of time controls

S x ((26 + C) + (2 x D) + 14))

Number of Guard Patrols

T x (22 + C + (V x 4) + (U x 4))

Number of Guard Patrol routes

N/A

Number of Guard Patrol stations

N/A

Number of physical devices

W x (46 + C + (Y x 4) + (2 x D) + 8)

Average number of Logics per device

N/A

Sum of Results Lines A to Y

A+B+C+D+E+F+G+H+J+K+L+M+N+
P+Q+R+S+T+U+V+W+Y

If result on line Z is less than 262,144, no additional memory is required.

If result on line Z is greater than 500,000 then enter the job in 3-SDU to determine the exact size
requirement (size of CABxx.bin file).
If result on line Z is still greater than 500,000 reduce the number of points on the panel, for example, by
splitting the panel into two panels.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

B.27

System calculations

Fiber optic cable worksheet

The fiber optic cable worksheet should be used to verify that the
light attenuation factors do not exceed the fiber optic budget for
any fiber optic cable segment.
Notes

The contractor installing the fiber optic cable provides items A,

B, and D.
Fiber optic budget must be greater than the total link loss (F).
Table B-12: Fiber Optic Cable Worksheet
Link Name

B.28

A
Cable loss
per unit
distance
[ ] dB/Ft
[ ] dB/Km
[ ] dB/Mi

B
Distance
[ ] Feet
[ ] Km
[ ] Miles

C
Cable Loss
AxB

D
Number of
Splices

E
Contingency
Splices

F
Total Link Loss
(dB)
C+2[D+E]

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Appendix C

Listing requirements

Summary

This appendix describes the requirements your EST3 system

must meet in order to conform to UL or ULC listings.
Content
NFPA standards C.2
Minimum requirements for UL security applications C.3
Local mercantile Grade A premises C.3
Police station connected Grade A with basic line
security C.3
Central station Grade A C.4
Central station Grade B C.5
Central station Grade C C.6
Proprietary Grade A C.7
Proprietary Grade AA C.7
Access control C.8
Holdup alarm C.8
UL and ULC requirements C.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

C.1

Listing requirements

NFPA standards
EST3 meets the requirements of NFPA 72 for Local, Auxiliary,
Remote Station, Proprietary, and Emergency Voice/Alarm fire
systems.

C.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Listing requirements

Minimum requirements for UL security applications

Local mercantile Grade A premises
Standard: UL 609
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
or
KPDISP Keypad Display
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Module
Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model
AB12M Grade A Bell in Box
24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell
Interface
3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

Bell test must be included in system programming, if not a

built-in feature of the software

System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes

bell ring on alarm

System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an

LED

System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell

monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK
Attack Kit protected cabinet

Police station connected Grade A with basic line

security
Standard: UL 365
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

C.3

Listing requirements

Central Processor Unit (CPU)

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
or
KPDISP Keypad Display
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
or
FireWorks
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Modules
Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model
AB12M Grade A Bell in Box
24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell
Interface
3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes

bell ring on alarm

System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an

LED

System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell

monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK
Attack Kit protected cabinet

Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two

phone lines with line-cut detection
or
a single line with 24-hour test

System must be programmed to provide closing

confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station

Central station Grade A

Standard: UL 1610
Minimum hardware:

C.4

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Listing requirements

or
KPDISP Keypad Display
FireWorks 2000
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Modules
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

System must be connected to a FireWorks 2000 workstation

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

System must be programmed to transmit opening and

closing messages to the central monitoring station

System must be programmed to provide closing

confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station

Central station Grade B

Standard: UL 1610
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
or
KPDISP Keypad Display
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Module
Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model
AB12M Grade A Bell in Box
24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell
Interface
3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

C.5

Listing requirements

System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes

bell ring on alarm

System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an

LED

System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell

monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK
Attack Kit protected cabinet

System must be programmed to transmit opening and

closing messages to the central monitoring station

System must be configured using two phone lines with linecut detection or a single line with 24-hour test

System must be programmed to provide closing

confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station

Central station Grade C

Standard: UL 1610
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
or
KPDISP Keypad Display
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Modules
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

C.6

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

System must be programmed to transmit opening and

closing messages to the central monitoring station

System must be configured using two phone lines with linecut detection
or
3-RCC7 a single line with 24-hour test

System must be programmed to provide closing

confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Listing requirements

Proprietary Grade A
Standard: UL 1076
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
or
KPDISPKeypad Display
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
or
FireWorks
3-SAC Security Access Module
Signature Controller Modules
SIGA-MD Motion Detector
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module

Additional requirements:

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two

phone lines with line-cut detection
or
a single line with 24-hour test

System must be programmed to provide closing

confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station

Proprietary Grade AA
Standard: UL 1076
Minimum hardware:

3-CAB5, 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14, 3-CAB21, 3-RCC7, 3-RCC14,

or 3-RCC21 with 3-CHAS7
3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5, or 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper
Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
3-IDC8/4
or
3-SSDC(1) or 3-SDDC(1) with SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, or
SIGA-UM
3-RS485A, 3-RS485B, or 3-RS485R

Additional requirements:

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

C.7

Listing requirements

Grade AA is for stand-alone or networked EST3 systems

only

Access control
Standard: UL 294
Minimum hardware:

Central Processor Unit (CPU)

3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
3-SAC Security Access Module
CRC or CRCXM Card Reader Controller

Note: The CRC or CRCXM Card Reader Controller is fully

functional and does not require a supportive PC for access
decisions. Refer to the CRC and CRCXM - Card Reader
Controller Installation Sheet.

Holdup alarm
Standard: UL 636
Minimum hardware:

3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet

ATCK Attack Kit
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply
Main LCD Display (LCD)
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
or
FireWorks
3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module
or
Signature Controller Module
plus
SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, or SIGA-UM module
Listed compatible holdup IDC devices

Additional requirements:

C.8

Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15

minutes of alarm

Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds

Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two

phone lines with line-cut detection
or
a single line with 24-hour test

IDC8/4 devices must be configured as a security zone (in the

SDU, Hard Zone Type = SECURITY)

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Listing requirements

Signature modules must be configured as security devices

(in 3-SDU, Device Type = Active Latching > Security)

IDC8/4 devices must be configured so Routing Label and

Alternate Routing Label are set to No_Cabinets (that is, the
holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel
or other annunciator device)

The system must be programmed so that all local outputs are

suppressed.

SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, and SIGA-UM module loops used

for holdup must be configured so Routing Label and
Alternate Routing Label are set to No_Cabinets (that is, the
holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel
or other annunciator device)

The central monitoring station or FireWorks workstation

must manned on a 24-hour basis

The following material is extracted from UL 636, Section 86. It

applies to Holdup alarm applications.
86 Types of Remote Stations

86.1 A holdup alarm signal shall be transmitted to one of the

following remote stations:
a) Direct to a constantly manned police department equipped for
broadcasting radio calls to cruising squad cars or to a central
station or residential monitoring station with facilities for
relaying calls to a police department with such broadcasting
facilities. The central station shall comply with the Standard for
Central-Station Burglar Alarm Systems, UL 611, or the Standard
for Central-Stations for Watchman, Fire Alarm and Supervisory
Services, UL 827. The residential monitoring station shall
comply with UL 611, UL 827, or both.
b) Two or more private stations in places of business constantly
open during the day, located within 500 feet (152 m) of the
protected premises and commanding all public approaches to the
premises.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

C.9

Listing requirements

UL and ULC requirements

The following table describes the requirements your system must
meet in order to conform to UL or ULC.
UL

ULC

Requirement

Partitioned security systems with central monitoring station reporting

A partition that contains an EST3 panel equipped with a 3-MODCOM and local
bell must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, high-level access.
When FireWorks is used as the central monitoring station, the EST3 panel to
which it connects must be in a partition that is armed 24 hours a day, and has
limited, high-level access.
Closing confirmation (ring back) must be provided at all arming stations. Use of
multiple sounders or bells is acceptable.

Partitioned security systems using local Grade A bells

A local Grade A bell must be positioned where it can be heard at each arming
station. Use of multiple bells is acceptable.
The system must be programmed to sound the bell for a minimum of 15 minutes
on alarm. If the bell stops sounding after 15 minutes (timeout), the system must
be programmed to light an LED to indicate bell timeout.
When using a 24DC12 module to power the bell, that module must be installed
in an EST3 cabinet that has a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch and an
ATCK Attack Kit.

Partitioned security systems for certification

All partitions in a certificated partitioned access control or security system must
be under the control of a single company.
In a certificated system, each separately owned business must have its own
security system.

Security systems
All security systems must specify a master arming station which receives all
security event messages. Alternately, the system may be configured so that all
messages are routed to all keypads.
All cabinets in a system that includes security functionality must include tamper
switches.
On activation, all security points must generate an appropriate output device
response. The SDU cannot guarantee correlation between security input
devices and output devices. The system programmer must ensure that all points
are accounted for. When the system includes a Grade A bell, you should create
a general rule to sound the bell on activation of any security device.

Panel programming
Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a
remote location. You must perform all panel programming on site.

C.10

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Glossary
A device or zone

An alarm device or zone

ACDB

Access Control Database program. Software that lets end users

create and maintain an access control database. The program
communicates with the system either by direct RS-232
connection, or by telephone lines to a 3-MODCOM.

activate

To turn on or energize. Pertains to outputs (including logical

outputs).

address

A number used to uniquely identify a device, output, panel, etc.

within an EST3 system

alarm

The state of a fire alarm initiating device that has detected a

smoke or fire condition. The state of a security device that has
been triggered.

alarm silence timer

A panel option that automatically silences the notification

appliance circuits (NACs) after a preprogrammed time limit after
the last alarm

alarm silence or reset inhibit

timer

A panel option that prevents anyone from silencing notification

appliance circuits (NACs) or resetting the panel for a
programmed period after the last alarm

AND statement

A system input that activates when ALL the input conditions as

indicated in its AND statement list, are active

audible circuit

A notification appliance circuit that is turned OFF when the

Alarm Silence switch is pressed.

change of state

Occurs whenever an input zone or device changes from a

restored to an active condition, or from the active condition
back to the restored condition

check-in group

A collection of input devices used to monitor the wellness of

facility occupants. Typically used in senior citizen housing.

Class A IDC

A circuit, connected directly to initiating devices, that signals a

trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit. All
devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate in the event
of a single open. Similar to Style D & E integrity monitoring.

Class A NAC

A circuit, connected directly to notification appliances, that

signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition
on the circuit. All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to
operate in the event of a single open. Similar to Style Z integrity
monitoring.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Y.1

Glossary

Class B IDC

A circuit, connected directly to initiating devices, that signals a

trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit. All
devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate up to the
location of a break. Similar to Styles A, B, C, & D integrity
monitoring.

Class B NAC

A circuit, connected directly to notification appliances, that

signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition
on the circuit. All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to
operate up to the location of a break. Similar to Styles W, X, &
Y integrity monitoring.

CMS

Central monitoring station

coder

A device that provides interruption of power to audible devices

at a predetermined rate or sequence

command list

A predefined list of SDU commands. You can activate a

command list from a rule, from another command list, or from
an external command and control system.
Users of the ACDB program can specify which command list is
executed for an access control event. The RPM exports the
command list names (labels) in the resource profile.

compile

To convert data entered during programming into a format used

by the fire alarm control panel

CRC

Card Reader Controller

DACT

Digital alarm communicator transmitter. A system component

which transmits digital alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals
to a central monitoring station (CMS) over dial-up telephone
lines. The 3-MODCOM is a DACT.

database

User-defined, permanently stored, system parameters

containing system zone definitions, device types, responses,
messages, etc.

device

Any Signature Series detector or module

device address

A number that uniquely identifies a detector or module on a

Signature data circuit

dialer

See DACT

disable

Prevent an input, output, or system feature from functioning

download

To send a compiled project database from your PC to the

system control panel.

EEPROM

Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.

Nonvolatile memory containing the system database.

emergency

The check-in group response generated when an active checkin occurs outside the normal check-in time period, i.e. an
emergency.

enable

Permit an input, output, or system feature to function.

EPROM

Erasable programmable read-only memory. Nonvolatile

memory containing the operating system. EPROM is erasable
only by ultraviolet light.

Y.2

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Glossary

external command port

An RS-232 connection which permits the CPU module to be

connected to a remotely located control system.

fiber optic

Communication format that uses light signals carried on glass

fibers to transmit and receive data

flash memory

Nonvolatile read-write memory

global domain

Features which operate in all network cabinets

group

A collection of Signature devices that is treated as a single

entity for programming purposes. Groups can have messages
and responses over and above the messages and responses of
the individual group members.

group domain

Features that operate in a specific group of network cabinets

IDC

Initiating device circuit. An input circuit connected directly to any

manual or automatic initiating device, whose normal operation
results in an alarm or supervisory signal indication at the control
panel. The electrical integrity of the circuit is monitored by the
fire alarm system.

input

A signal generated by a field device and sent to the control

panel for evaluation and responses as determined by the
system database. Inputs to the system are detectors, modules,
and switches.

KDC

Keypad Display Configuration program. Software that lets end

users create and maintain a security database. The program
communicates with the system via 3-MODCOM.

KPDISP

Keypad Display

label

A unique identifier for an object

listing

A printed version of all system configuration data contained in

the panel

local domain

Features which operate only within the local cabinet

local system

A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA

72, Chapter 3

logic functions

AND and OR statements

M device or zone

A monitor device or zone

march time

A 50% duty cycle, 120 beats per minute signal pattern

matrix

A correlation sheet that indicates the relationship between the

activation of an input and the effect it will have upon all system
outputs

modem

Short for modulator/demodulator. A communications device that

enables a computer to transmit information over a standard
telephone line. Sophisticated modems are also capable of such
functions as automatic dialing, answering, and redialing in
addition to transmitting and receiving. The 3-MODCOM
includes a modem.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Y.3

Glossary

NAC

Notification appliance circuit. A circuit connected directly to

notification appliances. The electrical integrity of the circuit is
monitored by the fire alarm system.

nonsilenceable

A notification appliance circuit that remains active after

initiating, independent of the panels alarm silence features.
Nonsilenceable NACs are typically used for visual devices.

object

Inputs, outputs, and controls which are used as the basis for
creating system rules

output

A signal generated by the system, based upon responses

defined in the system database, and sent to external field
devices. Outputs are LEDs, and modules.

output priority

A system of hierarchy that allows or prevents setting or

resetting outputs. Output priorities range from low to high.

personality code

A number code used to set the configuration and operation of a

SIGA module. A personality code is either factory installed or
must be downloaded into SIGA modules for proper operation.

power-limited

Wiring and equipment that conforms with, and is installed to,

the National Electrical Code, Article 760, power-limited
provisions

proprietary system

A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA

72, Chapter 4-4

pseudo point

An input or output point that is not a physical device. Example:

ground fault and communication fault notification.

PSNI

Positive, successive, non-interfering code

RAM

Random access memory. Volatile memory containing the

system online or active status.

reset

An active condition or command used to force an output to its

OFF condition. An outputs OFF state may be in the restored
condition (normal condition, not under the influence of a
response) or the reset condition. An output reset state contains
a priority level.

response

A list of outputs or functions that occur as a result of the change

of state of an input.

restore

Refers to a condition of an input, where the input is not active. It

also refers to the condition of an output where the output is not
in its SET or RESET condition and does not have a priority
value associated with it.

retard

The delay of water flow signals to prevent false alarms due to

fluctuations in water pressure.

riser

An electrical path that contains power or signal that is used by

multiple outputs, zones, or circuits.

RS-232

A serial communications format normally used for serial

peripheral devices (i.e., printers) from a computer. RS-232
cables have a maximum length of 50 ft (15.2M).

Y.4

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Glossary

RS-485

A serial differential communications format used to

communicate between the panel and some remote
annunciators.

rule

A logical relationship between objects defined in the networks

object list. Rule format:[rule label] (input state) (input device
type) input label : Output command (output device type)
(priority) output label {comments};

S device or zone

Supervisory device or zone

SDU

EST3 System Definition Utility program. Software that lets

programmers configure and program an EST3 integrated
system.

sensitivity

The relative percent obscuration of a detector

sequence

A series of actions separated by time delays

service group

A collection of devices that are configured for testing as a group

using the system test function

SIGA

An abbreviation for Signature A

Signature data circuit

The wiring which connects Signature Series devices to the fire

alarm panel

silenceable

Notification appliance circuits that follow the action of the

panels alarm silence features. Silenceable NACs are used for
audible devices only.

SPM

Strokes per minute

start action

An action that is activated upon power-up of the panel and

remains active until manually reset

start sequence

A sequence that is begun upon power-up of the panel

supervisory circuit

An IDC input circuit used to monitor the status of critical fire

protection equipment, e.g. sprinkler valves

supervisory open (trouble)

Condition generated when a supervisory zone is open, in

ground fault, or when a Signature Series device is not
responding to a poll

supervisory short

Condition generated when a supervisory zone or device is

shorted.

System Definition Utility

A Windows-based program used to enter and modify

information contained in the system

TAP protocol

Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol. A communication protocol

that lets the EST3 system transmit text messages to suitably
equipped and supported alphanumeric pagers, via the
3-MODCOMP.

telco

Telephone company

temporal pattern

A universal 3-pulse evacuation signal meeting the requirements

of NFPA Standard 72, section A-2-4.10(a) and ULC 527

time control

An input activated by the time of day or day of the month

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Y.5

Glossary

verification alarm

Upon receipt of an alarm by a smoke detector, verified

detectors attempt to automatically reset. Receipt of a second
alarm within the 60-second confirmation period after the
automatic detector reset period is indicative of a verified alarm.

waterflow device

Devices or zones defined as waterflow devices are not

permitted to silence their notification appliances while the alarm
is active

zone

A group of Signature Series detectors and modules which has a

unique zone number and acts as a single entity for
programming purposes, whenever any component of the zone
is activated

Y.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Index
3
3-AADC1 with IRC-3 5.41
3-MODCOM 3.3, 3.32, 3.34
3-RS232 card 3.34
3-SAC
description 3.3
device capacity 3.3

6
6 Types of Remote Stations C.9

A
AC power and battery wiring 5.42
AC power source application 3.39
AC power supply
elevator control application 3.23
remote controls application 3.46
Access control C.8
access control applications 3.1
access control system diagram 3.2
access events
command lists in SDU 3.15
access levels
visitors 3.31
ACDB
3-MODCOM receiving function 3.3
computer location in muster 3.32
configuring CRC 3.8
CRCSND configuration 3.4
description 3.7
door timers 3.9
role in a security system 3.9
transmission methods 3.7
ACDB operation
common door access 3.17
delayed egress 3.20
emergency exit door 3.25
handicap access door 3.27
intermittent locks 3.38
multiple card readers 3.31
power for intermittent locks 3.38
adding hardware 8.6
additional card readers 3.27
additional power supplies 3.4, 3.8
Addressable analog
module troubleshooting 8.75
alarm
sensitivity 1.26
alert channel 1.37
all call 1.35
all call minus 1.35
alternate alarm sensitivity 1.27
alternate alarm verification 1.27
alternate prealarm setting 1.28
amplifier
backup 1.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

amplifier 1.7
audio 4.8
backup 1.34
output voltage 1.33
output wattage 1.33
wiring considerations 1.34
amplifier selection 1.33
Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.3, 4.6
installation 4.13
anti-passback
muster application 3.11
anti-passback application 3.11
application descriptions
AC power source 3.39
anti-passback 3.11
central monitoring station 3.14
common door access 3.16
continuous locks 3.35
DC power supply 3.42
delayed egress 3.18
elevator control 3.21
emergency exit door 3.24
handicap access door 3.26
intermittent locks 3.37
maglock peripherals 3.28
multiple card readers 3.30
muster 3.32
power for continuous locks 3.35
power for intermittent locks 3.37
power from a remote source 3.42
power from an AC source 3.39
remote controls 3.45
remote power source 3.42
remote power source application 3.42
two-person rule 3.47
audio
channels 1.34
signal priority 1.10
synchronization 5.6
zoning 1.33
audio amplifiers 8.21
audio source unit 1.9
automatic door openers 3.6, 3.26

B
badging in 3.32
bar code card 3.30
batteries
compatibility list 3.5
CRC option 3.5
description 3.5
limitations of CRC battery 3.41
battery calculations B.20
booster power supply 8.9
bypass time
delayed egress application 3.20
emergency exit door application 3.25

Z.1

Index
C
cabinet coverage 1.29
cable properties B.3
cables
SAC bus 3.3
calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot B.4
capacitance of SAC bus 3.3
card access equipment 3.2
card readers
additional 3.27
anti-passback application 3.11
definition 3.6
dual LED control 3.31, 3.48
handicap access door application 3.26
two-person rule application 3.48
central monitoring station application 3.14
central monitoring stations 3.3
Central station Grade A C.4
Central station Grade B C.5
Central station Grade C C.6
chain errors 8.55
chassis
19-inch rack installation 5.22
circuit common 3.8, 3.23, 3.44, 3.46
circuit modules
removing or replacing 8.4
command lists
events with 3.15
multiple card readers application 3.31
muster application 3.34
remote controls application 3.46
two-person rule application 3.49
common door access application 3.16
communication fault 8.64
compiler errors 6.4
configuring CRC 3.8
continuous locks 3.35
continuous locks application 3.35
CPU memory calculations B.26
CRC
battery 3.5
description 3.4
input circuits 3.5
jumpers 3.8
lock output 3.7
options 3.4
output circuits 3.6
power supply from cabinet 3.8
resetting 3.18, 3.19, 3.20
CRCRL 3.4
CRCSND
delayed egress application 3.18
description 3.4
emergency exit door application 3.24
installation 3.4
CRCXF 3.5

D
data network specifications B.2
DC power supply application 3.42
delayed egress application 3.18
delayed egress time 3.18, 3.19
design considerations
audio applications 1.33
design considerations
firefighter telephone 1.42

Z.2

detector cleaning 7.6

device sharing 3.17
device trouble 8.59
device type
PIR in maglock peripherals 3.29
device type fault 8.63
diagnostic tools
addressable analog 8.70
Signature 8.51
direct connect to panel 3.7, 3.32
door ajar sounder 3.4
door contact
CRC input circuit 3.5
delayed egress application 3.19, 3.20
emergency exit door application 3.24, 3.25
door holders 3.6
door open timer 3.9
downloading
problems 8.6
dual LEDs 3.6, 3.31, 3.48
dummy loads 3.23, 3.34

E
elevator control application 3.21
emergency exit door application 3.24
emergency exit sounder 3.4
emergency exit sounder time 3.20, 3.25
energized system precaution 5.3
equipment
basic access control system 3.2
error messages 8.53
ESD precaution 5.3
evacuation (EVAC) channel 1.37
external modem
connecting for the remote diagnostics utility 5.53

F
feature/function domain 1.30
fiber optic cable worksheet B.28
firefighter telephone 1.15
floor access 3.21

G
general channel 1.37
ground fault 8.64
ground fault detection 3.8, 3.44, 3.46
ground faults 8.78
Signature data circuit 8.39

H
handicap
privileges 3.26
timers 3.27
handicap access door application 3.26
hardware
adding 8.6
substitution 8.5
hardware problems 8.5
high and low card readers 3.30
Holdup alarm C.8

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Index
I
input circuits
delayed egress application 3.20
description 3.5
dummy loads 3.23
elevator control application 3.23
emergency exit door application 3.24, 3.25
intermittent locks 3.37
internal fault 8.63
IRC-3 upgrade 5.41

J
jumper settings
AC power source 3.41
continuous locks 3.36
DC power supply 3.44
intermittent locks 3.38
remote power supply 3.44
jumpers 3.8

K
keypads
description 3.6

L
LEDs
dual LED control 3.31, 3.48
length of SAC bus 3.3
lobbies 3.16
Local mercantile Grade A premises C.3
lock circuit dummy loads
elevator control application 3.23
muster station 3.34
lock types
intermittent locks 3.38
locks
CRC output 3.7
CRCRL and external power supply 3.4
logged anti-passback 3.11

M
maglock peripherals application 3.28
maglocks
code requirements 3.28
CRC output 3.7
delayed egress application 3.19
magnetic stripe access cards 3.6
maintenance philosophy 8.3
manual audio zone selection 1.38
mapping errors 8.47, 8.52
message counters
Signature 8.57
messages 1.39
alarm format 1.39
alert format 1.40
automatic 1.14
default 1.14
modem transmission 3.7
motion detectors 3.5
multiple card readers application 3.30
multiple tenants 3.16

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

muster
3-RS232 card 3.34
partitions 3.34
report 3.32
timed anti-passback 3.11
muster application 3.32
muster station
requirements 3.32, 3.34

N
N.C. contacts 3.6
N.O. contacts 3.6
NAC circuit calculations B.11
NAC synchronization 5.6
network
applications and design considerations 1.29
layout 1.29
network data riser
cable properties B.3
length B.3
limits B.2
specifications B.2
wire capacitance B.4
NFPA 101
delayed egress 3.18
emergency exit door 3.24
NFPA standards C.2
notification zones 5.8

O
open fault 8.64
output circuits 3.6

P
page channel 1.35
page to alert 1.35
page to evac 1.35
pager messages 3.3
panel controller 8.9
partitions
muster application 3.34
passive infrared motion detector 3.28, 3.29
peripherals required for maglocks 3.28
personality fault 8.63
PIN schedules 3.6
Police station connected Grade A with basic line
security C.3
power
elevator control application 3.23
transformer 3.5
power for continuous locks application 3.35
power for intermittent locks application 3.37
power from a remote source application 3.42
power from an AC source application 3.39
power supplies
AC power source 3.41
circuit common 3.8, 3.23, 3.44, 3.46
continuous locks application 3.36
DC power supply 3.42, 3.44
elevator control application 3.23
ground fault detection 3.8
intermittent locks application 3.38
jumper settings 3.8
panel 3.8
power from a remote source 3.44

Z.3

Index
power supplies (continued)
power from a remote source application 3.42
power from an AC source application 3.39
remote controls 3.46
remote power source 3.44
transformer 3.8
transformer source 3.41
power wiring 5.42
power-up procedure 6.3
prealarm
setting 1.27
preventive maintenance schedule 7.3
primary power supply 8.7
priority
audio channel 1.34
problem classification 8.3
Proprietary Grade A C.7
Proprietary Grade AA C.7
proximity cards 3.6
pseudo point descriptions 8.24

R
rack mounting 5.22
racks
equipment 4.3
reader terminal dummy loads 3.34
recommended spares list 8.4
record of completion 6.24
remote controls application 3.45
remote power source application 3.42
remote power supply wiring diagram 3.44
request to exit buttons 3.5, 3.18, 3.20
requirements for UL security applications C.3
resetting the CRC 3.18, 3.25
resistance of SAC bus 3.3
resource allocation 3.17
resource profiles 3.7, 3.17
response lists 8.56
RPM 3.7, 3.17

S
SAC bus
3-SAC module 3.3
description 3.3
elevator control application wiring 3.23
EOL resistor 3.34
wiring 3.3
SAC bus power calculations B.21
SDU
configuring CRC 3.8
CRCSND programming 3.4
role in a security system 3.8
second card reader 3.26
security devices 3.5
selecting a page destination 1.35
selective page 1.35
sensitivity fault 8.63
sharing devices 3.17
short fault 8.64
SIGA-AAxx 8.21
Signature
detector troubleshooting 8.60
diagnostic tools 8.51
module troubleshooting 8.49, 8.61
real time status 8.65
trouble tables 8.62

Z.4

Signature controller module 3.46

Signature data circuit
basic troubleshooting 8.37
branch length B.5
determining total length B.10
ground faults 8.39
operation 8.35
wire length B.5
Signature relays
elevator control application 3.21
remote controls application 3.46
smart cards 3.6
static-sensitive handling 8.3
strict anti-passback 3.11
strikes
description 3.7
strobe
synchronization 5.6
substituting hardware 8.5
substituting known good Signature series devices
8.41
synchronization of NACs 5.6
system description 1.2

T
testing
control and emergency communications 6.7
initial and reacceptance 6.6
initiating devices 6.21
notification appliances 6.23
timed anti-passback 3.11
transformers
AC power source application 3.39
circuit common 3.8
CRCXF CRC Transformer 3.5
elevator control application 3.23
remote controls application 3.46
wiring diagram 3.41
trouble and maintenance log 7.7
trouble registers 8.59
trouble tables
Signature 8.62
troubleshooting
wiring problems 8.77
two-person rule
dual LED control 3.6
two-person rule application 3.47

U
UL and ULC requirements C.10
UL security application requirements C.3
unexpected fault 8.63
uninterruptible power supply 5.48
Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10
unlock timer 3.9

V
visitor access level 3.31
visitor and escort
dual LED control 3.6
multiple card readers application 3.30

W
Wiegand pin cards 3.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Index
wire length calculations
24 Vdc notification appliance circuits B.11
25 or 70 Vrms notification appliance circuits B.17
addressable analog data circuits B.19
network data riser B.2, B.3
notification appliance circuits B.11
Signature data circuits B.5
wiring
branch speaker circuit 4.25

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

card readers 3.27

circuit common 3.8, 3.23, 3.44, 3.46
DC power supplies 3.44
ground fault detection 3.8, 3.44, 3.46
remote power supplies 3.44
SAC bus 3.3
transformers 3.41
wiring problems 8.77

Z.5

Index

Z.6

EST3 Installation and Service Manual